You are on page 1of 394

ALS

ALplus2, ALCplus2, ALCplus2e
Access Link Series

User manual

MN.00224.E - 011

The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.

Contents

Section 1.
USER GUIDE

1
2

11

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ..............................................................................11
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .........................................12
2.1

FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK ....................................................................12
2.1.1 Artificial respiration .................................................................................12
2.1.2 Treatment of burns .................................................................................12

3

2.2

SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................13

2.3

CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT) .................................................................................15

2.4

INTERNAL BATTERY ..........................................................................................15

PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL ............................................................16
3.1

PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL .................................................................................16

3.2

AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................16

3.3

STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................16

Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION

4

ABBREVIATION LIST................................................................................................19
4.1

5

19

ABBREVIATION LIST .........................................................................................19

SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................21
5.1

RECOMMENDATION ..........................................................................................21

5.2

SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ....................................................................................21

5.3

ALPLUS2 MODULAR IDU ....................................................................................21
5.3.1 LIM .......................................................................................................22
5.3.2 RIM.......................................................................................................22
5.3.3 Controller ..............................................................................................22

5.4

ALCPLUS2 COMPACT IDU...................................................................................22

5.5

ALCPLUS2E COMPACT IDU .................................................................................23

5.6

N+0................................................................................................................25

5.7

ODU ...............................................................................................................25

MN.00224.E - 011

1

5.8

MANAGEMENT ..................................................................................................26
5.8.1 Hardware platform ..................................................................................26
5.8.2 Management ports ..................................................................................26
5.8.2.1

MNGT/1 and MNGT/2 ................................................................27

5.8.2.2

RS232 ....................................................................................27

5.8.2.3

LCT USB .................................................................................27

5.8.3 Protocols ...............................................................................................27
6

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................31
6.1

IDU CHARACTERISTICS .....................................................................................31
6.1.1 Traffic interfaces .....................................................................................31
6.1.1.1

2 Mbit/s (E1 G.703) ..................................................................31

6.1.1.2

STM1 electrical ........................................................................32

6.1.1.3

STM1 optical............................................................................32

6.1.1.4

Ethernet interface ....................................................................33

6.1.2 Alarm interface.......................................................................................36
6.1.3 Service channels.....................................................................................36
6.1.3.1

E1 (Connector name is 2 Mbit/s wayside) ....................................37

6.1.3.2

64 kbit/s codirectional...............................................................37

6.1.3.3

64 kbit/s contradirectional .........................................................37

6.1.3.4

9600 bit/s synch/asynch ...........................................................38

6.1.3.5

9600 or 2x4800 bit/s synch/asynch ............................................38

6.1.4 Modulation and channel bandwidth ............................................................38
6.1.5 1+1 switching criteria..............................................................................39
6.1.6 Cable Interface .......................................................................................40
6.1.7 Consumption and max current absorption ..................................................40
6.1.8 Fuses ....................................................................................................41
6.2
6.3

ODU CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................................41
EQUIPMENT GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS............................................................42
6.3.1 Dimensions ............................................................................................42
6.3.2 Weight ..................................................................................................42
6.3.3 Environmental condition ..........................................................................42

7

ALplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................44
7.1

CONFIGURATION ..............................................................................................44
7.1.1 ALplus2 block diagrams ...........................................................................44
7.1.2 Controller ..............................................................................................44
7.1.2.1

Service signals.........................................................................45

7.1.2.2

Firmware ................................................................................45

7.1.2.3

Web Lct ..................................................................................45

7.1.2.4

Controller LEDs ........................................................................45

7.1.2.5

SD memory card management ...................................................46

7.1.3 LIM .......................................................................................................46
7.1.3.1

Switch for Ethernet ports...........................................................47

7.1.3.2

STM-1 synchronisation ..............................................................48

7.1.3.3

LIM LEDs.................................................................................49

7.1.4 RIM.......................................................................................................49
7.1.4.1

2

Modulator................................................................................50

7.1.4.2

Demodulator ...........................................................................50

7.1.4.3

Adaptive code modulation .........................................................50

7.1.4.4

Power supply ...........................................................................52

7.1.4.5

Telemetry IDU/ODU..................................................................52

MN.00224.E - 011

7.2

LOOPS ............................................................................................................52
7.2.1 Tributary ...............................................................................................52
7.2.2 IDU loop ................................................................................................53

8

ALCplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................57
8.1

CONFIGURATION ..............................................................................................57
8.1.1 Switch for ethernet ports .........................................................................57
8.1.2 Service channels.....................................................................................57

8.2

SYNCHRONIZATION ..........................................................................................58

8.3

SD MEMORY CARD MANAGEMENT .......................................................................58

8.4

ALC BLOCK DIAGRAMS......................................................................................59

8.5

ALCPLUS2 NODE ..............................................................................................59
8.5.1 Expansion from 2 to 3 nodals ...................................................................60
8.5.2 Reduction from 3 to 2 nodes.....................................................................60

8.6

LAG - LINK AGGREGATION ................................................................................61
8.6.1 Line Trunking .........................................................................................61
8.6.2 Radio Link Trunking ................................................................................62

8.7

LINE PROTECTION THROUGH DISTRIBUTED ELP ...................................................64

8.8

ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE) .....................65
8.8.1 Service Layer OAM ..................................................................................65
8.8.2 OAM Example with ALCplus2 ....................................................................67
8.8.3 Reset Switch ..........................................................................................68
8.8.4 MAC Table clear ......................................................................................68

8.9

ALCPLUS2 FIRMWARE UPDATES .........................................................................68
8.9.1 Firmware release 1.3.3 ............................................................................68
8.9.2 Firmware release 1.3.4 ............................................................................69
8.9.3 Firmware Release 1.4.0 ...........................................................................69
8.9.4 Firmware Release 1.4.1 ...........................................................................69
8.9.5 Firmware release 1.5.0 ............................................................................70
8.9.6 Firmware release 1.6.0 ............................................................................71

9

ALCplus2E IDU DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................76
9.1

CONFIGURATION ..............................................................................................76
9.1.1 Service channels.....................................................................................76

9.2

ALCPLUS2E BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................................76
9.2.1 ADAPTIVE CODE MODULATION - ACM PROFILES .........................................77

9.3

FREQUENCY REUSE...........................................................................................77

9.4

XPIC 1+1 CONFIGURATION................................................................................78
9.4.1 XPIC 1+1 management ...........................................................................79
9.4.2 SSP protocol management .......................................................................79

9.5

2X(1+0) EST WEST CONFIGURATION..................................................................79
9.5.1 Selective E1 Protection ............................................................................79

9.6

N+0 CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................80
9.6.1 Frequency arrangement definitions............................................................80
9.6.2 GENERALS .............................................................................................80
9.6.3 2X(1+0) system with XPIC .......................................................................81
9.6.4 2X(1+0) system with hybrid coupler, two channels......................................82
9.6.5 2X(1+0) with circulator, low losses............................................................83
9.6.6 4X(1+0) with XPIC and hybrid coupler two CCDP channels ...........................84
9.6.7 4X(1+0) with XPIC, circulator, two CCDP channels ......................................85
9.6.8 8X(1+0) with XPIC and multicirculator .......................................................86
9.6.9 MULTICIRCULATOR FREQUENCY RESTRICTIONS .........................................87

MN.00224.E - 011

3

9.7

SYNCHRONIZATION ..........................................................................................89

9.8

ALCPLUS2E NODE.............................................................................................90
9.8.1 Expansion from 2 to 3 IDUs......................................................................91
9.8.2 Reduction from 3 to 2 IDUs ......................................................................92

9.9

SWITCH FOR ETHERNET PORTS ..........................................................................92

9.10

LAG - LINK AGGREGATION ................................................................................97
9.10.1 Line Trunking .........................................................................................97
9.10.2 Radio Link Trunking ................................................................................98

9.11

LINE PROTECTION THROUGH DISTRIBUTED ELP ...................................................99

9.12

ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE) .....................99
9.12.1 Service Layer OAM ..................................................................................99
9.12.2 OAM Example with ALCplus2e................................................................. 101

9.13

ALCPLUS2E FIRMWARE UPDATES...................................................................... 101
9.13.1 Firmware release 1.3.1 .......................................................................... 101
9.13.2 Firmware release 1.4.0 .......................................................................... 103
9.13.3 Firmware release 1.5.0 .......................................................................... 104
9.13.4 Firmware release 1.5.1 .......................................................................... 104
9.13.5 Firmware release 1.6.0 .......................................................................... 104
9.13.6 Firmware release 1.7.0 .......................................................................... 106
9.13.7 Firmware release 1.7.2 .......................................................................... 107

9.14

FIRMWARE UPDATES FOR ALCPLUS2E 1+1 XPIC ................................................. 108
9.14.1 Firmware release 1.0.1 .......................................................................... 108
9.14.2 Firmware release 1.2.0 .......................................................................... 108
9.14.3 Firmware release 1.2.2 .......................................................................... 109
9.14.4 Firmware release 1.2.3 .......................................................................... 109
9.14.5 Firmware release 1.3.0 .......................................................................... 109

10 ODU DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................113
10.1

ODU VERSIONS.............................................................................................. 113
10.1.1 AS ODU ............................................................................................... 113
10.1.2 ASN ODU ............................................................................................. 113

10.2

DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................ 113

10.3

CABLE INTERFACE .......................................................................................... 114

10.4

POWER SUPPLY .............................................................................................. 114

10.5

TX SECTION................................................................................................... 114
10.5.1 ATPC operation..................................................................................... 115

10.6

RX SECTION .................................................................................................. 115

10.7

1+1 TX SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 115

Section 3.
INSTALLATION

121

11 INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSURING THE ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY.....................................................................................................121
11.1

GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION........................ 121

11.2

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 122

11.3

MECHANICAL INSTALLATION............................................................................ 122
11.3.1 IDU..................................................................................................... 122
11.3.2 IDU installation..................................................................................... 122

4

MN.00224.E - 011

11.4

ELECTRICAL WIRING....................................................................................... 122

11.5

OPTICAL CONNECTORS ................................................................................... 124

11.6

CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS .............................................................. 124

11.7

IDU-ODU INTERCONNECTION CABLE................................................................. 124
11.7.1 Electrical characteristics......................................................................... 124
11.7.2 Connectors .......................................................................................... 124
11.7.3 Max length........................................................................................... 124
11.7.4 Suggested cable ................................................................................... 124

11.8

GROUNDING CONNECTION .............................................................................. 125

11.9

IDU-ODU CABLE GROUNDING KIT INSTALLATION ............................................... 125
11.9.1 Grounding kit K09283F (for RG8 or 1/8” cable) ......................................... 125
11.9.2 Grounding kit ICD00072F (for any cable with shield) ................................. 126

11.10 SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION ............................................................... 127
12 ALplus2 CONNECTORS ...........................................................................................128
12.1

IDU FRONT PANEL .......................................................................................... 128
12.1.1 LIM connectors ..................................................................................... 128
12.1.2 RIM connectors..................................................................................... 128
12.1.3 Controller connectors ............................................................................ 128

12.2

IDU BODY CONNECTORS ................................................................................. 129

13 ALCplus2 CONNECTORS .........................................................................................135
13.1

IDU FRONT PANEL .......................................................................................... 135

13.2

ALCPLUS2 1+0/1+1 (GAI0157/GAI0152) ........................................................... 135

13.3

ALCPLUS2 16E1 1+0/1+1 (GAI0155/GAI0156) ................................................... 136

13.4

ALCPLUS2 NODAL 1+0/1+1 (GAI0163/GAI0162) ................................................ 136

13.5

ALCPLUS2 32E1 1+0/1+1 (GAI0169/GAI0168) ................................................... 137

14 ALCplus2E CONNECTORS........................................................................................138
14.1

IDU FRONT PANEL .......................................................................................... 138

14.2

ALCPLUS2E 1+0 (GAI0178), 2+0/1+1 (GAI0175), 2+0/XPIC (GAI0172) ................ 138

14.3

ALCPLUS2E 18E1 2XSTM1 NODAL (GAI0176), 2+0/1+1 (GAI0173),
2+0/XPIC (GAI0170) ...................................................................................... 139

14.4

ALCPLUS2E 34E1 2XSTM1 1+0 (GAI0177), 2+0/1+1 (GAI0174),
2+0/XPIC (GAI 0171) ..................................................................................... 140

15 INSTALLATION NOTE ON FREQUENCY REUSE SYSTEMS (XPIC)..............................141
15.1

FREQUENCY REUSE......................................................................................... 141

15.2

CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................................... 141
15.2.1 Antennas ............................................................................................. 141
15.2.2 RF channel ........................................................................................... 141
15.2.3 ATPC................................................................................................... 141
15.2.4 IDU-ODU cable ..................................................................................... 141

16 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA ...........142
16.1

INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 142

16.2

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 143

16.3

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 143

16.4

GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 145

17 INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA...........159
17.1

INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 159

MN.00224.E - 011

5

17.2

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 159

17.3

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 160

17.4

GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 162

18 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA .........173
18.1

FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 173

18.2

INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 173

18.3

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 174

18.4

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 174
18.4.1 Installation onto the pole of the support system and the antenna ................ 174
18.4.2 Installation of ODU................................................................................ 175
18.4.3 ODU installation.................................................................................... 176

18.5

ANTENNA AIMING........................................................................................... 176

18.6

COMPATIBILITY .............................................................................................. 176

18.7

GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 177

19 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA
(KIT V32307, V32308, V32309) .............................................................................192
19.1

FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 192

19.2

INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 192

19.3

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 193

19.4

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 193

19.5

1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 194
19.5.1 Setting antenna polarization ................................................................... 194
19.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna ......................................... 194
19.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support ............................................................. 194
19.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure ................................. 194
19.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)....................................................... 194
19.5.6 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 195
19.5.7 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 195

19.6

1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 195
19.6.1 Installation of Hybrid ............................................................................. 195
19.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version) ....................................... 196

20 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH RFS INTEGRATED ANTENNA...206
20.1

FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 206

20.2

INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 206

20.3

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 206

20.4

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 207

20.5

1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 207
20.5.1 Setting antenna polarization ................................................................... 207
20.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna ......................................... 208
20.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support ............................................................. 208
20.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure ................................. 208
20.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)....................................................... 208
20.5.6 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 208
20.5.7 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 209

20.6

1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 209
20.6.1 Installation of Hybrid ............................................................................. 209
20.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version) ....................................... 209

6

MN.00224.E - 011

21 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF ODU ASN WITH STANDARD LOCK ...................220
21.1

ODU COUPLING KIT ........................................................................................ 220
21.1.1 ODU AS ............................................................................................... 220
21.1.2 ODU ASN ............................................................................................. 220

21.2

21.1.2.1

Fast lock coupling kit .............................................................. 220

21.1.2.2

Standard coupling kit .............................................................. 220

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA ........... 221
21.2.1 ODU AS and ODU ASN (Fast Lock) .......................................................... 221
21.2.2 ODU ASN (Standard Lock)...................................................................... 221

21.3

21.2.2.1

1+0 ODU .............................................................................. 221

21.2.2.2

1+1 ODU .............................................................................. 222

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA............. 223
21.3.1 ODU AS and ODU ASN (Fast Lock) .......................................................... 223
21.3.2 ODU ASN (Standard Lock)...................................................................... 223
21.3.2.1

1+0 ODU .............................................................................. 224

21.3.2.2

1+1 ODU .............................................................................. 224

21.3.2.3

Waveguide towards the antenna............................................... 226

22 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF 8+0 ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA ...........234
22.1

GENERALS ..................................................................................................... 234

22.2

N+0.............................................................................................................. 234

Section 4.
LINE-UP

245

23 LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP .................................................................................245
23.1

LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP............................................................................ 245
23.1.1 Equipment configuration ........................................................................ 245
23.1.2 Antenna alignment and received field measurement .................................. 246
23.1.3 Network element configuration ............................................................... 246
23.1.4 Few considerations about addresses ........................................................ 247
23.1.5 Radio checks ........................................................................................ 247
23.1.6 ACM setting ......................................................................................... 247

24 BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF
MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS ..............................................................................250
24.1
24.2

SCOPE .......................................................................................................... 250
CONFIGURATION UPLOAD AND DOWNLOAD USING SCT ...................................... 250
24.2.1 Configuration upload ............................................................................. 250
24.2.2 Configuration download ......................................................................... 250

24.3

CONFIGURATION UPLOAD AND DOWNLOAD USING WEBLCT ................................ 251
24.3.1 Configuration upload ............................................................................. 251
24.3.2 Configuration download ......................................................................... 251
24.3.3 SD Memory card ................................................................................... 251

25 LINE-UP FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC ..........................................................................252
25.1

LAN SETUP .................................................................................................... 252

25.2

LOCAL LAN-1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN-1 PORT TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN PER
PORT ............................................................................................................ 252

MN.00224.E - 011

7

25.3

FROM 3 PORT TO 3 PORT CONNECTIONS ........................................................... 257

25.4

FROM 3 PORT TO 3 PORT CONNECTIONS ........................................................... 262

26 HOW TO CHANGE ADDRESS ON REMOTE EQUIPMENT WITHOUT LOSING THE
CONNECTION .........................................................................................................267
26.1

TOOLS .......................................................................................................... 267

26.2

PROCEDURE................................................................................................... 267

27 LINE-UP OF THE NODE WITH NODAL IDU ..............................................................279
27.1

OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 279

27.2

NODE CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................... 279

27.3

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 280

27.4

TRIBUTARY CONFIGURATION ........................................................................... 281

27.5

CONFIGURATION OF THE CROSS-CONNECTION MATRIX ...................................... 282
27.5.1 Tributary - Radio Cross-connection.......................................................... 282
27.5.2 Tributary - Tributary Cross-connection ..................................................... 282

27.6

ETHERNET SWITCH......................................................................................... 283

28 EXAMPLE OF ALCplus2 NODE EXPANSION..............................................................298
28.1

INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................. 298

28.2

PRECONDITIONS ............................................................................................ 298

28.3

NBUS AND INTRA-NODE GE CABLING RULES ..................................................... 300

28.4

NODE EXPANSION FROM N TO N+K ELEMENTS................................................... 301
28.4.1 Step 1 ................................................................................................. 301
28.4.2 Step 2 ................................................................................................. 301
28.4.3 Step 3 (traffic affecting)......................................................................... 301
28.4.4 Step 4 ................................................................................................. 302
28.4.5 Step 5 (traffic affecting)......................................................................... 302

28.5

NODE REDUCTION FROM N+K TO N ELEMENTS .................................................. 303
28.5.1 Step 1 (traffic affecting)......................................................................... 303
28.5.2 Step 2 ................................................................................................. 303
28.5.3 Step 3 (traffic affecting)......................................................................... 303
28.5.4 Step 4 ................................................................................................. 303

29 LINE-UP RADIO TRUNKING (Link Aggregation Radio Side) ....................................304
29.1

RADIO TRUNKING MODE (INTERNAL PORT - PORT A) .......................................... 304
29.1.1 To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the trunking mode....... 304
29.1.2 To enable/disable the Trunking mode for the internal port .......................... 305

30 LINE-UP LINE TRUNKING (Link Aggregation Line Side) .........................................306
30.1

LINE TRUNKING MODE .................................................................................... 306

31 LINE-UP OAM .........................................................................................................308
31.1

FM DOMAIN ................................................................................................... 308

31.2

OAM-FM MA/MEP ............................................................................................ 309

31.3

VLAN IDENTIFIER - VLAN NAME - ETHERNET SWITCH PORT ................................. 310

32 LINE-UP ELP ..........................................................................................................311
32.1

ETHERNET LINE PROTECTION (ELP) .................................................................. 311

33 LINE-UP ACL ..........................................................................................................312
33.1

8

ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) .......................................................................... 312

MN.00224.E - 011

34 LINE-UP SYNCHRONISATION .................................................................................314
34.1

LINE-UP SYNCHRONISATION........................................................................... 314

34.2

SYNCHRONISATION FROM LAN3 AT 1GBIT/S...................................................... 315

34.3

SYNCHRONIZATION FROM E1........................................................................... 315

Section 5.
COMMISSIONING REPORT

321

35 COMMISSIONING REPORT FOR ALCPLUS2E IDU ....................................................321
35.1

GENERAL INFORMATIONS................................................................................ 321
35.1.1 Documentation ..................................................................................... 321
35.1.2 Site Identifiers...................................................................................... 322
35.1.3 Configurations ...................................................................................... 322
35.1.4 Network addresses (DCN) ...................................................................... 323

35.2

SITE INSPECTION ........................................................................................... 325

35.3

COMMISSIONING CHECKS ............................................................................... 326

35.4

COMMISSIONING MEASURES ........................................................................... 329
35.4.1 Tributary connections stability ................................................................ 329
35.4.2 Link Fade Margin .................................................................................. 330
35.4.3 Loops and maintenance ......................................................................... 331

35.5

ETHERNET TEST ............................................................................................. 333
35.5.1 Link Residual BER test ........................................................................... 335

35.6
35.7

FINAL CHECK LIST.......................................................................................... 336
FINAL REPORT ............................................................................................... 337
35.7.1 Link activation date ............................................................................... 337
35.7.2 Certificate ............................................................................................ 338

Section 6.
MAINTENANCE

339

36 ALARMS AND TROUBLESHOOTING .........................................................................339
36.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 339

36.2

FAULTY CONDITION ........................................................................................ 339
36.2.1 Front panel LEDs .................................................................................. 339
36.2.2 SCT/WEBLCT alarm window.................................................................... 340
36.2.3 Direction of an alarm............................................................................. 340
36.2.4 Alarms group ....................................................................................... 340

36.3

ALARMS ........................................................................................................ 342
36.3.1 Common alarms ................................................................................... 342
36.3.2 ETH LAN alarms.................................................................................... 343
36.3.3 LIM alarms........................................................................................... 343
36.3.4 Node alarms......................................................................................... 344
36.3.5 Performance Monitoring alarms............................................................... 344
36.3.6 Plug-in alarms ...................................................................................... 344
36.3.7 Radio alarms ........................................................................................ 345

MN.00224.E - 011

9

36.3.8 RIM alarms .......................................................................................... 345
36.3.9 RT alarms ............................................................................................ 346
36.3.10SETS alarms ....................................................................................... 346
36.3.11SNTP alarms ....................................................................................... 346
36.3.12STM1 alarms ....................................................................................... 347

Section 7.
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION

349

37 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION .......................................................................349
37.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 349

37.2

WEBLCT ........................................................................................................ 349

Section 8.
COMPOSITION

353

38 COMPOSITION OF ALplus2 IDU..............................................................................353
38.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 353

38.2

IDU PART NUMBER ......................................................................................... 353

38.3

COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT ................................................................ 354

39 COMPOSITION OF ALCplus2 IDU............................................................................356
39.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 356

39.2

IDU PART NUMBER ......................................................................................... 356

40 COMPOSITION OF ALCplus2e IDU ..........................................................................358
40.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 358

40.2

IDU PART NUMBER ......................................................................................... 358

41 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT.........................................................................361
41.1

GENERAL....................................................................................................... 361

Section 9.
LISTS AND SERVICES

381

42 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................381
43 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................389
44 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................391

10

MN.00224.E - 011

Section 1.
USER GUIDE

1

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A. declares that the products:
-

digital radio relay system

AS6 and ASN6

-

digital radio relay system

AS7 and ASN7

-

digital radio relay system

AS8 and ASN8

-

digital radio relay system

AS10 and ASN10

-

digital radio relay system

AS11 and ASN11

-

digital radio relay system

AS13 and ASN13

-

digital radio relay system

AS15 and ASN15

-

digital radio relay system

AS18 and ASN18

-

digital radio relay system

AS23 and ASN23

-

digital radio relay system

AS25 and ASN25

-

digital radio relay system

AS28 and ASN28

-

digital radio relay system

AS32 and ASN32

-

digital radio relay system

AS38 and ASN38

complies with the essential requirements of article 3 of the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC) and therefore is
marked CE.
The following standards have been applied:
-

EN 60950-1: 2006 “Safety of information technology equipment”.

-

EN 301 489–4 V.1.3.1 (2002–8): “Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 4. Specific conditions for fixed radio links and ancillary equipment and services”

-

ETSI EN 301 751 V.1.1. (2002–12): “Fixed Radio Systems; Point–to point equipment and antennas;
generic harmonized standard for point–to–point digital fixed radio systems and antennas covering the
essential requirements under article 3.2 of the 1999/5/EC Directive”.

MN.00224.E - 011

11

2

FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY
RULES

2.1

FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK

Do not touch the bare hands until the circuit has been opened. pen the circuit by switching off the line
switches. If that is not possible protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the conductor.

2.1.1

Artificial respiration

It is important to start mouth respiration at once and to call a doctor immediately. suggested procedure
for mouth to mouth respiration method is described in the Tab.1.

2.1.2

Treatment of burns

This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
Warning

12

Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections

Apply dry gauze on the burns

Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.

MN.00224.E - 011

Tab.1 - Artificial respiration
Step

Description

1

Lay the patient on his back with his arms parallel to the body.
If the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his
stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients
mouth and check that there is no foreign matter in mouth (dentures, chewing gum, etc.).

Figure

Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put an hand under
the patient’s head and one under his neck.
Lift the patient’s head and let it recline backwards as far
as possible.

2

Shift the hand from the patient’s neck to his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers
closed together.
While performing these operations take a good supply of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open

3

With your thumb between the patient’s chin and mouth keep
his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities

4

2.2

5

While performing these operations observe if the patient’s
chest rises. If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that
case open the patient’s mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth
and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patient’s chest
heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first
even when the patient’s nose is not obstructed, provided his
nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the
hand you were holding his head with. The patient’s head must
be kept sloping backwards as much as possible.

6

Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of
twelve/fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the
patient has regained conscious–ness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.

SAFETY RULES

When the equipment units are provided with the plate, shown in Fig.1, it means that they contain components electrostatic charge sensitive.

MN.00224.E - 011

13

Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication

In order to prevent the units from being damaged while handling, it is advisable to wear an elasticized band
(Fig.2) around the wrist ground connected through coiled cord (Fig.3).

Fig.2 - Elasticized band

Fig.3 - Coiled cord

This device has Class I LASER modules: it is not required to have a laser warning label or other laser statement (IEC 60825-1).

14

MN.00224.E - 011

2.3

CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems). This
marking of Fig.4 shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other
household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human
health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it
responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either
the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier
and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other
commercial wastes for disposal.

Fig.4 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419

2.4

INTERNAL BATTERY

Inside the equipment, in IDU unit, there is a lithium battery.
CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries

according to law.

MN.00224.E - 011

15

3

PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

3.1

PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL

The purpose of this manual consists in providing the user with information which permit to operate and
maintain the ALS radio family.
Warning: This manual does not include information relevant to the SCT/LCT management program windows and relevant application. They will provided by the program itself as help-on line.

3.2

AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE

The following knowledge and skills are required to operate the equipment:

a basic understanding of microwave transmission

installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system

a good knowledge of IP/OSI networks and routing policy.

3.3

STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

The manual is subdivided into sections each of them developing a specific topic entitling the section.
Each section consists of a set of chapters, enlarging the main subject master.

Section 1 – User Guide
It provides the information about the main safety rules and expounds the purpose and the structure of the
manual.

Section 2 – Description and specifications
It traces the broad line of equipment operation and lists the main technical characteristics of the whole
equipment and units it consists of.
List of abbreviation meaning is also supplied.

16

MN.00224.E - 011

Section 3 – Installation
The mechanical installation procedures are herein set down as well as the user electrical connections.
The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.

Section 4 – Line–Up
Line–up procedures are described as well as checks to be carried out for the equipment correct operation.
The list of the instruments to be used and their characteristics are also set down.

Section 5 – Commissioning report
This section describes how to prepare a commissioning report regarding the installation of a link

Section 6 – Maintenance
In this section a description of alarms is given in order to help operators to perform equipment maintenance and troubleshooting.

Section 7 – Programming and supervision
The ALS radio family is programmed and supervised using different software tools. Some of them are already available, some other will be available in the future.
This section lists the tools implemented and indicates if descriptions are already available.
Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.

Section 8 – Composition
Position, part numbers of the components the equipment consist of, are shown in this section.

Section 9 – Lists and assistance
This section contains the lists of figures and tables and the assistance service information.

MN.00224.E - 011

17

18

MN.00224.E - 011

Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND
SPECIFICATION

4

ABBREVIATION LIST

4.1

ABBREVIATION LIST

-

ACM

Adaptive Code Modulation

-

AF

Assured Forwarding

-

AL

Access Link

-

ALS

Access LInk Series

-

AIS

Alarm Indication Signal

-

ATPC

Automatic Transmit Power Control

-

BB

Baseband

-

BBER

Background Block Error Radio

-

BER

Bit Error Rate

-

CCM

Continuity Check Message

-

DSCP

Differentiated Service Code Point

-

DSP

Digital Signal Processing

-

E1

2 Mbit/s

-

EMC/EMI

Electromagnetic Compatibility/Electromagnetic Interference

-

EOC

Embedded Overhead Channel

-

ERC

European Radiocommunication Committee

-

ESD

Electrostatic Discharge

-

FEC

Forward Error Corrector

-

FEM

Fast Ethernet Module

-

HDLC

High Level Data Link Control

MN.00224.E - 011

19

20

-

IDU

Indoor Unit

-

IF

Intermediate Frequency

-

IpToS

Type of Service IP

-

LAN

Local Area Network

-

LAPS

Link Access Procedure SDH

-

LCT

Local Craft Terminal

-

LIM

Line Interface Module

-

LLF

Link Loss Forwarding

-

LOF

Loss Of Frame

-

LOS

Loss Of Signal

-

MA

Maintenance Association

-

MAC

Media Access Control

-

MD

Maintenance Domain

-

MDI

Medium Dependent Interface

-

MDIX

Medium Dependent Interface Crossover

-

MEP

Maintenance End Point

-

MIB

Management Information Base

-

MIP

Maintenance Intermediate Point

-

MMIC

Monolitic Microwave Integrated Circuit

-

MTBF

Mean Time Between Failure

-

NE

Network Element

-

OAM

Operation Administration and Maintenance

-

ODU

Outdoor Unit

-

OSI

Open System Interconnection

-

PDH

Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

-

PPI

Plesiochronous Physical Interface

-

PPP

Point to Point Protocol

-

PTOS

Priority Type Of Service

-

RIM

Radio Interface Module

-

SCT

Subnetwork Craft Terminal

-

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol

-

TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

-

TOS

Type Of Service

-

VID

Virtual LAN Identifier

-

VLAN

Virtual LAN

-

WFQ

Wait Fair Queue

-

Wayside Traffic

Additional 2 Mbit/s Traffic

MN.00224.E - 011

5

SYSTEM PRESENTATION

5.1

RECOMMENDATION

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

EN 301 489–4 for EMC

EN 302 217 for all frequency bands

ITU–R recommendations for all frequency bands

EN 300 132–2 characteristics for power supply

EN 300 019 environmental characteristics (Operation class 3.2 for IDU and class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport: class 2.3)

EN 60950 for safety.

5.2

SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

The ALS “plus2 family” is the new packet radio link from SIAE. These packet radio links are split mount
equipment made up of:

an indoor unit called IDU for 19” rack mounting that interfaces tributaries and supervises the full
equipment

an outdoor unit called ODU for pole or wall mounting with RF circuitry and antenna flange.

IDU units are available in the following versions

ALplus2: modular. Main circuits are divided in modules, replaceable in case of failure

ALCplus2: compact. All the circuitry is housed in a single board

ALCplus2e: compact. All the circuitry is housed in a single board.

ODU units are available in the following versions:

AS (max capacity of 341 Mbit/s)

ASN (max capacity of 341 Mbit/s)

5.3

ALPLUS2 MODULAR IDU

The unit is available in the following configurations:

ALplus2 1+0 for E1 and Ethernet traffic (see Fig.5)

ALplus2 1+1 for E1 and Ethernet traffic (see Fig.6)

The following modules make up the modular IDU.

MN.00224.E - 011

21

5.3.1

LIM

The LIM interfaces the in (out) E1 streams and Ethernet traffic and, through a multiplexing (demultiplexing) and bit insertion (bit extraction) process, supplies (receives) the aggregate signal to the modulator
(from the demodulator). In addition the LIM performs the digital processing of the QAM modulator.
Moreover the module duplicates the main signals at the Tx side and performs the changeover at the Rx
side in the 1+1 version.

5.3.2

RIM

The RIM contains:

the IF section of the programmable modemodulator (8 available profiles: 4QAM, 4QAM strong,
8PSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM)

the power supply unit that processes the battery voltage to supply power to the IDU circuits and
send the battery voltage towards the ODU

the cable interface for the bidirectional communication between IDU and ODU via interconnecting
cable

thanks to ACM (Adaptive Code Modulation) actual modulation can be automatically changed according to available S/N.

5.3.3

Controller

The Controller performs the following operations:

interfaces the service signals as 1x9600 bit/s or 2x4800 bit/s, 64 kbit/s, 2 Mbit/s (details are given
in the system technical specification)

contains the equipment software that permits to control and to manage all the equipment functionality through a main controller and associated peripherals distributed within IDU and ODU

interfaces the SCT/LCT management system through Ethernet, RS232 and USB ports

receive external alarms and route them to relay contact along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.

5.4

ALCPLUS2 COMPACT IDU

The unit is available in the following configurations:

22

ALCplus2 1+0

see Fig.7

ALCplus2 1+1

see Fig.8

ALCplus2 1+0 exp 16E1

see Fig.9

ALCplus2 1+1 exp 16E1

see Fig.10

ALCplus2 1+0 exp 32E1

see Fig.11

ALCplus2 1+1 exp 32E1

see Fig.12

ALCplus2 1+0 exp nodal

see Fig.13

ALCplus2 1+1 exp nodal

see Fig.14

MN.00224.E - 011

The compact IDU are made by a single board.
The line interfaces contain the tributary connectors and, by means of processes of multiplexing/demultiplexing and of bit insertion/extraction, provide/receive the aggregate signal to/from the modulator/demodulator. The line interfaces realize the digital processing for the QAM modulator and, in 1+1
configuration, duplicate the main signals on the transmission side and execute the switch on the reception
side.
The interfaces to the ODU contain the interface of the cable for the bidirectional communication between
ODU and IDU, and implement the IF section of the mo-demodulator. The power supply units of the IDU
process the battery voltage and supply power to the circuits of IDU and ODU. The controller section of the
radio contains the interfaces of the service channels, stores the firmware of the IDU, interfaces the SIAE
management systems through dedicated supervision ports and forwards external and internal alarms to
the relay contacts.

5.5

ALCPLUS2E COMPACT IDU

The unit is available in the following configurations listed in Tab.2.
Tab.2 - ALCplus2e IDU configurations

1+0
EPP

2+0/1+1

XPIC

EPP

2+0 or
1+0 XPIC
EPP

MN.00224.E - 011

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1

See Fig.15

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1

See Fig.16

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL

See Fig.17

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1 EPP

See Fig.15

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 EPP

See Fig.16

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL EPP

See Fig.17

ALCplus2 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1

See Fig.18

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1

See Fig.19

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL

See Fig.20

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1 EPP

See Fig.18

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 EPP

See Fig.19

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL
EPP

See Fig.20

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 2xE1

See Fig.18

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1

See Fig.19

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1
NODAL

See Fig.20

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 2xE1 EPP

See Fig.18

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1
EPP

See Fig.19

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1
NODAL EPP

See Fig.20

23

XPIC

ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 2xE1

See Fig.18

ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1

See Fig.19

ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL

See Fig.20

ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 2xE1 EPP

See Fig.18

ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 EPP

See Fig.19

ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL
EPP

See Fig.20

1+1 XPIC
EPP

The Compact IDU and EPP (Enhanced Packet Processing) are made of a single board and expansions like
34E1 2xSTM1 or 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL.
The line interface contain the tributary connectors and, by means of processes of multiplexing/demultiplexing and of bit insertion/extraction, provide/receive the aggregate signal to/from the modulator/demodulator. The line interfaces realize the digital processing for the QAM modulator and, in 1+1
configuration, duplicate the main signals on the transmission side and execute the switch on the reception
side.
The interfaces to the ODU contain the interface of the cable for the bidirectional communication between
ODU and IDU, and implement the IF section of the mo-demodulator. The power supply units of the IDU
process the battery voltage and supply power to the circuits of IDU and ODU.
The controller section of the radio contains the interfaces to internal circuits, stores the firmware of the
IDU, interfaces the SIAE management systems through dedicated supervision ports and forwards external
and internal alarms to the relay contacts.
The IDU ALCplus2e XPIC permits different transmission methods:

ACAP Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization

ACCP Adjacent Channel Co Polarization

CCDP Co Channel Dual Polarization

CCDP, with XPIC technology, in ALCplus2e IDU doubles the capacity of radio link, a clear advantage to the
network operator at the dense frequency bands.
CCDP operation provides two parallel radio streams in the same RF channel with orthogonal polarizations,
thus doubling the radio hop total capacity. Separate and independent signals are transmitted, over the
same RF channel using a single antenna with a double polarization feeder. However, despite of the orthogonality of the two signals, some interference between the signals almost inevitably occurs, due to imperfect
antenna isolation and channel degradation.
Each polarization demodulator path receives a large signal from the orthogonal polarization, causing crosspolarization interference. XPIC systems cancels this interference in order to demodulate both vertical and
horizontal signal successfully. In XPIC technology, each polarization path receives both the polar and the
cross-polar interference.
In ALCplus2e XPIC, the XPIC circuitry and ACM engine gives to the network operator high capacity and
high availability.
Tab.3 - ALCplus2e IDU configurations (updated hardware)

1+0
EPP

24

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1

See Fig.15

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1

See Fig.16

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL

See Fig.17

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 EPP

See Fig.15

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP

See Fig.16

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL

See Fig.17

MN.00224.E - 011

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 18E1

See Fig.18

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1

See Fig.19

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL

See Fig.20

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 18E1 EPP

See Fig.18

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP

See Fig.19

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL

See Fig.20

EPP

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 PWE3

See Fig.15

Hw
PWE3 2+0/1+1
ready

EPP

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 EPP PWE3

See Fig.15

Hw
PWE3
ready

2+0

EPP

ALFCplus2e 2+0 XPIC 4GE 18E1 EPP PWE3

See Fig.15

Hw
STM1 bulk
PWE3
transmission
ready

1+0

EPP

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP PWE3

See Fig.16

Hw
STM1 bulk
PWE3 2+0/1+1
transmission
ready

EPP

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP
PWE3

See Fig.16

Hw
STM1 bulk
PWE3
transmission
ready

EPP

ALCplus2E 2+0 XPIC 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP
PWE3

See Fig.16

1+1
EPP

Hw
PWE3
ready

1+0

2+0

Some IDUs with updated hardware are PWE3 ready.
Some IDUs with updated hardware permit STM-1 bulk transmission and are PWE3 ready.

5.6

N+0

The ALCplus2e radio links can be combined together up to 4 ODU connected to a multicirculator to feed
vertical antenna port and other 4 ODU connected to another multicirculator to feed horizontal antenna port.
The result is a radio link with eight streams 8+0 with XPIC. This is at 7GHz and channel bandwidth of
28MHz. See Fig.21.

5.7

ODU

The ODU unit contains IF and RF circuits that permits to transmit and receive the signals relevant the user
traffic, the management and the telemetry and it is connected with its IDU unit through a single cable.
The ODU employs four different passband filters with the following bandwidth: 7, 14, 28 and 56 MHz. A 40
MHz bandwidth is available in some RF band only (ASN6U, ASN11). The ODU unit is available in two different versions: AS (only from hardware version 003) and ASN (optimized).

MN.00224.E - 011

25

The configuration of the ODU can be 1+0 or 1+1 with integrated or separated antenna. In 1+1 configuration the antenna coupling is performed through a balanced or an unbalanced hybrid system (branching
unit).
For ALCplus2e 8+0 configuration is also available. This configuration is performed through a multicirculator
for each polarization.

5.8

MANAGEMENT

ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e equipment can be locally and remotely controlled via an internal dedicated
application software called WebLCT through Internet Browser and LAN connection. A serial/USB connection
can be used through the WebLCT console, an application that can be downloaded from SIAE site (http://
www.siaemic.com)
It provides a friendly graphic interface complying with current standard use of keyboard, mouse, windows
and so on.
Other software available for management of a network of ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e is SCT (Windows)
and NMS5UX/NMS5LX (Unix/Linux).

5.8.1

Hardware platform

The hardware platform used by SCT/LCT is based on personal computer having at least following characteristics:

microprocessor Pentium 4 or similar

1GB RAM

windows compatible graphic monitor

HD with 200 Mbyte of free space

Windows 95/Windows NT/Windows 98/Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows 7

LAN or USB connection (or RS232 ALplus2 only)

5.8.2

Management ports

The SCT/LCT program is connected to the equipment via the following communication ports:

26

MNGT/1 or MNGT/2 (Ethernet LAN 10BaseT)

RS232 (asynchronous serial line) for ALplus2 only

LCT (USB)

Embedded Overhead Channel (EOC) embedded into the radio frame

Embedded Overhead Channel (EOC) embedded into a 16 kbit/s or 4x16 kbit/s time slot of one of
the 2 Mbit/s tributary signals

In band management through traffic LAN (separated VLAN required)

MN.00224.E - 011

5.8.2.1

MNGT/1 and MNGT/2

LAN cable type

802.3 10BaseT

Connector

RJ45

Connection to LAN

direct with a CAT5 Twisted Pair

Protocol

TCP/IP or IPoverOSI

5.8.2.2

RS232

Electrical interface

V.28

Connector

SUB-D 9pin

Asynchronous baud rate

9600,19200,38400,57600

Protocol

PPP

5.8.2.3

LCT USB

Electrical interface

USB 1.1 version

Baud rate

1.5 Mbit/s

Protocol

PPP

5.8.3

Protocols

SNMP along with IP or OSI protocol stacks are used to reach and manage the equipment operation.

1

SPEED

2

ON

3

48V
PoE
FAIL

10-100-1000 BaseT/100-1000 BaseX

1

STM1

Trib: 1-8

2

USER IN/OUT

RS232

MNGT/1

Trib: 9-16

LINKNURG URG
ACT

LINK
ACT
LCT

+

ACT
LINK

SW TEST

MNGT/2

-

WAY
SIDE
CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

Fig.5 - ALplus2 1+0

1

2

ON

3

48V
PoE
FAIL

10-100-1000 BaseT/100-1000 BaseX

1

STM1

LINK NURG URG
ACT

LINK
ACT
LCT

RS232

USER IN/OUT

MNGT/1

Trib: 9-16

Trib: 1-8

2

+

ACT
LINK

SW

MNGT/2

TEST

-

48V
WAY
SIDE
CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

+

SPEED

-

Fig.6 - ALplus2 1+1

SPEED

LAN 2

Trib. B

LAN 4

2

M 3.15A
250VAC

MNGT

LAN 3

LAN 4

1
GREEN

48VDC

NURG URG
LCT

LINK

LAN 1

LAN 3

Trib. A

SD

USER IN/OUT

SW
TEST ON

+

YELLOW

-

Fig.7 - ALCplus2 1+0 and ALCplus2e 2E1 1+0

MN.00224.E - 011

27

SPEED

YELLOW

LAN 2

Trib. B

LAN 4

2

2

M 3.15A
250VAC
LAN 3

LAN 4
LCT

1
LINK

GREEN

LAN 1

48VDC

NURG URG

Trib. A

LAN 3

1

1

2

SW
TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

SD

+

MNGT

-

Fig.8 - ALCplus2 1+1 and ALCplus2e E1 2+0/1+1 and ALCplus2e 2E1 XPIC 2+0

SPEED

YELLOW

LAN 2

Trib. B

LAN 4

Trib. 1-8

Trib. 9-16

2

M 3.15A
250VAC

MNGT

LAN 3

LAN 4

48VDC

NURG URG
LCT

GREEN

LINK

LAN 1

Trib. A

LAN 3

SW
TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

SD

+

1

-

Fig.9 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp 16E1

SPEED

YELLOW

LAN 2

Trib. B

LAN 4

Trib. 1-8

Trib. 9-16

2

2

M 3.15A
250VAC
LAN 3

LAN 4
LCT

1
LINK

GREEN

LAN 1

48VDC

NURG URG

Trib. A

LAN 3

1

1

2

SW
TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

SD

+

MNGT

-

Fig.10 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp 16E1

LAN 2

Trib. B

STM1

LAN 4

Trib. 9-16

Trib. 1-8

Trib. 17-24

Trib. 25-32

2

1

2
MNGT

ON

LAN 3

LAN 4

NURG
LCT

1
GREEN

LINK

LAN 1

Trib. A

LAN 3

SW
TEST

USER IN/OUT

SD

M 3.15A
250V

URG

48V

-

+

SPEED

YELLOW

ON

Fig.11 - ALCplus2 1+0 32E1

LAN 2

Trib. B

STM1

LAN 4

Trib. 1-8

Trib. 9-16

ON

LAN 3

2
NURG
LCT

LINK

LAN 1

Trib. 25-32

LAN 4

1
GREEN

Trib. 17-24

2

1

2
MNGT

Trib. A

LAN 3

1

2

SW
TEST

USER IN/OUT

SD

M 3.15A
250V

URG

48V
1

-

+

SPEED

YELLOW

ON

Fig.12 - ALCplus2 1+1 32E1

YELLOW

SPEED

LAN 2

LAN 4

Trib. B

STM1

Trib. 9-16

2

ON
LAN 3

M 3.15A
250VAC

NBUS

LAN 4

48VDC

NURG URG
LCT

LINK

LAN 1

Trib. A

LAN 3

SW
TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

SD

+

1
GREEN

Trib. 1-8
1

2

1

2
MNGT

-

Fig.13 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp nodal

SPEED

LAN 2

LAN 4

Trib. B

STM1

LAN 3

LAN 4

LAN 3

48VDC

NURG URG
LCT

LAN 1

2

M 3.15A
250VAC

NBUS

1
LINK

Trib. 9-16

2

ON

MNGT

GREEN

Trib. 1-8
1

2

1

2

Trib. A

1
SD

USER IN/OUT

2

1
SW
TEST ON

+

YELLOW

-

Fig.14 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp nodal

28

MN.00224.E - 011

SPEED

YELLOW

LAN 2

Trib. B

LAN 4

M 3.15A
250V

2
LAN 3

LAN 4
LCT

R
GREEN

LINK

LAN 1

48V

NURG URG

1

SW

Trib. A

LAN 3

+

MNGT

TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

-

Fig.15 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1

SPEED

LAN 2

Trib. B

STM1

LAN 4

Trib. 17-24

Trib. 9-16

Trib. 25-32

M 3.15A
250V

ON

MNGT

LAN 3

LAN 4

NURG URG

1

LCT

R
GREEN

Trib. 1-8

2

1

2

LINK

LAN 1

SW

Trib. A

LAN 3

TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

48V

+

YELLOW

-

Fig.16 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1

SPEED

LAN 2

LAN 4

Trib. B

STM1

ON

LAN 3

GREEN

Trib. 9-16

2

M 3.15A
250V

NBUS

LAN 4

1

R

Trib. 1-8
1

2

1

2
MNGT

NURG

LCT
LINK

LAN 1

LAN 3

48V

URG

SW

Trib. A

TEST

USER IN/OUT

-

+

YELLOW

ON

Fig.17 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL

SPEED

LAN 2

Trib. B

LAN 4

MNGT

LAN 3

1

LAN 4

1

2

LINK

LAN 1

1
SW

Trib. A

LAN 3

48V

NURG URG

LCT

R
GREEN

2

M 3.15A
250V

2

+

YELLOW

TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

-

Fig.18 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1

SPEED

LAN 2

Trib. B

STM1

LAN 4

Trib. 9-16

Trib. 17-24

Trib. 25-32
2

ON
LAN 3

2

1

LAN 4

1
LINK

LAN 1

48V
1

SW

Trib. A

LAN 3

M 3.15A
250V

NURG URG

LCT

R
GREEN

Trib. 1-8

2

1

2
MNGT

+

YELLOW

TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

-

Fig.19 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1

SPEED

LAN 2

LAN 4

Trib. B

STM1
1

2

ON

MNGT

LAN 3

LINK

LAN 1

LAN 3

Trib. A

2

M 3.15A
250V
1

2

48V

NURG URG

1

LCT

R

Trib. 9-16

2
NBUS

LAN 4

1
GREEN

Trib. 1-8
1

2

SW
USER IN/OUT

TEST ON

+

YELLOW

-

Fig.20 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL

MN.00224.E - 011

29

Fig.21 - N+0

30

MN.00224.E - 011

6

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

6.1

IDU CHARACTERISTICS

In the following paragraphs are listed only the main characteristics of an IDU typology.
Further information are included in the chapter relevant that IDU.

6.1.1

Traffic interfaces

ALplus2, max transmitted capacity 341 Mbit/s:
-

16E1 G.703 75/120 Ohm (2SCSI connector, 8E1 each)

-

2 STM1 (SFP connector)

-

3 Ethernet ports: 2 RJ45, electrical (LAN1 and LAN2) and 2 SFP, optical (LAN1 and LAN3). LAN1
can be set electrical or optical.

ALCplus2, max transmitted capacity 341 Mbit/s. Traffic options can vary depending on IDU version:
-

18E1 G.703 75/120 Ohm (2SCSI connectors, 8E1 each + 2RJ45)

-

34E1 G.703 75/120 Ohm (4SCSI connectors, 8E1 each + 2RJ45)

-

2 STM1 (SFP connector)

-

4 Ethernet ports: 4 RJ45, electrical (LAN1, LAN2, LAN3 and LAN4) and 2 SFP, optical (LAN3 and
LAN4). LAN3 and LAN4 can be set electrical or optical

-

2 BUS for traffic connections with other ALCplus2 IDUs (same version).

ALCplus2e, max transmitted capacity 682 Mbit/s, 341 Mbit/s, per carrier (IDU 2+0/XPIC). Traffic
options can vary depending on IDU version:
-

18E1 G.703 75/120 Ohm (2SCSI connectors, 8E1 each + 2RJ45)

-

34E1 G.703 75/120 Ohm (4SCSI connectors, 8E1 each + 2RJ45)

-

2 STM1 (SFP connector)

-

4 Ethernet ports: 4 RJ45, electrical (LAN1, LAN2, LAN3 and LAN4) and 2 SFP, optical (LAN3 and
LAN4). LAN3 and LAN4 can be set electrical or optical

-

2 BUS for traffic connections with other ALCplus2e IDUs (same version, TBA).

6.1.1.1

2 Mbit/s (E1 G.703)

Input side

Bit rate

2048 kbit/s ±50 ppm

Line code

HDB3

Rated impedance

75 Ohm or 120 Ohm

MN.00224.E - 011

31

Rated level

2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm

Return loss

12 dB from 57 kHz to 102 kHz
18 dB from 102 kHz to 2048 kHz
14 dB from 2048 kHz to 3072 kHz

Max attenuation of the input cable

6 dB according to

Accepted jitter

see Tab. 2, CCITT Rec. G.823

Transfer function

see Fig. 1, CCITT Rec. G.742

Connector type

SCSI 50 pin

f trend

Output side

Bit rate

2048 kbit/s ±50 ppm

Rated impedance

75 Ohm or 120 Ohm

Rated level

2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm

Output jitter

according to G.742/G.823

Pulse shape

see Fig. 15, CCITT Rec. G.703

Connector type

SCSI 50 pin

6.1.1.2

STM1 electrical

Input side

Bit rate

155520 kbit/s ±4.6 ppm

Line code

CMI

Rated impedance

75 Ohm

Rated level

1 Vpp ±0.1V

Return loss

15 dB from 8 MHz to 240 MHz

Max attenuation of the input cable

12.7 dB at 78 MHz ( f trend)

Output side

Bit rate

155520 kbit/s ±4.6 ppm

Rated level

1 Vpp ±0.1 V

Pulse shape

see Fig. 24 and Fig. 25 of ITU-T Rec. G.703

6.1.1.3

STM1 optical

The STM1 interface can be specialised for different applications, by simply equipping the STM1 interface
with the appropriate pluggable optical or electrical transceiver. Optical interface has LC connectors. Electric
interface has 1.0/2.3 connectors. The characteristics of all the possible optical interfaces are summarised
in Tab.4.

32

MN.00224.E - 011

Tab.4 - Optical interface characteristics
Interface

Ref.

Launched
power (dBm)

Minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)

Operating
wavelength

Transceiver

Fibre

Distance
(km)

L-1.2

G.957

0 ... -5

-34

1480 - 1580

Laser

Single-Mode

Up to 80

L-1.1

G.957

0 ... -5

-34

1263 - 1360

Laser

Single-Mode

Up to 40

S-1.1

G.957

-8 ... -15

-28

1263 - 1360

Laser

Single-Mode

Up to 15

I-1

ANSI

-14 ... -20

-28

1263 - 1360

Laser

MultiMode

Up to 2

The LIM is provided with Automatic Laser Shutdown as prescribed by ITU-T G.664 Recommendation.

6.1.1.4
-

Ethernet interface

Ethernet connectors

IEEE 802.3 10/100/1000 BaseT RJ45
see also Tab.5

Tab.5 - Ethernet optical interfaces characteristics, SPF and LLC connectors
Operating wavelength nm

Fibre

Distance

IEEE
802.3

1310

Multimode

Up to 550m

Gigabit Ethernet
1000BaseSx

IEEE
802.3z

850

Multimode

Up to 2km

Gigabit Ethernet
1000BaseLx

IEEE
802.3z

9.5dB

1310

Single Mode

Up to 10km

Gigabit Ethernet
1000BaseLx

IEEE
802.3z

19dB

1310

Single Mode

Up to 40km

Gigabit Ethernet
1000BaseLx

IEEE
802.3z

25dB

1550

Single Mode

Up to 80km

Interface

Ref.

Fast Ethernet
100BaseFx

Link budget

-

Ethernet switch functionality

MAC Switching
MAC Learning
MAC Ageing
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.3x Flow Control
IEEE 802.1p QoS
IP-V4 ToS/DSCP
IP-V6 TC/DSCP
IEEE 802.1D STP
IEEE 802.1W RSTP

-

Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

see Tab.6

MN.00224.E - 011

33

Tab.6 - Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) for ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
(Ethernet only)
Bandwidth

7 MHz

14 MHz

28 MHz

56 MHz

-

34

Modulation

Frame Size (byte)
64

128

256

512

1024

1518

4QAMs

10.1

9.4

9.1

8.9

8.7

8.7

4QAM

12.5

11.6

11.2

11.0

10.8

10.7

8PSK

17.1

16.0

15.4

15.1

14.8

14.7

16QAM

24.3

22.7

21.8

21.4

21.0

20.9

32QAM

29.3

27.4

26.4

25.8

25.4

25.2

64QAM

36.3

33.8

32.6

31.9

31.3

31.2

128QAM

40.7

38.0

36.6

35.8

35.2

35.0

256QAM

47.9

44.7

43.0

42.2

41.4

41.2

4QAMs

20.3

18.9

18.2

17.8

17.5

17.4

4QAM

24.2

22.6

21.7

21.3

20.9

20.8

8PSK

33.7

31.4

30.3

29.6

29.1

29.0

16QAM

47.6

44.5

42.8

41.9

41.2

41.0

32QAM

59.7

55.8

53.7

52.6

51.6

51.4

64QAM

71.5

66.7

64.2

62.9

61.8

61.5

128QAM

83.1

77.6

74.7

73.2

71.9

71.5

256QAM

97.7

91.2

87.7

85.9

84.4

84.0

4QAMs

41.5

38.6

37.2

36.4

35.8

35.6

4QAM

48.7

45.3

43.6

42.7

41.9

41.7

8PSK

72.8

67.7

65.2

63.9

62.7

62.4

16QAM

96.7

90.0

86.6

84.8

83.4

82.9

32QAM

121.1

112.7

108.5

106.2

104.4

103.8

64QAM

145.0

135.0

129.9

127.3

125.0

124.4

128QAM

168.7

157.0

151.1

148.0

145.4

144.7

256QAM

198.1

184.4

177.5

173.9

170.8

169.9

4QAMs

82.3

76.6

73.6

72.1

71.2

70.9

4QAM

95.7

89.1

85.6

83.8

82.8

82.5

8PSK

142.9

133.0

127.7

125.0

123.5

123.1

16QAM

192.9

179.0

171.9

168.3

166.1

165.5

32QAM

235.3

218.4

209.8

205.3

202.7

201.9

64QAM

280.0

259.8

249.6

244.3

241.1

240.2

128QAM

333.3

309.6

297.4

291.0

288.2

287.2

256QAM

396.2

369.9

355.3

347.7

343.2

341.9

Estimated Ethernet throughput (Mbit/s)

see Tab.7

MN.00224.E - 011

Tab.7 - Estimated Ethernet throughput
Bandwidth

40 MHz

-

Frame size (byte)

Modul.

64

1518

4QAMs

57

49

4QAM

69

60

8PSK

100

86

16QAM

136

117

32QAM

164

141

64QAM

202

174

128QAM

238

205

256QAM

277

239

Guaranteed ethernet latency (ms)

see Tab.8

Tab.8 - Guaranteed Ethernet Latency (ms) for ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e (Ethernet only)
Bandwidth

7 MHz

14 MHz

MN.00224.E - 011

Modulation

Frame Size (byte)
64

128

256

512

1024

1518

10000

4QAMs

1.042

1.111

1.248

1.522

2.09

2.609

11.684

4QAM

0.844

0.900

1.011

1.233

1.693

2.113

9.465

8PSK

0.627

0.668

0.750

0.913

1.229

1.541

6.974

16QAM

0.477

0.505

0.560

0.67

0.895

1.115

4.755

32QAM

0.401

0.426

0.475

0.573

0.756

0.938

4.214

64QAM

0.477

0.496

0.533

0.607

0.768

0.908

3.35

128QAM

0.52

0.537

0.572

0.642

0.774

0.914

3.222

256QAM

0.507

0.521

0.550

0.608

0.726

0.845

2.761

4QAMs

0.954

0.987

1.053

1.186

1.462

1.715

6.104

4QAM

0.8

0.828

0.884

0.995

1.226

1.439

5.12

8PSK

0.575

0.596

0.637

0.719

0.882

1.044

3.557

16QAM

0.418

0.432

0.461

0.518

0.639

0.757

2.634

32QAM

0.345

0.357

0.381

0.428

0.518

0.618

2.176

64QAM

0.439

0.449

0.469

0.51

0.59

0.669

2.02

128QAM

0.458

0.467

0.486

0.523

0.594

0.663

1.907

256QAM

0.444

0.452

0.468

0.499

0.557

0.623

1.656

35

28 MHz

56 MHz

6.1.2

4QAMs

0.475

0.492

0.526

0.595

0.735

0.867

3.136

4QAM

0.406

0.421

0.450

0.508

0.628

0.74

2.677

8PSK

0.274

0.284

0.305

0.347

0.426

0.508

1.881

16QAM

0.214

0.222

0.238

0.271

0.334

0.395

1.483

32QAM

0.176

0.183

0.197

0.224

0.276

0.326

1.235

64QAM

0.227

0.232

0.243

0.265

0.311

0.356

1.067

128QAM

0.237

0.242

0.252

0.272

0.312

0.351

1.003

256QAM

0.231

0.236

0.246

0.265

0.298

0.333

0.982

4QAMs

0.241

0.250

0.268

0.304

0.377

0.447

1.651

4QAM

0.207

0.215

0.230

0.261

0.324

0.384

1.418

8PSK

0.14

0.146

0.158

0.181

0.226

0.27

1.052

16QAM

0.112

0.117

0.126

0.144

0.179

0.214

0.83

32QAM

0.094

0.098

0.106

0.122

0.154

0.185

0.697

64QAM

0.125

0.129

0.137

0.152

0.178

0.205

0.71

128QAM

0.126

0.129

0.135

0.147

0.172

0.196

0.601

256QAM

0.121

0.124

0.129

0.14

0.162

0.183

0.549

Alarm interface

User output
-

Relay contacts

normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC)

-

Open contacts R min.

100 MOhm at 500 Vdc

-

Closed contacts R max.

0.5 Ohm

-

Switching voltage V max.

60 Vdc 30 Vac

-

Switching current I max.

1A

User input
-

Equivalent circuit recognized as a closed contact

200 Ohm resist. (max) referred to -6V (min)

-

Equivalent circuit recognized as an open contact

60 kOhm (min) referred to +4 v (max)

6.1.3

Service channels

ALplus2 only.
Two service channels are available:

36

V11 64 kbit/s co/contradirectional

E1: configurable as Extra E1-1 or Extra E1-2 (connector name is “2 Mbit/s wayside” but is “in band”.

MN.00224.E - 011

6.1.3.1

E1 (Connector name is 2 Mbit/s wayside)

This E1 is “in band”. Only the name is “wayside”.

Input side

Bit rate

2048 kbit/s ±50 ppm

Line code

HDB3

Rated impedance

75 Ohm or 120 Ohm

Rated level

2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm

Return loss

12 dB from 57 kHz to 102 kHz
18 dB from 102 kHz to 2048 kHz
14 dB from 2048 kHz to 3072 kHz

Max attenuation of the input cable

6 dB according to

Accepted jitter

see Tab. 2, CCITT Rec. G.823

Transfer function

see Fig. 1, CCITT Rec. G.742

Connector type

RJ45 (in/out in the same conn.)

f trend

Output side

Bit rate

2048 kbit/s ±50 ppm

Rated impedance

75 Ohm or 120 Ohm

Rated level

2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm

Output jitter

according to G.742/G.823

Pulse shape

see Fig. 15, CCITT Rec. G.703

Connector type

RJ45 (in/out in the same conn.)

6.1.3.2

64 kbit/s codirectional

Tolerance

± 100 ppm

Coding

synch + data + octet as per G.703

Impedance

120 Ohm

Max attenuation of the input cable

3 dB at 128 kHz

User side

CCITT Rec. G.703

Input/output level

1 Vp/120 Ohm ±0.1 V

Return loss

see par. 1.2.1.3 in CCITT Rec. G.703

Connector

RJ45

6.1.3.3

64 kbit/s contradirectional

Tolerance

± 100 ppm

Coding

clock and data on separate wires

Impedance

120 Ohm

Max attenuation of the input cable

3 dB at 128 kHz

MN.00224.E - 011

37

Equipment side

contradirectional

Input/output level

1 Vp/120 Ohm ±0.1 V

Electrical interface

CCITT Rec. V.11

Connector

RJ45

6.1.3.4

Data interface

RS232

Electrical interface

CCITT Rec. V.28

Input speed

9600 baud

Control wires

DTR, DSR, DCD

Connector

RJ45

6.1.3.5

9600 or 2x4800 bit/s synch/asynch

Electrical interface

CCITT Rec. V.28

Input speed

4800 or 9600 bit/s

Electrical interface

CCITT Rec. V.28

Connector

RJ45

6.1.4

38

9600 bit/s synch/asynch

Modulation and channel bandwidth

Carrier IF mo-demodulating frequency

Tx side 330 MHz
Rx side 140 MHz

Type of modulation

4QAM strong, 4QAM, 8PSK, 16QAM, 32QAM,
64QAM, 128QAM, 256 QAM

Bandwidth

7MHz, 14MHz, 28MHz, 56MHz

Bandwidth ALCplus2e

7MHz, 14MHz, 28MHz, 40MHz, 56MHz

Modulation approach

ACM

Modulating signal

depending on selected capacities

Equalization

24 taps

Coding gain

2.5 dB at 10-6 1 dB at 10-3

Correction

LDPC

MN.00224.E - 011

6.1.5

1+1 switching criteria

Rx switch
Rx switch is hitless and the system has built in capabilities of minimizing errors during the detection time.
Branch 1 is preferential and the system switches to branch 2 only when branch 1 is error affected. The
switching facility provides automatic synchronization of the two incoming streams up to:

dynamic difference

±100 bytes

static delays

±100 bytes.

Tab.9 shows Rx Alarm Priority.
Tab.9 - Rx Alarm Priority
Levels

Definition

Priority 1

Manual forcing (selectable by software)

Priority 2

CRC pulse from demodulator

Tx switch (1+1 hot stand-by)
Tx switch is not hitless. Maximum outage due to the Tx switching (sum of the maximum automatic changeover + Rx IDU re-synchronisation time), with ACM (Adaptive Code and Modulation) activated, is shown in
Tab.10.
Tab.10 - Maximum outage due to the Tx switching
Bandwidth

Maximum outage due to the Tx switching (msec)

7 MHz

< 1500

14 MHz

< 1200

28 MHz

< 900

56 MHz

< 400

Tab.11 shows Tx Alarm Priority.
Tab.11 - Tx Alarm Priority
Priority

Levels

Definition

Highest
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l

Priority 1

RIM PSU Alarm

Priority 2

Manual forcing (selectable by software)

Priority 3

Cable Short Alarm

Priority 3

Cable Open Alarm

Priority 3

Modulator Failure

Priority 3

ODU Unit Failure Alarm

Priority 3

VCO Failure Alarm

Priority 3

IF Unit Alarm

Priority 3

Tx Power Low Alarm

Priority 4

Request from Remote Terminal (both Receivers Alarmed)

Lowest

Priority 5

Revertive Tx (preferential branch selectable by software)

MN.00224.E - 011

39

6.1.6

Cable Interface

Interconnection with ODU unit

single coaxial cable for both Tx and Rx

Cable length

300 m

Cable rated impedance

50 Ohm

Signal running along the cable
-

Tx nominal frequency

330 MHz

-

Rx nominal frequency

140 MHz

-

Telemetry IDU -> ODU

17.5 MHz

-

Telemetry ODU <- IDU

5.5 MHz

-

In band management through traffic LAN or VLAN

Transceiver management signals 388 kbit/s bidirectional

Remote power supply direct from battery voltage.

6.1.7

Consumption and max current absorption

In this paragraphs are listed the following three characteristics: the max current (IMAX) at the power connector of the IDU alone, the max current (IMAX) at the power connector of the IDU with the complete equipment (IDU 1+1 and relevant 2 ODUs) and the consumption of the IDU alone. The consumption of the
complete equipment is described inside the ODU attachment (one for each frequency) with high precision,
at this point we have considered the ODU with the higher consumption (about 25W) among all the available.
Indicated voltage is related to max current and max consumption.
N.B. The consumption of the complete equipment is described inside the ODU attachment (one for each
frequency).

ALplus2 IMAX and consumption

see Tab.12

ALCplus2 IMAX and consumption

see Tab.12

ALCplus2e IMAX and consumption

see Tab.12

The power supply connectors of ALplus2 are independent. The power supply connectors of ALCplus2 and
ALCplus2e are in parallel (through diode).
Tab.12 - IMAX and consumption

40

IDU

IMAX (IDU only)

IMAX (IDU+ODUs)

Consumption
(IDU only)

ALplus2 1+0

1A (@40.8 Vdc)

1.7A (@40.8 Vdc)

40W (@57.6 Vdc)

ALplus2 1+1

1.2A (@40.8 Vdc)

1.7A (@40.8 Vdc)

48W (@57.6 Vdc)

ALCplus2 1+0

0.81A (@40.8 Vdc)

1.42A (@40.8 Vdc)

33W (@57.6 Vdc)

ALCplus2 1+1

0.92A (@40.8 Vdc)

2.15A (@40.8 Vdc)

38W (@57.6 Vdc)

ALCplus2 1+0
exp 16E1

0.88A (@40.8 Vdc)

1.5A (@40.8 Vdc)

36W (@57.6 Vdc)

ALCplus2 1+0
exp nodal

0.91A (@40.8 Vdc)

1.52A (@40.8 Vdc)

37W (@57.6 Vdc)

ALCplus2 1+1
exp 16E1

1A (@40.8 Vdc)

2.23A (@40.8 Vdc)

41W (@57.6 Vdc)

ALCplus2 1+1
exp nodal

1.1A (@40.8 Vdc)

2.33A (@40.8 Vdc)

45W (@57.6 Vdc)

ALCplus2e 1+0 2E1

1.22A (@40.8 Vdc)

1.8A (@40.8 Vdc)

50W (@57.6 Vdc)

MN.00224.E - 011

IDU

IMAX (IDU only)

IMAX (IDU+ODUs)

Consumption
(IDU only)

ALCplus2e 1+0 34E1
2xSTM-1

1.42A (@40.8 Vdc)

2A (@40.8 Vdc)

58W (@57.6 Vdc)

ALCplus2e 1+0 18E1
2xSTM-1 nodal

1.42A (@40.8 Vdc)

2A (@40.8 Vdc)

58W (@57.6 Vdc)

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1
2E1

1.35A (@40.8 Vdc)

2.55A (@40.8 Vdc)

55W (@57.6 Vdc)

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1
34E1 2xSTM-1

1.54A (@40.8 Vdc)

2.75A (@40.8 Vdc)

63W (@57.6 Vdc)

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1
18E1 2xSTM-1

1.54A (@40.8 Vdc)

2.75A (@40.8 Vdc)

63W (@57.6 Vdc)

ALCplus2e 2+0 2E1
XPIC

1.45A (@40.8 Vdc)

2.1A (@40.8 Vdc)

59W (@57.6 Vdc)

ALCplus2E 2+0 34E1
2xSTM-1

1.64A (@40.8 Vdc)

2.85A (@40.8 Vdc)

67W (@57.6 Vdc)

ALCplus2e 2+0 18E1
2xSTM-1 nodal

1.64A (@40.8 Vdc)

2.85A (@40.8 Vdc)

67W (@57.6 Vdc)

6.1.8

Fuses

Power supply circuits are protected against overcurrent with fuses on supply line:

6.2

ALplus2

there is an internal soldering fuse on the RIM PCB behind front panel

-

Nominal current

3A

-

Nominal voltage

125 Vac/dc

-

Type

timed

-

Dimensions

6.10 mm x x2.59 mm

ALCplus2/ALCplus2e

accessible on the front panel

-

Nominal current

3.15A

-

Nominal voltage

250 Vac/dc

-

Type

medium timed

-

Dimensions

5 mm x x20 mm

ODU CHARACTERISTICS

Frequency range

see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

RF channelling

see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

Go-return frequency

see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

Frequency stability

see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

Spurious transmission

see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

Output power

see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

BER Rx threshold

see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

Max RF level in Rx for BER 10-3

see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

Additional Tx and Rx losses for 1+1 version

see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

MN.00224.E - 011

41

Antenna configuration

see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

Consumption

see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

6.3

EQUIPMENT GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

6.3.1

Dimensions

The dimensions of the unit are the following:

IDU ALplus2 (1+0/1+1)

IDU ALCplus2/ALCplus2e (1+0/1+1, all versions)480mm x 45mm x 213mm (wxhxd)

ODU 1+0 ASN ODU version

254mm x 254mm x 114mm (wxhxd)

ODU 1+0 AS ODU version

254mm x 254mm x 154mm (wxhxd)

ODU 1+1 ASN ODU version

278mm x 254mm x 296mm (wxhxd)

ODU 1+1 AS ODU version

358mm x 254mm x 296mm (wxhxd)

6.3.2

480mm x 45mm x 270mm (wxhxd)

Weight

The weight of the units is the following:

IDU ALplus2 (1+0/1+1)

IDU ALCplus2/ALCplus2e (1+0/1+1, all versions)2.5 kg

ODU AS (1+0)

5.5 kg

ODU AS (1+1, with branching unit)

15.5 kg

ODU ASN (1+0)

4.5 kg

ODU (AS) (1+1 with branching unit)

13.5 kg

6.3.3

42

3.5 kg

Environmental condition

IDU operating temperature

-5° C to +45° C

ODU operating temperature

-33° C to +55° C

IDU survival temperature

-10° C to +55° C

ODU survival temperature

-40° C to +60° C

ODU operating humidity

95% at 35° C

ODU operating condition

according to IP65

ODU dissipation thermal resistance

0.5° C/W

ODU solar heat gain

< 5° C

Wind speed (ODU with integrated antenna)

< 200 km/h

ODU max height

4000m

MN.00224.E - 011

Storage condition

MN.00224.E - 011

according to T.1.2 ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 (weather
protected, not temperature controlled storage
locations)

43

7

ALPLUS2 IDU DESCRIPTION

7.1

CONFIGURATION

The IDU of the ALplus2 is available in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration.
The IDU is made up by the following modules:

Controller

LIM

RIM (one module in 1+0 configuration, two modules in 1+1 configuration).

7.1.1

ALplus2 block diagrams

In Fig.24 you can find the block diagram of ALplus2 with 16E1, version 1+0 and 1+1 configuration. In
Fig.25 you can find the block diagram of Alplus2 with 16E1, 2x(1+0) configuration.

7.1.2

Controller

The module performs the following operations:

44

communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IPoverOSI
as communication protocol stacks. The interface ports for the equipment management are the following:
-

2 LAN Ethernet 10BaseT (MNGT/1 and MNGT/2, both RJ45)

-

USB port

-

RS232 asynchronous used for SCT/NMS connection (using PPP protocol and baud rate speed up
to 57600)

-

RS232 asynchronous used for connecting further NEs (using PPP protocol and baud rate speed
up to 57600)

-

EOC embedded within the packet radio frame for connection to the remote NEs

-

EOC into a 16kbit/s or 64kbit/s of an E1 timeslot.

WEB LCT interface can be used with EOC capacity equal or bigger than 64 kbit/s

max 2 WEB LCT users can access the same controller

log-in: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then controlling the user ID and relevant password

database (MIB): equipment configuration is stored in a non-volatile memory

equipment configuration: the equipment is configured through stored configuration parameters or
user commands

MN.00224.E - 011

alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered logger and alarm
sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT - NMS5UX. Management of the alarm LEDs on the
LIM front panel.

user in and alarm out management: it receives external alarms and route them to relay contacts
along with the internal alarms generated by the equipment

performance monitoring: PM management as per Recc. G.828

download: firmware, Web Lct and configuration file can be downloaded. Download activity is based
on FTP protocol.

Warning: Lithium battery inside, refer to national rules for disposal.

7.1.2.1

Service signals

The controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel:

9600 baud/V.28 or 2x4800 baud/V.28 or 9600 baud V.28/RS232 synch/asynch channels

64 kbit/s/V.11 codirectional or contradirectional

E1 wayside G.703.

Service signals connected to the controller modules are sent to the LIM module for MUX/DEMUX processing.

7.1.2.2

Firmware

Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality and it is distributed on
two hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.
Firmware can be updated through the Web Lct and it is stored in two different memory banks: one containing the running firmware and the other the stand-by firmware. This permits to download a new firmware release to the stand by bank without cutting the traffic. Bank switch enables the new release to be
used.

7.1.2.3

Web Lct

The Web Lct allows the configuration and the management of the local equipment. When the remote one
is configured properly, the whole radio link can be managed.
Web Lct runs on Internet Explorer and Firefox with Flash player plug-in. WLC is a utility to connect to
ALplus2 with USB cable.
WLC and Flash player plug-in for IE and Firefox can be downloaded from the site www.siaemic.com after
registration.

7.1.2.4

Controller LEDs

On Controller front panel are present four LEDs to summarize the terminal status:

URG - red, ON with critical or major alarms active

NURG - red, ON with minor or warning alarms active

SW - red, ON with firmware mismatch alarm

TEST - yellow, ON with at least a manual operation active.

Always on Controller front panel are present two Ethernet ports for management, MNGT1 and MNGT2,
whose LEDs are:

MN.00224.E - 011

45

during the boot with Ethernet cable inserted:
-

green LED = ON

-

yellow LED = blinking

during the boot without Ethernet cable inserted:
-

green LED = OFF

-

yellow LED = OFF

in standard working condition:
-

green LED = ON -> LINK UP

-

green LED = OFF -> LINK DOWN

-

yellow LED = ON -> LINK 100BaseT

-

yellow LED = OFF -> LINK 10BaseT.

7.1.2.5

SD memory card management

On the Controller board is present a slot, not accessible from the external, for the insertion of a memory
card. The memory card allows the upload/download of the equipment configuration and the equipment
firmware
-

Memory card format

SD, SDHC

-

Memory card capacity

up to 4 GB.

7.1.3

LIM

The LIM performs the following operations:

multiplexing and demultiplexing (MUX/DEMUX process) of traffic (tributaries and Ethernet frames)

aggregation of the multiplexed signals along with services through a Bit Insertion circuit and viceversa. The aggregate frame contains:
-

the main signal from the MUX(s)

-

the framed service signal from the service MUX

-

the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote equipment

-

the frame alignment word (FAW)

-

the bits dedicated to the FEC

switch functionality for Ethernet ports

processing of the signals during the mo-demodulation

STM1 signal processing and RSOH management

duplication of the digital processed signals to supply two RIMs in 1+1 configuration.

From the two RIMs the LIM receives I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following processing:

46

clock recovery

frequency and phase carrier locking

baseband equalisation and filtering

bit polarity decision

differential decoding

parallel to serial conversion to recover the aggregate signal at the receive side.

MN.00224.E - 011

The aggregate signal is then sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and then to the error corrector. The errors uncorrected by the FEC are properly counted to achieve:

BER estimate measurement

radio performances.

7.1.3.1

Switch for Ethernet ports

Inside LIM is present an Ethernet switch with 3 external ports (electrical 1000BaseT or optical 1000BaseX)
and one internal. Only port 1 is present with both kind of interface, the port 2 is electrical and port 3 optical.
The external interfaces (3 operational on 4 presents) are placed on the front panel. Internal port is represented by the local radio stream where through native Ethernet transport is connected with the remote
equipment.

Ethernet port LEDs

There are 2 LEDs:

Speed
-

one blinking = 10BaseT

-

two blinking = 100BaseT

-

three blinking = 1000BaseT

LINK/ACT
-

on = link up, no activity

-

off = link down

-

blinking = activity.

Switch function
LIM can operate like a switch between two or more separated LANs with the following advantages:

to connect two separate LANs

to connect two LANs via radio within a complex digital network

to keep separated the traffic into two LANs towards MAC filtering to get a total traffic greater than
the traffic in a single LAN.

The switch realised into LIM/Ethernet module is transparent (IEEE 802.1d and 802.q) into the same Vlan
described by VLAN Configuration Table.
It works at data link level, Layer 2 of OSI pile, and leave untouched Layer 3 and it takes care to send traffic
from a local LAN to another one (Local and Remote).
Routing is only on the basic of Level 2 addresses, sublevel MAC.
The operation is the following: when a LAN port receives a MAC frame, on the basis of destination address,
it decides which LAN to send it:

if destination address is on originating LAN the frame is discarded

if destination address is a known address (towards address learning procedure) and is present into
local address table, the frame is sent only on destination LAN (MAC switching)

otherwise the frame is sent to all ports with the same VLAN ID (flooding).

Ethernet Full Duplex function
Full duplex mode can be activated into 10/100BaseT interfaces manually or with autonegotiation.
100BaseFx operates always into full duplex mode.

MN.00224.E - 011

47

Link Loss Forwarding
Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) is an alarm status of Ethernet interface. LLF can be enabled or disabled.
If LLF is enabled, any linkdown alarm will generate the alarm status of Ethernet interface blocking any
transmission to it. LLF can be enabled for each ports at front panel.
With LLF enabled the equipment connected (routers, switches so on) can be notified that radio link is not
available and can temporarily re-route the traffic.

MDI/MDIX cross-over
The Ethernet electrical interface into FEM module can be defined by WebLCT as MDI or MDIX to cross-over
between pairs so that external cross-over cable is not required.

VLAN functionality
LIM Ethernet module works with IEEE 802.1q and 802.1p tag. Tag is made up with:

a fixed word of 2 bytes

3 bits for priority according with 802.1p

1 fixed bit

12 bits VLAN identifier (VLAN ID) according with 802.1q.

Switch cross-connections are based on Vlan Configuration Table where input and output ports or only output ports should be defined for any used VID. Vlan ID (VID) has a range from 1 to 4095.

7.1.3.2

STM-1 synchronisation

Refer to Fig.22.
STM-1 frame generation requires that it is synchronised to a SDH network.
Into ALplus2 a synchronisation circuit, called SETS, gets the synchronisation signal from the following different sources:

radio

STM1

tributary A/WST

tributary B

tributary n

Lan3

Lan4

Internal source

As shown in Fig.22 the clocks extracted from the sources are sent to a selection circuit that chooses one
of the signals depending on the control sent by a selection logic.
This latter acts on the base of alarm roots (LOS-loss of input signal, LTI-loss of timing input, LOF-loss of
frame), on the base of assigned priority and manual forcing.
The selected clock drives an oscillator through a PLL circuit. The oscillator will generate the required synchronisation for the STM-1 frame generation. If no input signals are available the internal oscillator source
is used for the local restart.

48

MN.00224.E - 011

Radio
Trib A
Trib B/n

Source
selector

STM-1

Synchronisation
for
STM-1 interface

Lan3
Lan4

LOS
LTI
Priority Control
Manual Forcing

Logic circuit
for
clock
synchronisation

Fig.22 - Synchronisation block diagram

7.1.3.3

LIM LEDs

On LIM front panel are present two LEDs to describe the following aspect:

PoE - green, ON if Power over Ethernet facility is active

FAIL - red, ON if the boot of the module wasn’t successful.

7.1.4

RIM

The RIM consists of the following main circuits:

IF part of the QAM modulator

IF part of the QAM demodulator

power supply

telemetry IDU/ODU.

MN.00224.E - 011

49

7.1.4.1

Modulator

Signals from LIM are connected to a programmable modulator. It consists of the following circuits:

recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity

two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process

330 MHz local oscillator

a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation.

The obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with ODU.

7.1.4.2

Demodulator

At the receive side, from the cable interface, the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier is sent to the QAM demodulator passing through a cable equalizer circuit.
The QAM demodulator within the RIM converts the signal to be sent to the digital part of the demodulator
within the LIM.

7.1.4.3

Adaptive code modulation

ACM profiles
In ALplus2/ALplus2 radio family uses Adaptive Code and Modulation (ACM) in order to employ the correct
modulation profile depending on the Rx signal quality.
Available ACM profiles are the following:

4QAM strong

4QAM

8PSK

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM.

These profiles operate in an RF channel with the following bandwidth:

7 MHz

14 MHz

28 MHz

56 MHz.

ACM switching
The usage of the previous modulation profiles in a fixed channel bandwidth results in a variable capacity.
The criteria defining the necessity of an ACM switching, upshift or downshift, is the Rx S/N ratio.

50

Upshift - When there is an increase of received S/N, within the same Channel Spacing, the modulation complexity is increased in the direction from 4QAM strong to 256QAM increasing the spectral
efficiency

MN.00224.E - 011

Downshift - When there is a decrease of received S/N, within the same Channel Spacing, the modulation is reduced in the direction from 256QAM to 4QAM strong reducing the spectral efficiency,

In order to configure properly the radio link using ACM facility, an optimization must be found between
max traffic during good propagation conditions and max availability during bad propagation conditions. To
obtain this purpose the ACM in ALplus2/ALCplus2 family can be configured via software setting the following parameters: ACM setting and Tx Power mode.

ACM setting
The ACM can vary modulation profiles between two extremes defined by the operator through software
configuration: Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation.

Upper modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the better condition (high
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the maximum throughput defined at Upper Modulation: the
highest modulation profile that ACM can employ

Lower modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the worst condition (low
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the minimum throughput, defined at Lower Modulation: the
lowest modulation profile that ACM can employ

Tx power mode
Tx power mode can be set as Constant Peak or Constant Average (constant bolometer measurement).

Constant Peak - Tx power is at maximum at 4QAM and at 256QAM is reduced (typical 4.5 dB) so
the RF Tx amplifier can operate in better linear conditions.

Constant Average - Tx power is the same at any modulation.

The Tx Power mode is set depending on the modulation license of the user and depending on the Lower
Modulation that has been set.
For example:
In case of a 4QAM licence, all the other modulations must remain into the 4QAM mask. In this condition
Tx power must be Constant Peak (Tx Power Constant Peak Mode = Enable): max Tx power at 4QAM and
reduced power at all the other modulations.
In case of a 16QAM licence (or higher complexity) and Lower Modulation is set at 4QAM, the emitted spectrum must remain into the emitted spectrum defined for 16QAM even if the equipment is transmitting at
4QAM. In this case Tx power must be Constant Average (Tx Power Constant Peak Mode = Disable): Tx
power is always the same at any modulation and typically is the Upper Modulation's power. As an alternative the Lower Modulation can be set at 16QAM so Tx power Constant Peak can be activated.
With Constant Average Tx power (Tx Power Constant Peak Mode = Disable), the Tx power at 4QAM and
any other modulation is the same of Upper Modulation, so if Upper Modulation is 256QAM the output power
at any modulation is the same of 256QAM which is 4.5 dB less than 4QAM. The result is that enabling
256QAM is a big advantage for traffic but less link budget margin at 4QAM.

E1 priority
E1 available tributaries belong to two groups.
One is Permanent E1 equal to High Priority E1 that will never be interrupted during modulation downshift.
Downshift modulation will be limited to the minimum to obtain the selected Permanent E1.
The second group is Extra E1 equal to Low Priority, these tributaries will be interrupted progressively during
modulation downshift. They will start to be cut from the highest e.g. tributaries 16th or 32nd up to the first.
In Tab.13 it is reported the priority of tributaries, the lowest will be cut first.

Ethernet traffic
Once defined the bandwidth, Permanent E1 and Extra E1 at any modulation the amount of Ethernet capacity is the total radio capacity minus the Permanent + Extra E1 at any modulation.

MN.00224.E - 011

51

Tab.13 - E1 priority
Priority
Highest
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
V
Lowest

7.1.4.4

ALplus2

ALCplus2

Permanent E1 never
disappears

Permanent E1 never
disappears

WST

Tributary A
Tributary B

E1 tributary n°1

E1 tributary n°1

E1 tributary n°16

E1 tributary n°16

E1 tributary n°32

E1 tributary n°32

Power supply

The -48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltage for the IDU feeding are
achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for -5 V.
Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents. The same battery running through the
interconnection cable gives the power to the ODU.
An electronic breaker protects the battery against cable failure.

7.1.4.5

Telemetry IDU/ODU

The dialogue IDU/ODU is made-up by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Controls for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a bidirectional 388 kbit/s
framed signals.
The transport along the interconnecting cable is carried out via two FSK modulated carriers:

17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU

5.5 MHz from ODU to IDU.

7.2

LOOPS

To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands
are forwarded by the WebLCT/NMS program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.23.

7.2.1

Tributary

Tributary local loop
Each input tributary is routed directly to the tributary output upon receiving the command. The Tx line
transmission is still on.

52

MN.00224.E - 011

Tributary remote loop
Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.

7.2.2

IDU loop

This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU operation. When activated, the modulator output is connected to demodulator input.
The loop is assured by converting the frequency of the modulator from 330 MHz to 140 MHz.

MN.00224.E - 011

53

Fig.23 - IDU loopback

54

MN.00224.E - 011

Trib. loc. loop

Trib. OUT

Trib. IN
Trib. rem.
loop

LIM

DEMUX

MUX

BE

BI

DEM

140

330

MOD

RIM

from ODU

140 MHz

IDU loop

330 MHz
to ODU

LAN1
LAN2
LAN3

10/100BaseT
1000BaseT

Ethernet
packet switch

10/100/1000BaseT

Port A

1000BaseSX,LX

Permanent E1
up to 60E1

Radio
1+0
1+1

E1
cross-connect
STM-1 MSP

Extra E1
up to 19E1

16E1

WST
Up to 80E1
- Permanent = High Priority
- Extra = Low Priority
Fig.24 - ALplus2 with 16E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram

MN.00224.E - 011

55

LAN1

LAN2

LAN3

10/100BaseT
1000BaseT

Ethernet
packet switch

Port A

10/100/1000BaseT
Port B

1000BaseSX,LX

Permanent E1
up to 60E1

Radio A
1+0

E1
cross-connect
STM1 MSP

Extra E1
up to 19E1

16E1

E1 WST

Permanent E1
up to 60E1
- Permanent = High Priority
- Extra = Low Priority

Radio B
1+0

Extra E1
up to 19E1

Fig.25 - ALPlus2 with 16E1, 2x(1+0) configuration, block diagram

56

MN.00224.E - 011

8

ALCPLUS2 IDU DESCRIPTION

8.1

CONFIGURATION

The IDU of ALCplus2 is available in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration.
Into the IDU there are the following circuits:

Controller

LIM

RIM (one circuit in 1+0 configuration, two circuits in 1+1 configuration).

The IDU of ALCplus2 is one RU subrack.
All the listed circuits are inserted into a single board.
Circuits for others 16xE1 or 32xE1 are inserted into the ALCplus2 IDU, one RU subrack, with exp16E1 or
exp32E1 options.
Please refer to chapter 7 ALplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION for any information relevant to functionalities of the
listed circuits.

8.1.1

Switch for ethernet ports

Inside IDU is present an Ethernet switch with 4 external ports (electrical 1000BaseT or optical 1000BaseX)
and one internal. Port 3 and Port 4 have both interfaces, Port 1 and Port 2 are electrical only.
The external interfaces (4operational on 6 present) are placed on the front panel. Internal port is represented by the local radio stream where, through native Ethernet transport, is connected with the remote
equipment.
For Ethernet switch functionalities, please refer to chapter 7 ALplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION.

8.1.2

Service channels

No service channels ports are available for ALCplus2 IDU.

MN.00224.E - 011

57

8.2

SYNCHRONIZATION

Refer to Fig.52.
STM-1 frame generation requires that it is synchronised to a SDH network.
Into ALplus2e a synchronisation circuit, called SETS, gets the synchronisation signal from the following different sources:

radio A

radio B

STM1(1)

STM1 (2)

tributary A/B

tributary A/B as T3

tributary nE1

node1

node2

Lan A (Lan1,2,3,4) Gbit Electrical

Lan B (Lan1,2,3,4) Gbit Electrical

Internal source

As shown in Fig.52 the clocks extracted from the sources are sent to a selection circuit that chooses one
of the signals depending on the control sent by a selection logic.
This latter acts on the base of alarm roots (LOS-loss of input signal, LTI-loss of timing input, LOF-loss of
frame), on the base of assigned priority and manual forcing.
The selected clock drives an oscillator through a PLL circuit. The oscillator will generate the required internal synchronisation signal T0.
Trib A or B selected as T3 can be the source of T4 signal (2MHz) for other equipment like for example into
nodal structure.
If no input signals are available the internal oscillator source is used for the local restart of STM1 generation.

8.3

SD MEMORY CARD MANAGEMENT

On the front panel a protected slot for the insertion of a memory card is present.
The memory card allows the upload/download of the equipment configuration and the equipment firmware.

58

-

Memory card format

SD, SDHC

-

Memory card capacity

up to 4 GB.

MN.00224.E - 011

8.4

ALC BLOCK DIAGRAMS

On Fig.31, Fig.32, Fig.33 and Fig.34 you can find block diagrams of ALCplus2 with 32E1 expansion, with
16E1 expansion and NBUS, with 16E1 expansion and without any expansion.

8.5

ALCPLUS2 NODE

A node can be made up of max 8 subracks of ALCplus2 IDU so that we can have:

up to 8 maximum independent radio directions, with max 80E1 per direction

up to 8 STM1 MST or MSP

up to 8 x 16E1 = 128E1

up to 8 x 2 x 1Gbit Lan ports.

On the front panel of ALCplus2 there are two “NBUS” ports (1 and 2) which must be connected to the other
IDU subrack as in Fig.35 for E1 traffic and Ethernet traffic.
For Ethernet traffic Lan1 and Lan2 must be connected as in Fig.35 Lan1 and Lan2 connection can be made
with normal Lan cables CAT5e/CAT6.
NBUS connection among the IDUs are made by cables of CAT7 quality, only by proprietary SIAE cable to
insert into the NBUS connectors (1 and 2) on the front panel. See Tab.15 for cable length and SIAE code.
Warning: for NBUS do not use normal Lan cables.
For any IDU into WebLCT it is necessary to define how many IDU are into the Node from 2 to 8.
Into WebLCT each IDU must be defined as node number 1, 2...8.
NBUS can operate in Protected mode or in Not Protected mode. Each NBUS carries 126 E1’s.
In case of Not Protected mode, all the 126 E1’s of the NBUS are used to connect a subrack to the others
for a total amount of 252 E1 connections available on NBUSes from one IDU.
In case of Protected mode, the unused connections, are used as protection of the connections between the
other IDUs; for example 63 E1’s are used between Node1 and Node2 and the other 63 E1’s are used as
protection of the connections between the other nodes, the connections used as protection pass into others
IDUs as passthrough without any need to be programmed.
The troubles in the connections between the NBUS buses are identified by alarms.
In case of protected modality, if the cable carrying the traffic is broken, an alarm is issued on the relevant
NBUS port, the equipment software switches the traffic on the other operating NBUS cable.
For Ethernet traffic Lan1 and Lan2 must be connected as in Fig.35.
With SCT/LCT program it is possible to configure a Node made up of some Nodals so into the window of
Node Manager it is possible to program only one big Crossconnect matrix for E1 and only one Ethernet
switch for all Lan traffic.
The software hides all NBUS connection for E1 and Lan connection from an IDU to others IDUs, so to operate on one big Crossconnection matrix and one big Ethernet switch.
For any IDU the Node Manager shows for E1s 16E1, STM1 E1s, radio permanent E1, radio extra E1 and for
Ethernet Lan3, Lan4, radio port Port A.
The Nodal equipment with SDH STM1 interface is a Regenerator Section Termination (RST) and a Multiplex
Section Termination (MST) therefore it generates the STM-1 frame and has an internal synchronization circuit SETS. The synchronization of the Node can be distributed on the NBUS.
The ALCplus2 subracks must be synchronised together via NBUS or other interface.

MN.00224.E - 011

59

For each Nodal subrack, the STM-1 interface can be duplicated (1+1 MSP) for the possible protection of
cable. The switching criteria in Rx are:

Unequipped

LOS

LOF

MSAIS

TIM

B2 excessive BER

B2 degraded BER.

8.5.1

Expansion from 2 to 3 nodals

Suppose that the nodals 1 and 2 already exist and that you must add the nodal 3.
Disconnect the cable between NBUS1 nodal2 and NBUS2 nodal1, the traffic is automatically switched to
the other cable, if necessary.
Disconnect the cable between LAN1 nodal2 and LAN2 nodal1, the traffic is automatically switched to the
other cable, if necessary.
By WebLCT or SCT/LCT, re-program the nodal1 and nodal2 as node with 3 items.
By WebLCT or SCT/LCT, re-program the nodal3 as nodal3, protected and define the node with 3 items.
Connect the NBUS1 of the nodal2 with NBUS2 of nodal3, connect the NBUS1 of the nodal3 with NBUS2 of
the nodal1 as in Fig.35.
Connect the LAN1 of the nodal2 with LAN2 of nodal3, connect the LAN1 of the nodal3 with LAN2 of the
nodal1 as in Fig.35.
By SCT/LCT, with Nodal ALCplus2 Manager, Nodal Configuration add nodal3 IP address.
Program the interested cross-connections and Ethernet switch connections with external interfaces of
nodal3, Node Manager will take care of connections on NBUSes and LAN1, 2.
The same procedure can be used even if the added node is different from nodal3.

8.5.2

Reduction from 3 to 2 nodes

Suppose that the nodals 1, 2 and 3 already exist and that the nodal 3 must be removed.
By SCT/LCT, with Nodal ALCplus2 Manager, delete all the cross-connections to the external interfaces of
nodal3.
Remove the cables of the NBUS and LAN going to nodal3.
Connect nodal2 NBUS1 to nodal1 NBUS2 as in Fig.35.
Connect nodal2 LAN1 to nodal1 LAN2 as in Fig.35.
The same procedure can be used even if the deleted nodal is different from nodal3.

60

MN.00224.E - 011

8.6

LAG - LINK AGGREGATION

Link Aggregation (LAG) is a feature available on SIAE ALCplus2 equipment that allows assigning up to four
physical links to one logical link (trunk) that functions as a single, higher-speed link.
In SIAE equipment LAG is named Trunking and two different implementations are possible:

Line trunking: it works by aggregating LAN interfaces.

Radio trunking: it works by aggregating radio interfaces.

Radio Trunking is available only when the Nodal Ethernet functionality is enabled.
The nodal Ethernet configuration can be deployed on all the ALCplus2 IDU models.
More details about this implementation will be provided in next paragraph 8.5 ALCplus2 NODE.

8.6.1

Line Trunking

Line Trunking is available on the ALCplus2 IDU. SIAE ALCplus2 support IEEE 802.3ad LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol). See Fig.26.

Fig.26 - Enabling Line Aggregation, Enable trunk1
LACP allows a network device to negotiate an automatic bundling of links by sending LACP packets to the
peer (directly connected device that also implements LACP). In addition to the increased capacity of the
logical link, LACP provides additional advantages:

failover detection when a link fails, allowing for a trunk reconfiguration in order to avoid systematic
packet loss (after the reconfiguration the packets will be lost only if the throughput exceed the trunk
capacity).

it introduces an agreement between the two LACP peers before to start data transmission over the
trunk. This prevent anomalous behaviour in case of cabling or configuration mistakes.

LACP works by sending frames (LACPDUs) over the links belonging to the trunk. Also the equipment deployed on the other end of the trunk will send LACP frames over the same links: this enables the two units
to establish the trunk. LACP can be configured two modes: active or passive. In active mode it will always
send frames along the configured links. SIAE ALCplus2 implements an "active" LACP.

MN.00224.E - 011

61

Each IDU allows to define up to 4 different trunks on its LAN interfaces. A Line Trunk can aggregate up to
4 LAN interfaces with the following restrictions:

all the LAN interfaces must be defined with the same speed (either 10, 100 or 1000 Mbit/s).

all the LAN interfaces must be set in Full Duplex mode

all the interfaces must belong to the same IDU, even if the IDU is deployed in Nodal Ethernet configuration.

When a Trunk is defined on SIAE ALCplus2, the end-to-end traffic is transmitted over all the aggregated
lines. As a results, the overall capacity of the trunk can be theoretically equal to the number of aggregated
lines multiplied by the capacity of a single line. In the example of Fig.27, four 100Mbs connection are
grouped into the same trunk, carrying all the capacity in transit from a radio link to another. In this configuration, the theoretical maximum capacity that can transit on this trunk is 400 Mbit/s.

LAN1

100 Mbit/s

LAN1

LAN2

100 Mbit/s

LAN2

ALCplus2

ALCplus2
LAN3

100 Mbit/s

LAN3

LAN4

100 Mbit/s

LAN4

Line
trunking

Fig.27 - Line trunking
The packets carried by the trunk are assigned to each line depending on their Source MAC (SA) and Destination MAC (DA) Addresses (MAC hashing).
A possible problem that could occur when Link Aggregation protocols are used is a change in the transmission order of packets belonging to the same logical session. The MAC hashing method prevents such a
problem: the traffic transmitted from one host to another one in the network (fixed SA and DA) is always
sent over the same physical line of the trunk, avoiding any order change.
If a line of the trunk fails (for example due to a cable disconnection), the LACP protocol automatically reconfigure the trunk group into a lower order trunk. So doing, the traffic that before was carried over the
failed line, now will be re-distributed over one of the remaining trunk lines, ensuring continuity to the traffic
transmission. The typical LAG reconfiguration time in case of a LAN cable failure is below 1 second.

8.6.2

Radio Link Trunking

Radio Link Trunking is a feature available on SIAE ALCplus2 equipment when deployed in Nodal Ethernet
configuration.
This feature allows to bundle up to 4 radio links to increase the capacity of an Ethernet connection between
two radio sites (see Fig.28).

62

MN.00224.E - 011

LAN4

LAN4

LAN3

LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 1

ALCplus2
Node 1

LAN2

LAN2

LAN1

LAN1

LAN4

LAN4

LAN3

LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 2

ALCplus2
Node 2
LAN2

LAN2

LAN1

LAN1

LAN4

LAN4

LAN3

LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 3

ALCplus2
Node 3

LAN2

LAN2

LAN1

LAN1

LAN4

LAN4

LAN3

LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 4

ALCplus2
Node 4

LAN2

LAN2

LAN1

LAN1

SITE A

Radio
trunking

SITE B

Fig.28 - Radio trunking
Each Nodal Ethernet stack can belongs to one Radio Trunk. Each IDU of the trunk sends over the air only
a portion of the traffic, according to the same hashing rule used for the line trunking (see paragraph 8.6.1
Line Trunking). The traffic received from the radio trunk is sent towards the IDU where is located the outgoing interface according to standard MAC learning/switching mechanisms.
Resiliency between the radio links aggregated into the trunk is managed by means of a proprietary protocol. If a radio link of the trunk fails (due to fading or equipment failure), this protocol automatically reconfigure the trunk group into a lower order trunk. In this way, the traffic that before was carried over the
failed link, now will be re-distributed over one of the remaining trunk lines, ensuring continuity to the traffic
transmission. The typical Radio Trunk reconfiguration time is about 600msec.
It is important to note that also if it could be possible to aggregate up to four 340Mbit/s radio links (by
using 56 MHz frequency channel with 256 QAM modulation), the maximum capacity that can be carried
over the radio link cannot exceed 1Gbit/s in each direction of transmission (referring to Fig.28, from Site
A to Site B and vice-versa).
Regarding multicast/broadcast, the total traffic entering the stack (sum of the packets entering from LAN3/
LAN4 interfaces and from the radio ports) cannot exceed 1Gbit/s. This because also the traffic received
from the radio trunk is flooded towards all the IDUs belonging to the Nodal Ethernet stack (MAC learning
cannot be performed over multicast packets).

MN.00224.E - 011

63

8.7

LINE PROTECTION THROUGH DISTRIBUTED ELP

ELP (Ethernet Line Protection) is a feature available on ALCplus2 IDU that allows to protect a GE interface
against cable failure or accidental disconnection. With ELP it is possible to connect an ALCplus2 IDU to another network element by using two GE interfaces. Both interfaces are active but just one is enabled to
forward and receive traffic (forwarding state), while the other does not allow any traffic to pass (blocking
state). If the forwarding interface goes down, the other one passes to the forwarding state. The typical
switching time is around 1.5 sec. This feature does not imply the use of any protocol, but is simply based
on the status of the physical interfaces. As a consequence, no particular protocol support is required on
the connected equipment: it is simply required to enable the two GE interfaces.
When the Nodal Ethernet configuration is used, ELP can be used to protect the traffic of two GE interfaces
belonging to two different IDUs of the stack. In this way the traffic can be protected against IDU failure,
in addition to the cable protection.
This feature is particularly useful when the Nodal stack is connected to an external equipment like a core
router (see the example of the following Fig.29).

LAN4

LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 2
LAN2

LAN1

LAN4

LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 3
LAN2

LAN1

Core router

LAN4

ELP
protection

LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 4
LAN2

LAN1

Fig.29 - Line protection through distributed ELP
It is recommended to disable any Spanning Tree protocol on the external equipment: this could cause longer traffic recovery times.

64

MN.00224.E - 011

8.8

ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE)

As native Ethernet is originally designed for LAN (local Area Network), OAM is not included into the native
Ethernet network equipment. In order to provide a carrier grade service, the OAM protocol can be used in
any point-to-point Ethernet link (made up of a single radio link or many radio links). The aim of this protocol is to check and monitor the functionality of the service that the provider guarantees on the network.

8.8.1

Service Layer OAM

The Service Layer OAM fully monitors a customer End-to-End Ethernet Service. Two main standards cover
this topic, the IEEE 802.1ag and ITU-T Y.1731.
The IEEE 802.1ag provides CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) useful for detecting, isolating and reporting connectivity faults. The ITU-T Y.1731 Standard comprehends the CFM plus some additional features, like RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) that allows to report back to the start of the chain the Alarm
message.
SIAE ALCplus2 supports CFM according to both standards ITU-T Y.1731 and 802.1ag.
The IEEE 802.1ag and the ITU-T Y.1731 are End-to-End service, i.e. provides the tools to monitor the
Ethernet Service regardless of the layers, Network Path and operators. Since the spectrum of application
can include many applications a more hierarchical structure is needed.
The Standards define:

Maintenance Domains (MD): these specify the Domains of operators, users and service providers.
Levels from 0 to 7 are possible depending on the type of service to be monitored. Customer Domain
is the higher which includes both ends of the Ethernet service (from one End user to the other End
user), Standard Default values for Customer Domain are 7, 6 and 5. Service Provider Domains
should have a MD lower than the Customer Domain since include the whole network except the End
Users. Standard default values for Provider Domains are 3 and 4. Operator Domains are lower than
Service Provider Domains since just a part of the network is included. Standard Default values for
operator domains are 0, 1 and 2. A domain is transparent to all messages with higher priority while
blocking all lower priority messages. Fig.30 shows the hierarchical structure of Maintenance Domains.

MN.00224.E - 011

65

CE

PE

PE

Access
Network

Operator 1
Core Network

CE
Access
Network

Operator 2
Core Network

High Level
Customer

Service
Provider

MEP

MEP

MEP

MEP

MEP

MIP

MIP

MEP

Operator 1

Low Level
MEP

MIP

MIP

MEP

Operator 2

Fig.30 - Hierarchical structure of Maintenance Domains
ALCplus2 equipment belongs to one Maintenance Domain.
At each end of the Maintenance Domain two MEPs (Maintenance End Point) will be specified. One MEP is
local, the other one is in the remote equipment. The MEPs are "markers" that defines the end of a domain
and are in charge of originating OAM frames.
In a domain also MIPs (Maintenance Intermediate Points) can be specified. The MIPs are passive checkpoints. The MEPs and MIPs configuration are discussed in details in the following points. The choice of the
domain that is the Domain Label (name) is left to the user. Particular attention must be paid to use exactly
the same MD label (and level) in each equipment where the MD is specified, i.e. different equipment with
same value of MD domain but different MD labels (or levels) belongs to different Domains.

66

A Maintenance Association (MA) is one association which correlates the VLAN to the MD in which
the MEPs and MIPs have to be defined.
When a specified traffic needs to be monitored, then it is necessary to relay the VLAN to a Domain
and to the corresponding MEPs or MIPs through the MA. Before creating the Maintenance Association, the VLAN, either SVLAN (Service VLAN Tag o Stacked VLAN Tag) or C-VLAN, has to be specified
in the VLAN Table. In each SIAE equipment it is possible to set up to 32 different MA. Particular
attention must be paid to use the same MA label in each equipment where the MA is specified, i.e.
different MA labels on the same VLAN correspond to different MA associations.

MN.00224.E - 011

At the Edge of a MD there are MEPs (Maintenance End Points) and in the middle there could be MIPs
(Maintenance Intermediate Points). MEPs are the units in charge of managing the CFM to correctly
monitor the status of the Ethernet service provided. MIPs are passive check-points that answer to
polling coming from MEPs. MEPs will forward OAM messages coming from higher domains and will
discard OAM messages generated from lower domains.
Each interface can be configured as MEP, Port A interface (radio interface) included. Once chosen
the interface, depending on the network topology, the direction of the MEP has to be specified. Two
Directions are possible, MEP "up" and MEP "Down". With MEP "Down" configured the OAM PDUs are
sent from the interface in the direction outside the equipment, i.e. the OAM PDUs are sent from the
interface on the cable toward next equipment. With MEP "Up" configured the OAM PDUs are sent
from the interface toward the inside of the equipment and will follow the VLAN table previously configured. MEPs are distinguished from each other through a MEP ID, therefore MEPs belonging to
same MA must have different MEP Ids. In order to configure a MIP the MA has to be enabled on the
equipment. Up to 32 MIPs or MEPs can be configured on each equipment.

The protocols belonging to the Connectivity Fault Management implemented in SIAE equipment are following listed:

Continuity Check Protocol: this protocol enables the sending of a periodic message (like a Heartbeat
message) which enables the other MEPs deployed in the network to distinguish the status of a virtual connection. This message can only be originated by a MEP. Time between messages is adjustable with 1s, 10s, 1min, 10min. These messages do not trigger any automatic reply from the
destination entity.

LoopBack Protocol: it resembles an IP PING message; once this message is sent (e.g. MEP1 sends
a Loopback Message to MEP2). MEP2 replies to MEP1 confirming therefore the status of the connection. This is done to check the status of the connection between the MEP originating the message
and the MEP/MIP to which the message is addressed. This message can only be originated from one
MEP and can be addressed to both MEPs or MIPs. ALCplus2: The number of Loopback Messages in
ALCplus2 equipment is adjustable from 1 to 5 consecutive Loopbacks. In each equipment, it is possible for each MEP to check the presence of other MEPs in the same MA. This is done through the
"Remote MEP" application which allows this acknowledgement and distinguishes the other MEP
through means of MEP IDs and MAC address.

Link Trace Protocol: This protocol sends a message similar to the LoopBack protocol. Every equipment that is reached by this message will answer to the sender providing its own MAC Address. In
this way the sender is able to understand of which equipment the MA is composed. E.g. a MEP sends
the Link Trace Message to another MEP belonging to the same Maintenance Association. The MIPs
that are eventually deployed in the middle of the path will forward this message and answer to the
initiating MEP with their own MAC Address. By doing so the initiating MEP knows the OAM-devices
deployed in the path and their order.

Remote Defect Indicator: This Feature allows a MEP, in presence of a fault or a defect, to send a
RDI to inform the other MEPs, belonging to the same MA, of the presence of this Defect. The advantages of this procedure are to avoid multiple Alarms created by the same cause and to be able
to check the status of other Remote MEPs. This RDI information is reported in the Continuity Check
Message. ALCplus2: This feature is present in ALCplus2 equipment and the presence of this alarm
can be checked as well in the Remote MEPs screen on the equipment.

8.8.2

OAM Example with ALCplus2

As an example, let's consider a network where a sequence of 8 SIAE ALCplus2 Radio links is deployed. In
this case a Maintenance Domain, a VLAN and a Maintenance Association have to be defined. The VLAN carrying the traffic must be present in the VLAN table of each equipment.
Two MEPs at the end of the chains and a variable number of MIPs in the middle has to be defined with
Continuity Check Message (CCM) enabled.
In case of defect or Ethernet problem, the Continuity Check Message will result in an "Inactive" status triggering one Alarm.
By logging on one MEP it is sufficient to configure the Loopback message and Link Trace Message correctly
detects the location of the Bottleneck or defect related to this traffic. If More than one VLAN is present then
more than one MA has to be defined.

MN.00224.E - 011

67

8.8.3

Reset Switch

Reset Switch button forces factory default values into switch but this is true only at next restart.

8.8.4

MAC Table clear

This is a button to clear all the MAC Table.
MAC Learning on Port basis and MAC Learning on VID basis.
The purpose of these two selection is dividing the MAC table into some independents parts named FID (Forwarding Indication Database).

8.9

ALCPLUS2 FIRMWARE UPDATES

In this chapter are described the new features available in an ALCplus2 with new firmware releases. Only
the main releases are considered (....the firmware releases with new features).
Every firmware release is included in a System Version and is supplied with the right WebLCT version.

FW update procedure
The order of file download is the following:
1. FW_Boot E82101
2. FW_appl N90634
3. WEBLCT N96106
All the files are in a compressed container called System Version v.XX.YY.ZZ.
If ODU needs a firmware update, it must be done after there three.

8.9.1

Firmware release 1.3.3

The new features included in this release are the following:

MAC Address Table
The MAC address in the MAC Address Table can be managed also in this way:

MAC Learning on Vid basis: MAC address table can be managed depending on Vid

MAC on port basis: MAC address table can be managed depending on port

Management Port Speed
The two management ports can be set in different ways separately:

68

Full duplex 10M

MN.00224.E - 011

Half duplex 10M

Full duplex 100M

Half duplex 100M

Auto-Speed-Dplx (the speed is set automatically during the handshake of the interfaces)

Management Port VLAN Tagging
The two management ports can be inserted in a VLAN.
The setting are the following:

both ports are in the same VLAN

one port is a VLAN and the other port is without Vid

both ports are without the Vid management

8.9.2

Firmware release 1.3.4

The new features included in this release are the following:

Tx Transmitter Permanent Off
Now is available a new manual operation in the radio management: the Tx side of the radio can be turned
off with or without the timeout checking.

LAN Port Ingress Rate Limiting
New values are available in each LAN port to limit the input throughput (PIRL - Port based Ingress Rate
Limiting).

8.9.3

Firmware Release 1.4.0

The new features included in this release are the following:

LAN3/LAN4 syncE Management
Now LAN port3 and LAN port4 can be used in equipment synchronization without considering the interface
kind: the syncE management is available with optical and with electrical interface.

8.9.4

Firmware Release 1.4.1

The new features included in this release are the following:

MN.00224.E - 011

69

SOH-STM1 Transport
Now the SOH of a STM1 stream can be transmitted: the SOH transport is made up by a permanent TDM,
one for STM1-1 and another for STM1-2.
A proper symbol is present in the cross connection matrix for this kind of usage.

SSM Management in Synchronization Sources
The SSM management (quality status of a synch source) is available on the following sources:

STM1

Nodal Bus

E1

Lan Port

SSM allows:

the traceability to an identifiable primary clock reference source

the presence of two synch sources to all the network elements, a primary and a secondary source
in case of a primary failure

the lack of timing loops

SSM can be enabled on all the LAN ports in order to distribute the quality of the clock, according to Rec.
G8264/Y.1364.

Radio E1 type
The E1 streams carried through the radio link can be set as framed or not framed.
In case of “Framed” setting, the TU-AIS alarms can be used for VC12 management.

8.9.5

Firmware release 1.5.0

The new features included in this release are the following:

Management Port Secure Mode
The management ports can be set in secure mode: only traffic with the Vid pointed out can be managed.

Ethernet Traffic Rate Limiter
The Ethernet switch is protected against traffic storming.
In each LAN port, up to three different limits can be set for the following kind of traffic and/or a combination
of them: Unicast, Unknown Unicast, Unknown Multicast, Broadcast, ARP.

SSM Management
The SSM management can be set on port basis on Ethernet ports.

70

MN.00224.E - 011

CWDM SFP modules
A bigger range of optical plug-in modules can be used.

8.9.6

Firmware release 1.6.0

The new features included in this release are the following:

Management of CWDM SFP module from any supplier
This release increases the range of CWDM SFP modules that can be used in the IDU.

Egress shaping functionality
This feature allows limiting the egress throughput of the ALCplus2e LAN interfaces, by properly exploiting
the buffer of this port.
The egress shaping rate can be configured with the following values:

if Egress Rate < 1Mbit/s: 64kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 512 kbit/s

if Egress Rate > 1 Mbit/s & Egress Rate <10 Mbit/s: values with granularity of 1 Mbit/s

if Egress Rate > 10 Mbit/s (up to 1 Gbit/s): values with granularity of 10 Mbit/s.

In this way each Ethernet port has separate limits for input and output throughput.

Asymmetric Link Loss Forwarding functionality
In some cases, the radio link failure can be unidirectional, for example when the local equipment has an
Rx signal failure but the remote Rx signal is OK (i.e. unidirectional radio fail due to failure of a transmitter).
However, also in these cases there can be the need to shutdown the link in both directions even if there is
only a unidirectional link failure.
Using the bidirectional LLF feature, in case of LLF in the local equipment, the local equipment can notify
this LLF status to the remote equipment, shutting down the link on both directions.

Extended buffer (128 Mb) on Ethernet queues of radio port
This release assigns up to 128 Mbit (16Mbyte) to a single queue.
The following buffer configuration are available on the 8 output queues of the radio port:

each queue is configurable from 128 kbit to 128 Mbit (see the below screenshot of the queue configuration)

every radio port has a total available buffer of 184 Mbit (23 Mbyte), so the sum of the 8 output
queue lengths of a single radio port does not have to exceed this value.

MN.00224.E - 011

71

LAN1
LAN2

10/100BaseT
1000BaseT

Ethernet
packet switch

10/100/1000BaseT

LAN3

10/100/1000BaseT
1000BaseT,SX,LX

LAN4

10/100/1000BaseT
1000BaseSX,LX

Port A

Permanent E1
up to 60E1

Radio
1+0
1+1

E1
cross-connect
STM-1 MSP

Extra E1
up to 19E1

32E1

2E1
Up to 80E1
- Permanent = High Priority
- Extra = Low Priority
Fig.31 - ALCplus2 with 32E1 expansion, STM-1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram

72

MN.00224.E - 011

LAN1
LAN2

10/100BaseT
1000BaseT

Ethernet
packet switch

10/100/1000BaseT

LAN3

10/100/1000BaseT
1000BaseT,SX,LX

LAN4

10/100/1000BaseT
1000BaseSX,LX

Port A

Permanent E1
up to 60E1

Radio
1+0
1+1

E1
cross-connect
STM-1 MSP
16E1

Extra E1
up to 19E1

NBUS1
NBUS2

2E1
Up to 80E1
- Permanent = High Priority
- Extra = Low Priority
Fig.32 - ALCplus2 with 16E1 expansion, STM1, NBUS, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram

MN.00224.E - 011

73

10/100BaseT

LAN1
LAN2

1000BaseT

Ethernet
packet switch

10/100/1000BaseT

LAN3

10/100/1000BaseT
1000BaseT,SX,LX

LAN4

10/100/1000BaseT
1000BaseSX,LX

Port A

Radio
1+0
1+1
2E1

Fig.33 - ALCplus2 with 2E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram

10/100BaseT
1000BaseT

LAN1
LAN2

10/100/1000BaseT

LAN3

10/100/1000BaseT
1000BaseT,SX,LX

LAN4

10/100/1000BaseT
1000BaseSX,LX

16E1

Ethernet
packet switch
Port A

Radio
1+0
1+1

2E1

Fig.34 - ALCplus2 with 16E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram

74

MN.00224.E - 011

1

2

NBUS

STM1
up to 80E1

16E1

E1 CrossConnect
Nodal 1

Ethernet Switch

LAN3
LAN4

up to 340 Mbit/s

LAN

1

2

1

2

NBUS

STM1
up to 80E1

16E1

E1 CrossConnect
Nodal 2

Ethernet Switch

LAN3
LAN4

up to 340 Mbit/s

LAN

1

2

1

2

NBUS

STM1
up to 80E1

16E1

E1 CrossConnect
up to Nodal 8
LAN3
LAN4

Ethernet Switch
up to 340 Mbit/s

LAN

1

2

Fig.35 - Node block diagram in protected configuration

MN.00224.E - 011

75

9

ALCPLUS2E IDU DESCRIPTION

9.1

CONFIGURATION

The IDU of ALCplus2e is available in the following configurations

1+0

1+1

1+0 XPIC

1+1 XPIC

2x (1+0)

2x (1+0) East West

N+0

N+0 XPIC

All the IDUs are made up with the following circuits:

Controller

LIM

RIM (one circuit in 1+0 configuration, two circuits in 1+1 configuration).

The IDU of ALCplus2e is one RU subrack.
Please refer to chapters 7 ALplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION and 8 ALCplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION for any information relevant to functionalities of the listed circuits.

9.1.1

Service channels

No service channels ports are available for ALCplus2e IDU.

9.2

ALCPLUS2E BLOCK DIAGRAM

On Fig.55 you can find block a diagram of ALCplus2e with 32E1 expansion.

76

MN.00224.E - 011

9.2.1

ADAPTIVE CODE MODULATION - ACM PROFILES

In ALplus2e radio family uses Adaptive Code and Modulation (ACM) in order to employ the correct modulation profile depending on the Rx signal quality. Available ACM profiles are the following:

4QAM strong

4QAM

8PSK

16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM.

These profiles operate in an RF channel with the following bandwidth:

7 MHz

14 MHz

28 MHz

40 MHz

56 MHz.

With 1+0 configuration the E1 number is:

Number of permanent (fixed) E1:

max 80E1

Number of extra (dynamical) E1:

max 21E1

Total number of E1 per direction:

82 E1

Total number of E1 per unit:

82 E1.

9.3

FREQUENCY REUSE

The frequency reuse makes use of an XPIC circuit (Cross Polar Interference Canceller) and allows the coexistence of two radio bearer transmission on the same RF channel. Each radio bearer carries an individual
radio frame up to 341 Mbit/s.
The system consists of two fully independent transceivers, and a cross-polarized antenna with polarization
H connected to one transceiver and polarization V connected to the other transceiver.
The initial co-channel interference is featured by the antenna cross polar discrimination factor (example
29 dB). This value may be not sufficient for frequency reuse system making use of modulations 32QAM
After all, it may be impaired by the propagation condition giving rise to a BER degradation. To get a suitable
discrimination value, an adaptive canceller, based on a fully numeric adaptive coefficient filter, must be
used.
As shown in Fig.58 the received signals at the IF receiver outputs are processed by the demodulator placed
on the copolar branch as well as by the canceller annexed to the demodulator processing the signals from
the cross polar polarization. This process operates in baseband time domain.
An adaptive equalizer minimizes the intersymbolic interference within the copolar demodulator whereas a
circuit similar to the equalizer, processes the signal on the cross route.
Such a signal, summed with the one available at the equalizer output permits the cancelling of the interference contained in the copolar signal. XPIC circuit is used into configuration 1+0 XPIC and 1+1 XPIC.
IDU-ODU coaxial cable to ODU for vertical polarization and ODU for horizontal polarization should not differ
more than 1.5 meters in length.

MN.00224.E - 011

77

9.4

XPIC 1+1 CONFIGURATION

The XPIC 1+1 configuration is made up of two ALCplus2e IDU with XPIC and 4ODU connected as in Fig.56.
Interconnections between the two IDU are as follows:

one IDU is defined Master, the other is defined Reserve, while one of them is Active the other is
Stand-by

LAN protection with ring connection within LAN1 Master with LAN2 Reserve and LAN1 Reserve with
LAN1 Master

TDM protection with Nodal Bus, NBUS1 Master with NBUS2 Reserve and NBUS1 Reserve with
NBUS2 Master.

The Active IDU has Tx and Rx on and it is communicating bidirectionally with remote end. The stand-by
IDU has Tx off. The following user interfaces are available:

STM1
-

4x(1+0), the four STM1s (two on Master and two on Reserve) are independent

or
-

2x(1+1 MSP), two STM1s in MSP

-

protection are always in the same IDU

4x1Gbit Ethernet, (LAN3, 4 Master LAN3, 4 Reserve). ELP (Ethernet Line Protection) can be used to
protect LAN connection with another port of the same IDU or the other IDU.

no E1 port is available.

A max number 160 (2x80) VC12s are available via radio. Nodal bus from Master and Reserve can carry a
max of 126xVC12s.
The Active IDU is using completely the Radios, the Stand-by IDU has the two Radios in Tx off. HW failure
activate protection switch. Radio traffic is moved on new Active IDU. Switching from one IDU to the other
is traffic affecting.
The four STM1 available on front panel of IDU Master and IDU Reserve can get the traffic from Master Radio
1A and 2A or from Reserve Radio 1A and 2A depending on which IDU is Active: Master or Reserve.
Connection from Radio (Active IDU) to Active IDU STM1 ports is done through cross connection matrix.
Connection from Radio (Active IDU) to Stand-by IDU STM1 ports is done through Active cross connection
matrix, NBUS1, 2, and Stand-by cross connection matrix. Some Ethernet Enchanced features are not available:

Not available: transparent point to point

MAC Learning must be always enabled

Not available: Priority management is the same for all LAN ports

Not available: Customer VID Rewrite

Not available: CVid Rewrite & Selective QinQ

Not available: MPLS priority to SVLAN priority. MPLS priority to CVLAN priority is available

Not available any CIR/EIR feature

Not available RED/WRED feature

Advance statistic counters are available only on radio port

Cable to be used for short connections

78

MNGT1 to MNGT2

F03596

LAN1 to LAN2

F03596

LAN2 to LAN1

F03596

NBUS1 upper to NBUS2 lower

F03598

NBUS1 lower to NBUS2upper

F03598

MN.00224.E - 011

9.4.1

XPIC 1+1 management

Master and Reserve IDUs have two different IP address shown to the user with WebLCT.
MNGT1 is connected with MNGT2 with a Lan cable. The two local IP address and remote IP Address are in
the same subnet. Local to remote connection of management channel is in Bridge mode.

9.4.2

SSP protocol management

Synchronization Setup Protocol (SSP) is on only into Active IDUs. Into Standby IDUs the SSP is off.

9.5

2X(1+0) EST WEST CONFIGURATION

The 2x(1+0) Est West configuration is made up of one IDU and 2 ODUs connected as in Fig.57.
One ODU to an antenna directed to Est, one ODU connected to an antenna directed to West.
The following interfaces are available:

16E1 and 2E1

2xSTM1

4x1Gbit Ethernet

Cross connection is possible among STM1s, 16E1, radio side E1s. At receiving end the IDU receives E1s
from two ODUs East and West and decides which is going to use on the basis of alarms.
Ethernet traffic may arrive from East or West, switching between the two sides can be done with rapid
spanning tree protocol, activated on both radio ports.
Number of permanent (fixed) E1:

max 2x80E1

Number of extra (dynamical) E1:

max 2x21E1

Total number of E1 for any direction:

82 E1

Total number of E1 per unit:

164 E1.

9.5.1

Selective E1 Protection

A selective E1 subset defined into WebLCT can be routed, for protection purposes, to both radio directions
Vertical and Horizontal or Est and West.
With 1+0 XPIC configuration the ALCplu2e on the other side receives the two E1s and decides which one
to select on the basis of alarms.
With 2x(1+0) Est West configuration, if the equipment is part of a loop, the equipment is receiving the
two E1s and on the basis of alarms decides which incoming E1 to select.

MN.00224.E - 011

79

9.6

N+0 CONFIGURATION

The ALCplus2e can be configured with a number of ODU depending on frequency arrangement.

9.6.1

Frequency arrangement definitions

The following frequency arrangement definitions will be used. See Fig.36, Fig.37 and Fig.38.

Fig.36 - ACAP: Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization

Fig.37 - ACCP: Adjacent Channel CoPolarization

Fig.38 - CCDP: CoChannel Dual Polarization

9.6.2

GENERALS

ALCplus2e high capacity radio links N+0 are available in some configurations:

80

2x(1+0) with frequency reuse (XPIC),

MN.00224.E - 011

2x(1+0) with hybrid coupler, two channels adjacent or not adjacent

2x(1+0) with circulator, two channels adjacent or not adjacent, low losses, narrow band ODU

4x(1+0) with XPIC, hybrid coupler, two not adjacent channels or two CCDP adjacent channels

4x(1+0) with XPIC, circulator, two not adjacent channels or two CCDP adjacent channels, low losses, narrow band ODU

8x(1+0) with XPIC, CCDP frequency arrangement, narrow band ODUs

New software license may be necessary for some configurations.
Any single radio stream can be used as:

a STM1 SDH stream + nxE1 + Ethernet stream

whole capacity can be used for an Ethernet stream

For maximum Ethernet throughput, depending on channel bandwidth, modulation, frame size and protocols, please refer to relevant paragraph in this manual

9.6.3

2X(1+0) system with XPIC

See Fig.39 and Fig.40

Fig.39 - Frequency arrangement

Fig.40 - Layout of 2x(1+0) with XPIC

MN.00224.E - 011

81

The solutions ALCplus2e 2x(1+0) with frequency reuse (XPIC) have the following characteristics:

XPIC,

dual polarization antenna,

Channel bandwidth: 14MHz, 28MHz, 40MHz, 56 MHz Horizontal and Vertical polarization

No branching loss

Standard ASN can be used

Frequency bands: any frequency in which ASN is available

Ethernet dual pipe or single pipe

9.6.4

2X(1+0) system with hybrid coupler, two channels

See Fig.41 and Fig.42

Fig.41 - Frequency arrangements

Fig.42 - Layout of 2x(1+0) two channels with hybrid coupler

82

MN.00224.E - 011

The solutions ALCplus2e 2x(1+0) with hybrid coupler two channels, adjacent and not adjacent, have the
following characteristics:

No XPIC,

Single polarization antenna,

Channel bandwidth: 14MHz, 28MHz, 40MHz, 56 MHz Horizontal and Vertical polarization

Hybrid coupler losses: <4dB at TX and <4dB at RX (according frequency)

Two standard ASN ODUs with same code

Frequency bands: any frequency in which ASN is available

Ethernet dual pipe or single pipe

9.6.5

2X(1+0) with circulator, low losses

See Fig.43 and Fig.44

Fig.43 - Frequency arrangement

Fig.44 - Layout of 2x(1+0) with circulator

MN.00224.E - 011

83

The solutions ALCplus2e 2x(1+0) with circulator two channels not adjacent (ACAP) or two channels adjacent (ACCP), have the following characteristics:

No XPIC,

single polarization antenna,

channel bandwidth: 28MHz or 40MHz one polarization

circulator losses <1,5 dB per link (Tx + Rx)

ODU:

-

AS 28MHz single channel ACAP at 7, 13, 15 GHz, and AS 40MHz single channel ACAP 6U, 11 GHz

-

High power ASN7HP 28MHz single channel ACCP, 7,1-7,4 and 7,4-7,7 GHz, other frequencies
available on request

Ethernet dual pipe or single pipe

9.6.6

4X(1+0) with XPIC and hybrid coupler two CCDP channels

See Fig.45 and Fig.46

Fig.45 - Frequency arrangement

Fig.46 - Layout 4x(1+0) with XPIC and hybrid coupler

84

MN.00224.E - 011

The solutions ALCplus2e 4x(1+0) with XPIC and hybrid coupler two not adjacent channels or CCDP adjacent channels have the following characteristics:

XPIC,

dual polarization antenna,

channel bandwidth: 14MHz, 28MHz, 40MHz, 56 MHz Horizontal and Vertical polarization

Hybrid coupler losses: <4dB at TX and <4dB at RX (according frequency)

Four standard ASN ODUs same code

Frequency bands: any frequency in which ASN is available

Ethernet combined into 2 dual pipes or 4 single pipes

9.6.7

4X(1+0) with XPIC, circulator, two CCDP channels

See Fig.47 and Fig.48

Fig.47 - Frequency arrangement

Fig.48 - Layout of 4x(1+0) with circulator

MN.00224.E - 011

85

The solutions ALCplus2e 4x(1+0) with XPIC, circulator coupler, two not adjacent channels or CCDP adjacent channels have the following characteristics:

XPIC,

dual polarization antenna,

channel bandwidth: 28MHz or 40MHz, two polarizations

circulators losses <1,5 dB per link (Tx+Rx)

ODU:

-

AS 28MHz single channel, two not adjacent channels at 7, 13, 15 GHz, and AS 40MHz single
channel, two not adjacent at 6U, 11 GHz

-

High power ASN7HP 28MHz single channel, CCDP, 7,1-7,4 and 7,4-7,7 GHz, other frequencies
available on request

Ethernet combined into 2 dual pipes or 4 single pipes

9.6.8

8X(1+0) with XPIC and multicirculator

See Fig.49 and Fig.50.

ƒ1

ƒ2

ƒ4
ƒ

28

28

Fig.49 - Frequency arrangement

86

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.50 - 8x(1+0) with XPIC and multicirculator
The solutions ALCplus2e 8x(1+0) with XPIC, Multicirculators and 4 adjacent CCDP channels have the following characteristics:

XPIC,

dual polarization antenna,

channel bandwidth: 28MHz two polarizations CCDP

256QAM modulation, no ACM

branching loss <5 dB per link (TX + RX)

ODU:
-

High power ASN7HP 28MHz single channel CCDP, 7,1-7,4 and 7,4-7,7 GHz, other frequencies
available on request

same output power on all 8 ODUs

Ethernet: 4 dual pipes or 8 single pipes

A reflector must be mounted on multicirculator ports without ODU.

9.6.9

MULTICIRCULATOR FREQUENCY RESTRICTIONS

See Fig.51.

MN.00224.E - 011

87

2

1

3

4

Fig.51 - Slot numbering into multicirculator ODUs
7GHz 7L band frequencies are:

CH1: 7121 MHz

CH2: 7149 MHz

CH3: 7177 MHz

CH4: 7205 MHz

CH5: 7233 MHz

CH1’: 7317 MHz

CH2’: 7345 MHz

CH3’: 7373 MHz

CH4’: 7401 MHz

CH5’: 7429 MHz

It is possible to select 4 frequency low or high . But the following limitation apply:
Don’t use CH1 together with CH5.
Don’t use CH1’ together with CH5’.
Channel arrangements into the multicirculator slots follow Tab.14

88

MN.00224.E - 011

Tab.14

9.7

Channel numbers

Channel numbers

CH 1,2,3,4
7L band

CH 2,3,4,5
7L band

SLOT1

CH4/CH4’

CH5CH/5’

SLOT2

CH3/CH3’

CH4/CH4’

SLOT3

CH2/CH2’

CH3/CH3’

SLOT4

CH1/CH1’

CH2/CH2’

SYNCHRONIZATION

Refer to Fig.52.
STM-1 frame generation requires that it is synchronised to a SDH network.
Into ALplus2e a synchronisation circuit, called SETS, gets the synchronisation signal from the following different sources:

radio A

radio B

STM1(1)

STM1 (2)

tributary A/B

tributary A/B as T3

tributary nE1

node1

node2

Lan A (Lan1,2,3,4) Gbit Electrical, (LAN 3, 4) Gbit Optical

Lan B (Lan1,2,3,4) Gbit Electrical, (LAN 3, 4) Gbit Optical

Internal source

As shown in Fig.52 the clocks extracted from the sources are sent to a selection circuit that chooses one
of the signals depending on the control sent by a selection logic.
This latter acts on the base of alarm roots (LOS-loss of input signal, LTI-loss of timing input, LOF-loss of
frame), on the base of assigned priority and manual forcing.
The selected clock drives an oscillator through a PLL circuit. The oscillator will generate the required internal synchronisation signal T0.
Trib A or B selected as T3 can be the source of T4 signal (2MHz) for other equipment like for example into
nodal structure.
If no input signals are available the internal oscillator source is used for the local restart of STM1 generation.
Synchronization quality is connected to synchronization source (SSM).
All ALCplus2e SSM characteristics will be available from second FW release.
ALCplus2e manages quality information (synchronization status message SSM) from the following sources:

2MHz: from TribA/B selected as T3

MN.00224.E - 011

89

E1: tribA or triB for one 2Mbit/s within the 16 E1 available; quality info uses a spare bit of G.704
time slot 0 frame B.

STM1: Quality info is into S1 byte

Nodal interface: proprietary field into frame (to be announced)

Ethernet (ITU G.8264): a dedicated slow protocol transfers quality info (second FW release)

Radio: with a proprietary message.

ALCplus2e synchronization follows G813, G823, G8262 and G781.

(Sync transmitted via Radio frame timing)

Remote

Local
SETS

SETS

NBUS

STM-1

NBUS

LAN3, 4
TRIB A=
2MHz/2Mbit

STM-1
LAN3, 4
TRIB A=2MHz/2Mbit

TRIB B=2Mbit

TRIB B=2Mbit

TRIB 1-16=2Mbit

TRIB 1-16=2Mbit

Fig.52 - Synchronization circuit

9.8

ALCPLUS2E NODE

A node can be made up of max 8 subracks of ALCplus2e IDU so that we can have:

up to 8 maximum independent radio directions, with max 82E1 per direction

up to 8 STM1 MST or MSP

up to 8 x 16E1 = 128E1

up to 8 x 2 x 1Gbit Lan ports.

On the front panel of ALCplus2e there are two “NBUS” ports (1 and 2) which must be connected to the
other IDU subrack as in Fig.35 for E1 traffic and Ethernet traffic.
For Ethernet traffic Lan1 and Lan2 must be connected as in Fig.35 Lan1 and Lan2 connection can be made
with normal Lan cables CAT5e/CAT6.
NBUS connection among the IDUs are made by cables of CAT7 quality, only by proprietary SIAE cable to
insert into the NBUS connectors (1 and 2) on the front panel. See Tab.15 for cable length and SIAE code.
Warning: for NBUS do not use normal Lan cables.
For any IDU into WebLCT it is necessary to define how many IDU are into the Node from 2 to 8. Into WebLCT each IDU must be defined as node number 1, 2...8.

90

MN.00224.E - 011

NBUS can operate in Protected mode or in Not Protected mode. Each NBUS carries 126 E1’s.
In case of Not Protected mode, all the 126 E1’s of the NBUS are used to connect a subrack to the others
for a total amount of 252 E1 connections available on NBUSes from one IDU.
In case of Protected mode, the unused connections, are used as protection of the connections between the
other IDUs; for example 63 E1’s are used between Node1 and Node2 and the other 63 E1’s are used as
protection of the connections between the other nodes, the connections used as protection pass into others
IDUs as passthrough without any need to be programmed. The troubles in the connections between the
NBUS buses are identified by alarms.
In case of protected modality, if the cable carrying the traffic is broken, an alarm is issued on the relevant
NBUS port, the equipment software switches the traffic on the other operating NBUS cable.
For Ethernet traffic Lan1 and Lan2 must be connected as in Fig.35.
With SCT/LCT program it is possible to configure a Node made up of some Nodals so into the window of
Node Manager it is possible to program only one big Crossconnect matrix for E1 and only one Ethernet
switch for all Lan traffic.
The software hides all NBUS connection for E1 and Lan connection from an IDU to others IDUs, so to operate on one big Crossconnection matrix and one big Ethernet switch.
For any IDU the Node Manager shows for E1s 16E1, STM1 E1s, radio permanent E1, radio extra E1 and for
Ethernet Lan3, Lan4, radio port Port A.
The Nodal equipment with SDH STM1 interface is a Regenerator Section Termination (RST) and a Multiplex
Section Termination (MST) therefore it generates the STM-1 frame and has an internal synchronization circuit SETS. The synchronization of the Node can be distributed on the NBUS.
The IDUs subracks must be synchronised together via NBUS or other interface.
For each Nodal subrack, the STM-1 interface can be duplicated (1+1 MSP) for the possible protection of
cable. The switching criteria in Rx are:

Unequipped

LOS

LOF

MSAIS

TIM

B2 excessive BER

B2 degraded BER.

9.8.1

Expansion from 2 to 3 IDUs

Suppose that the nodals 1 and 2 already exist and that you must add the nodal 3.
Disconnect the cable between NBUS1 nodal2 and NBUS2 nodal1, the traffic is automatically switched to
the other cable, if necessary.
Disconnect the cable between LAN1 nodal2 and LAN2 nodal1, the traffic is automatically switched to the
other cable, if necessary.
By WebLCT or SCT/LCT, re-program the nodal1 and nodal2 as node with 3 items.
By WebLCT or SCT/LCT, re-program the nodal3 as nodal3, protected and define the node with 3 items.
Connect the NBUS1 of the nodal2 with NBUS2 of nodal3, connect the NBUS1 of the nodal3 with NBUS2 of
the nodal1 as in Fig.35.
Connect the LAN1 of the nodal2 with LAN2 of nodal3, connect the LAN1 of the nodal3 with LAN2 of the
nodal1 as in Fig.35. By SCT/LCT, with Nodal ALCplus2 Manager, Nodal Configuration add nodal3 IP address.
Program the interested cross-connections and Ethernet switch connections with external interfaces of
nodal3, Node Manager will take care of connections on NBUSes and LAN1, 2.
The same procedure can be used even if the added node is different from nodal3.

MN.00224.E - 011

91

9.8.2

Reduction from 3 to 2 IDUs

Suppose that the nodals 1, 2 and 3 already exist and that the nodal 3 must be removed.
By SCT/LCT, with ALCplus2/ALCplus2e Node Manager, delete all the cross-connections to the external interfaces of nodal3.
Remove the cables of the NBUS and LAN going to nodal3.
Connect nodal2 NBUS1 to nodal1 NBUS2 as in Fig.35.
Connect nodal2 LAN1 to nodal1 LAN2 as in Fig.35.
The same procedure can be used even if the deleted nodal is different from nodal3.

9.9

SWITCH FOR ETHERNET PORTS

Into WebLCT Configurator, Ethernet switch can be set as Enhanced = Absent, in this case the ALCplus2e
Ethernet functionalities are fully compatible to ALCplus2. With Enhanced = Present selection new Ethernet
fiunctionalities are present and are described in the following.
The external interfaces (4 operational on 6 present) are placed on the front panel. Internal port is represented by the local radio stream where, through native Ethernet transport, is connected with the remote
equipment.
Inside IDU is present an Ethernet switch with 4 external ports (electrical 1000BaseT or optical 1000BaseX)
and up two internal ports. Port 3 and Port 4 have both interfaces, Port 1 and Port 2 are electrical only.
The internal ports are represented by the local radio stream where through native Ethernet transport is
connected with the remote equipment. There is one internal port for 1+0 and 1+1 radio configuration.
In XPIC and in 2x(1+0) link configurations, two settings are available regarding the internal port:

dual pipe - two internal ports (port A and port B), one for each polarization/direction

single pipe - one internal port (port A) for both polarizations/directions.

For Ethernet switch functionalities, please refer to chapter 8 ALCplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION.
Other functionalities are:

92

monitoring on service type (outer or inner VLAN TAG) counters based on CVLAN or SVLAN (second
FW release)

QinQ selective VLAN based selective VLAN + priority based, port based

8 queues scheduler on Radio Port, with priority managed on all 8 queues, it is possible to select
whenever queue is full:
-

Tail Drop: last come packet is lost

-

Queue Drop: the queue is deleted, over a defined threshold all packets in the queue are discarded to limit latency time on traffic within this queue

-

RED (Random Early Discard) random automatic discard of packets, over a defined threshold
there is a defined high percentage of discarded, only for incoming packets to a port without CIR
(that is all packets have same priority)

-

WRED (Waited Random Early Discard) random automatic discard of packets, over a defined
threshold there is a defined high percentage of discarded, only for incoming packets (green or
yellow coloured) to a port with CIR

-

Drop profile settable

with MPLS incoming packets it is possible to remap Exp Bits MPLS to 802.1p Ethernet to manage
MPLS priority on Radio Port.

frame fragmentation: packets exiting on radio port are fragmented to reduce Latency Time Jitter

CIR/EIR/Max rate management, at the input of any physical Lan port for the packets exiting from
radio port it is possible to define: CIR Committed Information Rate (minimum guaranteed rate),
MN.00224.E - 011

Excessive Information Rate (maximum bit rate if bandwidth is available) Max Rate (maximum bit
rate, rate control) for any Lan port, for any CVLAN, for any SVLAN

VLAN re-writing with VLAN re-mapping

OAM 802.1ag

LINK CONCATENATION
Link Concatenation is a feature available on SIAE ALCplus2e equipment that allows assigning up to two
physical links to one logical link that functions as a single, higher-speed link.
Link Concatenation works aggregating two radio interfaces (single pipe). With XPIC it aggregates radio
traffic from Vertical polarization and radio traffic from horizontal polarization. Traffic speed on the two polarization can be different.
Algorithm of packets distribution on the two radios are statistically and proportional to traffic capacity giving the maximum throughput from the two radios.
Warning: if the two radio interfaces carry a too unbalanced Ethernet traffic, the combined Ethernet traffic
may be blocked.

ETHERNET PACKET FRAGMENTATION
On radio side it is possible to enable the Packet Fragmentation at 256 or 512 bytes. Smaller packets give
the benefit of lower delay variation (jitter) on the other packets maybe at higher priority.

EPP
Enhanced Packet Processing (EPP) is the possibility to compress the fixed field into the packets. Up to 68
byte of headers can be affected by compression algorithm giving a higher benefit to small packets.

VLAN REWRITING
In the direction from Lan ports to Radio ports the Vid of tagged packets can be rewritten according the
maps defined into WebLCT.
Vlan rewriting is provided only if into 802.1q Management it is selected Fallback.
With Fallback, Traffic Treatment=Transparent Port to Port Transport, Provider=Disable we can make a table with: Input CVLAN Vid to Output CVLAN Vid
With Fallback, Traffic Treatment=Transparent Port to Port Transport, Provider=Enable C_Vid Based we can
make a table with: Input CVLAN Vid to Output CVLAN Vid and output SVLAN Vid
With Fallback, Traffic Treatment=Transparent Port to Port Transport, Provider=Enable C_Vid Priority we
can make a table with: Input CVLAN Vid and Input priority to Output SVLAN Vid.

ENHANCED ETHERNET PRIORITIZATION BASED ON MPLS EXP BITS
In the direction from Lan ports to Radio ports MPLS packets are analysed in their Exp (Experimental) 3 bits
and sent into one of the 8 queues available to radio.
A programmable map into WebLCT defines for each value of Exp bits which queue (from 0 to 7 Max priority)
the packet will enter.
Another programmable map into WebLCT defines for each value of Exp bits which value of 802.1p priority
bit will be written into the Vlan Tag.

MN.00224.E - 011

93

CIR/EIR RATE MANAGEMENT / INPUT FILTER POLICY (e.g. LAN1)
In the direction from Lan ports to Radio ports.
Some definitions:

UNI

User Network Interface

CoS

Class of Service

EVC

Ethernet Virtual Connection

CIR

Committed Information Rate

EIR

Excess Information Rate

CBS

Committed Burst Size

EBS

Excess Burst Size

CF

Coupling Flag

CVID

Customer VLAN Identifier

SVID

Service VLAN Identifier

Committed Information Rate (CIR): The bandwidth that the service provider guarantees to the customer, regardless of network conditions.
Excess Information Rate (EIR): The bandwidth allowance for “best effort” delivery, for which service
performance is not guaranteed and traffic may be dropped if the network is congested.
The combination of CIR and EIR rates is typically referred to as PIR, or Peak Information Rate, which
represents the total burstable bandwidth sold to the customer.
Committed Burst Size (CBS): The maximum size, expressed in bytes, of a burst of back-to-back Ethernet frames for guaranteed delivery.
Excess Burst Size (EBS): The maximum size of a burst of back-to-back Ethernet frames permitted into
the network without performance guarantees. EBS frames may be queued or discarded if bandwidth is not
available.
According to MEF 10.2 (Metro Ethernet Forum) specifications, the “bandwidth profile” service attribute (Input Filter Policing), which includes some or all of the above categories, can be defined per UNI, per EVC or
per CoS identifier (CoS ID; EVC.CoS). For any given frame, however, only one such model can apply. The
service provider meets the bandwidth guarantees by reserving appropriate network resources and employing a two-rate/three-colour (trTCM) rate-limitation methodology as part of its traffic engineering policy to
ensure compliance by user traffic.

Green = Trasmitted:

CIR and CBS.

Yellow = Low Priority (dropped in case of congestion):

EIR and EBS.

Red = Dropped:

traffic exceeding EIR and EBS is dropped.

CIR (green)
CBS (green)

EIR (yellow)
EBS (yellow)

dropped (red)
dropped (red)

For any port it is possible to add a Input Filter Policy table with this selections:

Disable

Uni Port Based

EVC C_Vid Based

COS C_Vid + Priority Based

EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based

COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Priority Based

According the status of 802.1q Management> 802.1q settings =

94

Disable: you can select only Uni Port Based with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

Fallback: two selections 1) EVC C_Vid Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with CIR, EIR, CBS and
EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with priority range,
CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

MN.00224.E - 011

Secure: two selections 1) EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based: applied to a SVLAN S_Vid and a CVLAN C_Vid
with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a
SVLAN S_Vid and CVLAN C_Vid with priority range, CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

Into ALCplus2e there is a total of 64 instances of Input Filter Policing for all the four ports into any radio
port.
Any CVID can be used into only one port.
Into same port same CVID can be reused but with different priority.

Priority Management (e.g. LAN1)
In the direction from Lan ports to Radio ports. Priority Management is dependant on the status of 802.1q
Management> 802.1q settings:

Disable: you can select only Uni Port Based with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

Fallback: two selections 1) EVC C_Vid Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with CIR, EIR, CBS and
EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with priority range,
CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

Secure (C_Vid Filtering): five selections 1) Port Default: priority defined by Default port Priority, all
packets entering this port have the same priority; 2) Native 802.1p (C_Vid): priority defined by
802.1p field in the CVLAN C_Vid; 3) Native TOS/DSCP: priority defined by Level 3 IP TOS/DSCP; 4)
Native MPLS: priority defined by MPLS Exp bits; 5) 802.1p(C_PCP) rewrite with MPLS: priority defined by PriorityLan to Radio > MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite (tab) map translation.

Secure (S_Vid Filtering, Provider=on): six selections 1) Port Default: priority defined by Default port
Priority, all packets entering this port have the same priority; 2) Native 802.1p (S_Vid): priority
defined by 802.1p field in the SVLAN S_Vid; 3) Native TOS/DSCP: priority defined by Level 3 IP
TOS/DSCP; 4) Native MPLS: priority defined by MPLS Exp bits; 5) 802.1p(C_PCP) rewrite (of CVLAN) with MPLS: priority defined by PriorityLan to Radio > MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite (tab) map translation; 6) 802.1p(S_PCP) rewrite (of SVLAN) with MPLS: priority defined by PriorityLan to Radio >
MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite (tab) map translation.

802.1q MANAGEMENT (e.g. Lan1)
Direction from Lan ports to Radio ports. Here you can select the input 802.1q: Disable, Fallback, Secure
mode.
You can select the Traffic Treatment with two possibilities: 1) Transparent Port to Port Transport; 2) Transparent Bridge Port Based.
1. Transparent Port to Port Transport : this is a setting for a simple application with 4 segragated connections Lan1 to remote Lan1, Lan2 to remote Lan2, Lan3 to remote Lan3, Lan4 to remote Lan4
with tagged and untagged traffic; some settings are needed locally and remote. Via radio (PortA)
the QinQ is used. From this configuration it is possible to add VLAN tags into Vlan Configuration
Table, prioritizing and OAM.
2. Transparent Bridge Port Based: this is a setting to create connections from radio port to Lan1,2,3,4
and from Lan1,2,3,4 to radio port.
With Provider> Enable C_Vid Based: into a tagged packet it is possible to rewrite from a defined Input
C_Vid to a defined Output C_Vid and add an Output S_Vid (a Service Vlan Identifier).
With Provider> Enable C_Vid + Priority: into a tagged packet, with a defined Input C_Vid and a defined
Input Priority it is possible to add an Output S_Vid (a Service Vlan Identifier).
A packet that locally is entering untagged, can be tagged on remote radio, with “Untag to Tag” checked.

MN.00224.E - 011

95

Queue Management Lan to Radio (e.g. Port A Enh.)
On radio Port A (and PortB if configured as 2x(1+0)) there are 8 Queues. Queue 8 has maximum priority.
For each queue length 128/256/512/1024 Kbit can be defined. Small queues have lower delay. Larger
queues have few drops.
Starting from lower priority queue, it is possible to use WFQ (Wait Fair Queue) exit policy. WFQ counts the
number of transmitted packets. For each Queue set as WFQ the queue priority can be defined changing
Weight value.

Fig.53 - RED curve
Drop type defines the drop policy, it can be:

Tail: this is the simplest dropping policy, last packet is dropped if queue is full;

Queue: if queue is full, all packets in the queue are dropped; packets are too old to be useful, so
all packets in the queue are dropped to reduce time delay at minimum;

See Fig.53.

96

RED (Random Early Drop): no packet are dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches
Smin(G, Green), packets are dropped randomly until a percentage of Pmax and an Occupation %
of Smax(G) limits are reached, all packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(G);

RED Gentle (Enable): no packets are dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G,
Green); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G), packets
are dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and
Smax(G)/Pmax(G); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(G) the percentage of randomly dropped packets is defined by the straight line between Smax(G)/Pmax(G) and Sgentle(G)/
100% ;

WRED (Weighted Random Early Drop): Weighted RED is a two line RED; one line for Green packets,
one line for Yellow packets; Green and Yellow are defined by CIR and EIR into Input Filtering Policy
(Lan1,2,3,4);
no green packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G, Green);
no yellow packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin (Y, Yellow);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G) green packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and Smax(G)/
Pmax(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(Y) and lower than Smax(Y) yellow packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(Y)/0 and Smax(Y)/
Pmax(Y);
all green packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(G);
all packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(Y);

MN.00224.E - 011

WRED Gentle (Enable): Weighted RED is a two line RED; one line for Green packets, one line for
Yellow packets; Green and Yellow are defined by CIR and EIR into Input Filtering Policy
(Lan1,2,3,4);
for Green packets no packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G) green packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and Smax(G)/
Pmax(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(G), the percentage of dropped green packets
is defined by the straight line between Smax(G)/Pmax(G) and Sgentle(G)/100%;
for Yellow packets no packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(Y);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(Y) and lower than Smax(Y) green packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(Y)/0 and Smax(Y)/
Pmax(Y);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(Y), the percentage of dropped green packets
is defined by the straight line between Smax(Y)/Pmax(Y) and Sgentle(Y)/100%;

WRED and WRED Gentle are very efficient to get the most from the radio link available traffic avoiding the
“stop and go” beavior (SAW trend) typical of congested TCP/IP traffic.
Warning: RED and WRED impact only TCP/IP traffic, not UDP traffic.

9.10

LAG - LINK AGGREGATION

Link Aggregation (LAG) is a feature available on ALCplus2e equipment that allows assigning up to four
physical links to one logical link (trunk) that functions as a single, higher-speed link. In ALCplus2e LAG is
named Trunking and two different implementations are possible:

Line trunking: it works by aggregating LAN interfaces.

Radio trunking: it works by aggregating radio interfaces.

Radio Trunking is available only when the Nodal Ethernet functionality is enabled. The nodal Ethernet configuration can be deployed on all the ALCplus2e IDU models.

9.10.1

Line Trunking

Line Trunking is available on the ALCplus2e IDU. ALCplus2e support IEEE 802.3ad LACP (Link Aggregation
Control Protocol). See Fig.54.

Fig.54 - Line trunking

MN.00224.E - 011

97

LACP allows a network device to negotiate an automatic bundling of links by sending LACP packets to the
peer (directly connected device that also implements LACP). In addition to the increased capacity of the
logical link, LACP provides additional advantages:

failover detection when a link fails, allowing for a trunk reconfiguration in order to avoid systematic
packet loss (after the reconfiguration the packets will be lost only if the throughput exceed the trunk
capacity).

it introduces an agreement between the two LACP peers before to start data transmission over the
trunk. This prevent anomalous behaviour in case of cabling or configuration mistakes.

LACP works by sending frames (LACPDUs) over the links belonging to the trunk. Also the equipment deployed on the other end of the trunk will send LACP frames over the same links: this enables the two units
to establish the trunk. LACP can be configured two modes: active or passive. In active mode it will always
send frames along the configured links. ALCplus2e implements an "active" LACP.
Each IDU allows to define up to 4 different trunks on its LAN interfaces. A Line Trunk can aggregate up to
4 LAN interfaces with the following restrictions:

all the LAN interfaces must be defined with the same speed (either 10, 100 or 1000 Mbit/s).

all the LAN interfaces must be set in Full Duplex mode

all the interfaces must belong to the same IDU, even if the IDU is deployed in Nodal Ethernet configuration.

When a Trunk is defined on ALCplus2e, the end-to-end traffic is transmitted over all the aggregated lines.
As a results, the overall capacity of the trunk can be theoretically equal to the number of aggregated lines
multiplied by the capacity of a single line. In the example of Fig.27, four 100Mbs connection are grouped
into the same trunk, carrying all the capacity in transit from a radio link to another. In this configuration,
the theoretical maximum capacity that can transit on this trunk is 400 Mbit/s.
The packets carried by the trunk are assigned to each line depending on their Source MAC (SA) and Destination MAC (DA) Addresses (MAC hashing).
A possible problem that could occur when Link Aggregation protocols are used is a change in the transmission order of packets belonging to the same logical session. The MAC hashing method prevents such a
problem: the traffic transmitted from one host to another one in the network (fixed SA and DA) is always
sent over the same physical line of the trunk, avoiding any order change.
If a line of the trunk fails (for example due to a cable disconnection), the LACP protocol automatically reconfigure the trunk group into a lower order trunk. So doing, the traffic that before was carried over the
failed line, now will be re-distributed over one of the remaining trunk lines, ensuring continuity to the traffic
transmission. The typical LAG reconfiguration time in case of a LAN cable failure is below 1 second.

9.10.2

Radio Link Trunking

Radio Link Trunking is a feature available on ALCplus2e equipment when deployed in Nodal Ethernet configuration.
This feature allows to bundle up to 4 radio links to increase the capacity of an Ethernet connection between
two radio sites (see Fig.28).
Each Nodal Ethernet stack can belongs to one Radio Trunk. Each IDU of the trunk sends over the air only
a portion of the traffic, according to the same hashing rule used for the line trunking (see paragraph 8.6.1
Line Trunking). The traffic received from the radio trunk is sent towards the IDU where is located the outgoing interface according to standard MAC learning/switching mechanisms.
Resiliency between the radio links aggregated into the trunk is managed by means of a proprietary protocol. If a radio link of the trunk fails (due to fading or equipment failure), this protocol automatically reconfigure the trunk group into a lower order trunk. In this way, the traffic that before was carried over the
failed link, now will be re-distributed over one of the remaining trunk lines, ensuring continuity to the traffic
transmission. The typical Radio Trunk reconfiguration time is about 600msec.
It is important to note that also if it could be possible to aggregate up to four 340Mbit/s radio links (by
using 56 MHz frequency channel with 256 QAM modulation), the maximum capacity that can be carried
over the radio link cannot exceed 1Gbit/s in each direction of transmission (referring to Fig.28, from Site
A to Site B and vice-versa).

98

MN.00224.E - 011

Regarding multicast/broadcast, the total traffic entering the stack (sum of the packets entering from LAN3/
LAN4 interfaces and from the radio ports) cannot exceed 1Gbit/s. This because also the traffic received
from the radio trunk is flooded towards all the IDUs belonging to the Nodal Ethernet stack (MAC learning
cannot be performed over multicast packets).

9.11

LINE PROTECTION THROUGH DISTRIBUTED ELP

ELP (Ethernet Line Protection) is a feature available on ALCplus2e IDU that allows to protect a GE interface
against cable failure or accidental disconnection. With ELP it is possible to connect an ALCplus2e IDU to
another network element by using two GE interfaces. Both interfaces are active but just one is enabled to
forward and receive traffic (forwarding state), while the other does not allow any traffic to pass (blocking
state). If the forwarding interface goes down, the other one passes to the forwarding state. The typical
switching time is around 1.5 sec. This feature does not imply the use of any protocol, but is simply based
on the status of the physical interfaces. As a consequence, no particular protocol support is required on
the connected equipment: it is simply required to enable the two GE interfaces.
When the Nodal Ethernet configuration is used, ELP can be used to protect the traffic of two GE interfaces
belonging to two different IDUs of the stack. In this way the traffic can be protected against IDU failure,
in addition to the cable protection.
This feature is particularly useful when the Nodal stack is connected to an external equipment like a core
router (see the example of the following Fig.29).
It is recommended to disable any Spanning Tree protocol on the external equipment: this could cause longer traffic recovery times.

9.12

ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE)

As native Ethernet is originally designed for LAN (local Area Network), OAM is not included into the native
Ethernet network equipment. In order to provide a carrier grade service, the OAM protocol can be used in
any point-to-point Ethernet link (made up of a single radio link or many radio links). The aim of this protocol is to check and monitor the functionality of the service that the provider guarantees on the network.

9.12.1

Service Layer OAM

The Service Layer OAM fully monitors a customer End-to-End Ethernet Service. Two main standards cover
this topic, the IEEE 802.1ag and ITU-T Y.1731.
The IEEE 802.1ag provides CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) useful for detecting, isolating and reporting connectivity faults. The ITU-T Y.1731 Standard comprehends the CFM plus some additional features, like RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) that allows to report back to the start of the chain the Alarm
message.
ALCplus2e supports CFM according to both standards ITU-T Y.1731 and 802.1ag.
The IEEE 802.1ag and the ITU-T Y.1731 are End-to-End service, i.e. provides the tools to monitor the
Ethernet Service regardless of the layers, Network Path and operators. Since the spectrum of application
can include many applications a more hierarchical structure is needed.

MN.00224.E - 011

99

The Standards define:

Maintenance Domains (MD): these specify the Domains of operators, users and service providers.
Levels from 0 to 7 are possible depending on the type of service to be monitored. Customer Domain
is the higher which includes both ends of the Ethernet service (from one End user to the other End
user), Standard Default values for Customer Domain are 7, 6 and 5. Service Provider Domains
should have a MD lower than the Customer Domain since include the whole network except the End
Users. Standard default values for Provider Domains are 3 and 4. Operator Domains are lower than
Service Provider Domains since just a part of the network is included. Standard Default values for
operator domains are 0, 1 and 2. A domain is transparent to all messages with higher priority while
blocking all lower priority messages. Fig.30 shows the hierarchical structure of Maintenance Domains.

ALCplus2e equipment belongs to one Maintenance Domain.
At each end of the Maintenance Domain two MEPs (Maintenance End Point) will be specified. One MEP is
local, the other one is in the remote equipment. The MEPs are "markers" that defines the end of a domain
and are in charge of originating OAM frames.
In a domain also MIPs (Maintenance Intermediate Points) can be specified. The MIPs are passive checkpoints. The MEPs and MIPs configuration are discussed in details in the following points. The choice of the
domain that is the Domain Label (name) is left to the user. Particular attention must be paid to use exactly
the same MD label (and level) in each equipment where the MD is specified, i.e. different equipment with
same value of MD domain but different MD labels (or levels) belongs to different Domains.

A Maintenance Association (MA) is one association which correlates the VLAN to the MD in which
the MEPs and MIPs have to be defined.
When a specified traffic needs to be monitored, then it is necessary to relay the VLAN to a Domain
and to the corresponding MEPs or MIPs through the MA. Before creating the Maintenance Association, the VLAN, either SVLAN (Service VLAN Tag o Stacked VLAN Tag) or C-VLAN, has to be specified
in the VLAN Table. In each SIAE equipment it is possible to set up to 32 different MA. Particular
attention must be paid to use the same MA label in each equipment where the MA is specified, i.e.
different MA labels on the same VLAN correspond to different MA associations.

At the Edge of a MD there are MEPs (Maintenance End Points) and in the middle there could be MIPs
(Maintenance Intermediate Points). MEPs are the units in charge of managing the CFM to correctly
monitor the status of the Ethernet service provided. MIPs are passive check-points that answer to
polling coming from MEPs. MEPs will forward OAM messages coming from higher domains and will
discard OAM messages generated from lower domains.
Each interface can be configured as MEP, Port A interface (radio interface) included. Once chosen
the interface, depending on the network topology, the direction of the MEP has to be specified. Two
Directions are possible, MEP "up" and MEP "Down". With MEP "Down" configured the OAM PDUs are
sent from the interface in the direction outside the equipment, i.e. the OAM PDUs are sent from the
interface on the cable toward next equipment. With MEP "Up" configured the OAM PDUs are sent
from the interface toward the inside of the equipment and will follow the VLAN table previously configured. MEPs are distinguished from each other through a MEP ID, therefore MEPs belonging to
same MA must have different MEP Ids. In order to configure a MIP the MA has to be enabled on the
equipment. Up to 32 MIPs or MEPs can be configured on each equipment.

The protocols belonging to the Connectivity Fault Management implemented in SIAE equipment are following listed:

100

Continuity Check Protocol: this protocol enables the sending of a periodic message (like a Heartbeat
message) which enables the other MEPs deployed in the network to distinguish the status of a virtual connection. This message can only be originated by a MEP. Time between messages is adjustable with 1s, 10s, 1min, 10min. These messages do not trigger any automatic reply from the
destination entity.

LoopBack Protocol: it resembles an IP PING message; once this message is sent (e.g. MEP1 sends
a Loopback Message to MEP2). MEP2 replies to MEP1 confirming therefore the status of the connection. This is done to check the status of the connection between the MEP originating the message
and the MEP/MIP to which the message is addressed. This message can only be originated from one
MEP and can be addressed to both MEPs or MIPs. ALCplus2e: The number of Loopback Messages in
ALCplus2e is adjustable from 1 to 5 consecutive Loopbacks. In each equipment, it is possible for
each MEP to check the presence of other MEPs in the same MA. This is done through the "Remote
MEP" application which allows this acknowledgement and distinguishes the other MEP through
means of MEP IDs and MAC address.

Link Trace Protocol: This protocol sends a message similar to the LoopBack protocol. Every equipment that is reached by this message will answer to the sender providing its own MAC Address. In
this way the sender is able to understand of which equipment the MA is composed. E.g. a MEP sends
the Link Trace Message to another MEP belonging to the same Maintenance Association. The MIPs

MN.00224.E - 011

that are eventually deployed in the middle of the path will forward this message and answer to the
initiating MEP with their own MAC Address. By doing so the initiating MEP knows the OAM-devices
deployed in the path and their order.

Remote Defect Indicator: This Feature allows a MEP, in presence of a fault or a defect, to send a
RDI to inform the other MEPs, belonging to the same MA, of the presence of this Defect. The advantages of this procedure are to avoid multiple Alarms created by the same cause and to be able
to check the status of other Remote MEPs. This RDI information is reported in the Continuity Check
Message. ALCplus2e: This feature is present in ALCplus2e equipment and the presence of this alarm
can be checked as well in the Remote MEPs screen on the equipment.

9.12.2

OAM Example with ALCplus2e

As an example, let's consider a network where a sequence of 8 SIAE ALCplus2e Radio links is deployed. In
this case a Maintenance Domain, a VLAN and a Maintenance Association have to be defined. The VLAN carrying the traffic must be present in the VLAN table of each equipment.
Two MEPs at the end of the chains and a variable number of MIPs in the middle has to be defined with
Continuity Check Message (CCM) enabled.
In case of defect or Ethernet problem, the Continuity Check Message will result in an "Inactive" status triggering one Alarm.
By logging on one MEP it is sufficient to configure the Loopback message and Link Trace Message correctly
detects the location of the Bottleneck or defect related to this traffic. If More than one VLAN is present then
more than one MA has to be defined.

9.13

ALCPLUS2E FIRMWARE UPDATES

In this chapter are described the new features available with new firmware releases.
Every firmware release is included in a System Version and is supplied with the right WebLCT version.

FW update procedure
The order of file download is the following:
1. FW_Boot E82103
2. FW_appl N90656
3. WEBLCT N96109
All the files are in a compressed container called System Version v.XX.YY.ZZ.
If ODU needs a firmware update, it must be done after there three.

9.13.1

Firmware release 1.3.1

The new features included in this release are the following:

MN.00224.E - 011

101

IEEE 1588 Pass Through
When SyncE is not available in all transmission chain, the synchronization protocol IEEE 1588v2 can be
used: this synchronization protocol allows distributing the CK through the network by means of protocol
packets.
The IEEE1588v2 is based on time stamps sent from a Master Clock Source to one or more Slave.
In one link both sides can be elected as Master but not at the same time : if one side is Master, the other
is Slave.
Enabling IEEE 1588 Pass Through an extra queue with maximum priority is generated. The transit delay
on radio link at different modulation is fixed. Jitter on 1588 packets is reduced activating packet fragmentation.
The acknowledgement of the 1588 Frames in ALCplus2e can be done depending on different sections of
the header with different filtering options, listed below, that are mutually exclusive. It is possible to configure:

UDP based PTP Filtering (destination Port) - Default Configuration: the 1588 Frames are filtered
based on the Destination port (319 or 320 depending on the type of 1588 frames)

Ethernet based PTP Filtering: The 1588 frames are filtered based on the Ethertype (Ox88F7)

C-TAG based PTP Filtering: The 1588 frames are filtered amongst all the traffic marked with a precise C-Tag.

S-TAG based PTP Filtering: The 1588 frames are filtered amongst all the traffic marked with a precise S-Tag.

C-TAG+S-TAG based PTP Filtering: The 1588 frames are filtered amongst all the traffic marked with
a precise Combination of C-Tag and S-Tag.

By enabling this "Pass Through" on 1588 Frames, the equipment automatically enables the "Ethernet
Frames Fragmentation" to 256 Bytes.

RMON
RMON (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count,
monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network.
SIAE equipment support RMONv1.
SIAE NMS systems collect periodically RMON data and store it into the network database.
The RMON implementation in SIAE Network Elements is classified into two groups:
1. RMON - Statistics
2. RMON - History
From Firmware release 1.3.1, RMON is available also on VLAN basis and Priority basis and can be shown
into SIAE NMS software.

FADE MARGIN
After installation of radio link and before assign traffic to it, it is possible to test and compare the "calculated" fade margin from link budget with "real fade margin verified" supplied as result after the fade margin
test.
This result can be printed and used as a benchmark of the quality of the installation.
In case of 1+1 configuration the test is applied on all the four ODU. Each of the four TX are attenuated one
by one reaching the threshold at opposite RX side (both radios) so measuring the link fade margin.

Service Tag user defined
Into LAN1, 2, 3, 4 ports in the 802.1q Management card, when the 802.1q setting is set "Disabled", the
Service Tag can be defined by the user for each port of the switch.

102

MN.00224.E - 011

New SFP modules
ALCplus2e is now compatible with new SFP modules: 1000BaseLX 40Km and 80 Km. Optical plugin modules must be supplied by SIAE.
See chapter 6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.

9.13.2

Firmware release 1.4.0

The new features included in this release are the following:

Lan Port Speed
Only for electrical LAN port.
In each of the four LAN port the autonegotiation can be limited up to 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, 1 Gbps.

Header compression with Ethernet and MPLS
From this firmware release it is available the header compression for packets with Ethernet over MPLS over
Ethernet.

SSM on all LAN ports
From this firmware release it is available the management of SSM, Synchronization Status Messages.
SSM allows:

the traceability to an identifiable primary clock reference source

the presence of two synch sources to all the network elements, a primary and a secondary source
in case of a primary failure

the lack of timing loops

SSM can be enabled on all the LAN ports in order to distribute the Quality of the clock, according Rec.
G.8264/Y.1364.

VLAN on Management port
VLAN on Management port 1 and on Management port 2 can be defined independently. Management ports
can communicate, without VLAN, with/without VLAN, only with VLAN.

Input Storming Prevention
For Lan ports the PIRL (Port Ingress Rate Limiter) can be defined for Broadcast, Unknown Multicast, Unknown Unicast, Unicast, ARP packets.

SSH security
SSH protocol and SFTP file transfer can be enabled in ALCplus2e.
SFTP can be used to download new system version to the equipment and also to transfer PM, RMON, Alarm
log and Command log.

MN.00224.E - 011

103

9.13.3

Firmware release 1.5.0

New IDUs with updated hardware allow new features that are available with firmware release 1.5.0

STM1 bulk transmission

HW PWE3 ready

STM1 bulk transmission
STM-1 bulk transmission is possible with compatible HW (see detailed IDU part number into IDU composition chapter at the end of the manual)
STM-1 transmission is possible only with channel bandwidth of 56 MHz, 40 MHz, 28 MHz.
One STM-1 stream can be transmitted by 1+0 and 1+1 configurations.
Up two STM-1 streams can be transmitted with 2+0 configuration.

HW PWE3 ready
PWE3 (Pseudowire Emulation Edge to Edge) is a protocol to transfer a point to point TDM connection via
Ethernet network.
PWE3 will be possible only with compatible HW (see detailed IDU part number into IDU composition chapter
at the end of the manual).

9.13.4

Firmware release 1.5.1

New features are available with firmware release 1.5.1

ACM setting
Into ACM settings lower modulation can be selected up to 4QAM up to 4QAMs.

9.13.5

Firmware release 1.6.0

The new features included in this release are the following:

Management of CWDM SFP module from any supplier
This release increases the range of CWDM SFP modules that can be used in the IDU.

ITU_T G8032 Ethernet ring protection
Ethernet Ring Protection Switching, or ERPS, (ITU-T G.8032 Rec.) provides sub-50ms protection and
recovery switching for Ethernet traffic in a ring topology and at the same time ensuring that there are no
loops formed at the Ethernet layer.

SNMP-V3 management
SNMPv3 defines a secure versione of SNMP and facilitates remote configuration of the SNMP entities.

104

MN.00224.E - 011

ACM ramp to max power (requires ODU AS03 N00053 01.03.00 and ODU ASN N00054
02.01.00)
This features allows activating an additional ACM power mode named “Ramp to max Power”. If no attenuation is applied to the link (i.e. RTPC=0), the “Ramp to Max. Power” mode has the same behaviour of
the “Ramp to Ref. Modulation” mode. Both the power modes automatically set the equipment transmitted
power according to the active modulation, as follows:

from Upper Modulation to Reference Modulation: the Tx power increases according to the active
modulation

from Reference Modulation to Lower Modulation: the Tx power keeps constant in order to comply
with the Reference modulation mask.

If the equipment transmitted power is limited by means of a fixed attenuation (i.e. RTPC>0), the “Ramp
to Max. Power” mode allows the equipment to reach for each modulation the maximum “allowed” power
(i.e. the highest value between the maximum Tx power of the modulation and the maximum equipment
power set by the user).

More than 64 VLAN (up to 4096)
The maximum number of VLAN managed by IDU is now 4096.

Extended buffer (128Mb) on Ethernet queues of radio port
This release assigns up to 128 Mbit (16 Mbyte) to a single queue.
The following buffer configurations are available on the 8 output queues of the radio port:

each queue is configurable from 128 kbit to 128 Mbit (see the below screenshot of the queue configuration)

every radio port has a total available buffer of 184 Mbit (23 Mbyte), so the sum of the 8 output
queues lengths of a single radio port does not have to exceed this value.

LAN statistics enhanced: extension to 64 bit of priority and service counters
In addition to the Ethernet Counters per Port, it is possible to set on the Radio port the RMON counters per
Service (Vlan) or Priority (Queues). Differently from the previous RMON counters, the Service and Priority
counters can be activated for the following variables.

Octets Tx: total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted.

Pkts Tx: total number of packets (all kind of packets) transmitted.

Octets Rx: total numbers of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received by the interface.

Pkts Rx: total number of packets (all kind of packets) received.

DropEvents: total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by the interface due
to lack of resources.

The Service and Priority RMON can be activated and collected from NMS (Network Management System).
The Service and Priority RMON are based on the Advanced Ethernet Counters present on the equipment
and configurable on site. This means that on site it is possible to activate the Advanced Ethernet Counters
but not the Service and Priority RMON.
In any case the NMS has higher priority in respect to the configuration inserted by WebLCT.
This means that the local operator can enable and read the active measure, but when the configuration of
these RMON is done through NMS, the local operator can only read the values of the Advanced Ethernet
Counters.
It is not possible to enable the RMON for Priority and, in the same equipment, the RMON per Vlan.

MN.00224.E - 011

105

Priority RMON: based on the internal Queue of the equipment, not on the value of the Priority: this implies
that:

the maximum number of RMON (Priority) that can be enabled are limited to 8, i.e. the number of
the queues available in ALCplus2e equipment.

if traffic with different priorities are listed in the same queue, the Priority RMON will work with one
Probe on the Queue. I.e. the traffic in the same Queue is seen as “Same Priority Traffic” and the
Priority RMON counts the frames belonging to the Queue.

In other words, with Priority RMON there is a probe for each queue (8 queues in ALCplus2e). Each probe
counts the variables listed above (Octets Tx, Pkts Tx, Octets Rx, Pkts Rx and Drop Events).
These counters will be available only with the Minimum Polling Policy of 15 min.
Service RMON: it allows the equipment to track the variables listed above depending on the Service (Vlan
Tag). This type of RMON can be set only on the Radio interface.
Each equipment can be set to collect RMON up to 32 Services (Vlan Tag) and only on Customer Tag. These
counters will be available only with the Minimum Polling Policy of 15 min.

9.13.6

Firmware release 1.7.0

The new features included in this release are the following:

Ports in secure mode allowing untagged traffic
This feature allows adding/removing a Tag on the Q3 ports (MNGT1 and MNGT2) by configuring the MNGT
ports in Secure Mode while in the past it was only possible to enable the VLAN Tagging in Fallback mode
on MNGT ports.
The Q3 ports could be set in Secure mode (“Enable Secure”) with specifying the VLAN ID the Ethernet traffic has to be tagged by.

Egress shaping functionality
This feature allows limiting the egress throughput of the ALCplus2e LAN interfaces, by properly exploiting
the buffer of this port.
The egress shaping rate can be configured with the following values:

if Egress Rate < 1Mbit/s: 64kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 512 kbit/s

if Egress Rate > 1 Mbit/s & Egress Rate <10 Mbit/s: values with granularity of 1 Mbit/s

if Egress Rate > 10 Mbit/s (up to 1 Gbit/s): values with granularity of 10 Mbit/s.

In this way each Ethernet port has separate limits for input and output throughput.

Asymmetric Link Loss Forwarding functionality
In some cases, the radio link failure can be unidirectional, for example when the local equipment has an
Rx signal failure but the remote Rx signal is OK (i.e. unidirectional radio fail due to failure of a transmitter).
However, also in these cases there can be the need to shutdown the link in both directions even if there is
only a unidirectional link failure.
Using the bidirectional LLF feature, in case of LLF in the local equipment, the local equipment can notify
this LLF status to the remote equipment, shutting down the link on both directions.

WEBLCT management with HTTPs protocol
This feature allows a secure HTTP connection with WebLCT, in addition to the already existing HTTP connection.

106

MN.00224.E - 011

HTTPS provides a secure client/server connection between the equipment (server) and the user connected
with WebLCT (client). The encryption of communications between client and server allows protecting
against third party intrusions that may read/forge the contents of the communication (Man in the Middle
Attack).
SIAE Implementation:

HTTP/HTTPS protocols have been implemented in an exclusive way, so that, when a user is connected using HTTPS, HTTP requests will be redirected in HTTPS and vice versa. So, when the user
connects to the IP address of the equipment by means of a Web browser, it is automatically connected through HTTP or HTTPS depending on the WebLCT security configuration

C.A. Certificate and SSL Certificate provide the encryption keys for the secure connection. These
certificates can be uploaded on the equipment through Certificate Upload Manager on WebLCT.

The user can switch to HTTPS only if the SSL certificates have been uploaded on the equipment.

HTTPS configuration on SIAE equipment:
In order to switch the WebLCT to HTTPS, the following steps have to be followed:
1. upload the C.A. and SSL Certificates on the equipment
2. enable the HTTPS feature
3. Re-load the equipment web page and make a new HTTPS login.
Management of the following feature keys: Ethernet header compression, G.8032, STM1-bulk, security package.
From this fw release the following functionalities can be enabled by means of a specific SIAE feature key.

Input filtering policing extension on the basis of SVID and SVID+Priority
EVC S-Vid Based (Bandwidth Profile per S_VID): a different profile is defined for different Service VLANs.
Up to 64 VLAN can be managed with different profiles.
COS S_Vid + Internal Priority (Bandwidth Profiles per S_VID+CoS): a different profile is defined for different couples S_VID+priority queue (up to 64 different cases can be managed). In this case the priority
queue from 0 to 7 (i.e. internal switch priority) is considered by the rate limiting algorithm and independently from the enabled QoS management (e.g. IEEE 802.1p, IPv4 ToS/DSCP, IPv6 TC/DSCOP).

Possibility to define two different rules inside the switch, port to port, to forward the
incoming frames: destination address + VID basis (bridge scenario) or VID basis
(pipe scenario).
This new feature allows the user to set the MAC forwarding rule od each LAN interface (i.e. LAN1, LAN2,
LAN3 and LAN4). Two different forwarding rules are available:
Destination Address + VID Basis: packets are forwarded on the basis of their destination MAC address and
VLAN ID. This is most commonly deployed rule (I.e. default setting).
VID Basis: packets are forwarded on the basis of their VLANID. The destination MAC address is NOT considered in this case. This rule is used only in some specific cases.

9.13.7

Firmware release 1.7.2

Management packets with priority 7
All the management packets sent towards MNGT1 and MNGT2 ports and towards radio EOC have priority
1 (802.1p)

MN.00224.E - 011

107

9.14

FIRMWARE UPDATES FOR ALCPLUS2E 1+1 XPIC

In the following are described the new features available in ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC with new firmware releases. Only the main releases are considered (....the firmware releases with new features).
Every firmware release is included in a System Version and is supplied with the right WebLCT version.

9.14.1

Firmware release 1.0.1

The new features included in this release are the following.

MAC Address Table
The MAC address in the MAC address Table can be managed also in this way

MAC Learning on Vid Basis: MAC address table can be managed depending on Vid

MAC on port basis: MAC address table can be managed depending on port.

Management Port Speed
The two management ports can set in different ways separately:

Full duplex 10M

Half duplex 10M

Full duplex 100M

Half duplex 100M

Auto-Speed-Dplx (the speed is set automatically during the handshake of the interfaces).

Bandwidth available
40 MHz and 56 MHz bandwidth can be selected.

10E1 expansion
IDU with expansion 16E1 an relevant cross-connection matrix can be managed and used.

9.14.2

Firmware release 1.2.0

The new feature included in this release is the following.

SSM management in synchronization sources
The SSM management (quality status of a synch source) is available on the following sources:

108

STM-1

Nodal Bus

MN.00224.E - 011

E1

SSM allows:

the traceability to an identifiable primary clock reference source

the presence of two synch sources to all the network elements, a primary and a secondary source
in case of a primary failure

the lack of timing loops

9.14.3

Firmware release 1.2.2

The new feature included in this release is the following.

OAM
The Service Layer OAM fully monitors a customer End-to-End Ethernet Service. Two main standards cover
this topic, the IEEE 802.1ag and ITU-T Y.1731.
The IEEE 802.1ag provides CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) useful for detecting, isolating and reporting connectivity faults. The ITU-T Y.1731 Standard comprehends the CFM plus some additional features like RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) that allows to report back to the start of the chain the Alarm
message.
SIAE ALCplus2e supports CFM according to both standards ITU-T Y.1731 and 802.1ag.
The IEEE 802.1ag and the ITU-T Y.1731 are End-to-End service, i.e. provides the tools to monitor the
Ethernet Service regardless of the layers, Network Path and operators.

9.14.4

Firmware release 1.2.3

The new feature included in this release is the following.

SSM management is synchronization sources on LAN ports
SSM can be enabled on all the LAN ports in order to distribute the Quality of the clock, according rec.
G.8264/Y.1364.

9.14.5

Firmware release 1.3.0

The new feature included in this release is the following.

LAN port Ingress Rate Limiting
New values are available in each LAN port to limit the input throughput (PIRL - Port based Ingress Rate
Limiting).

MN.00224.E - 011

109

up to
126E1

A
D
M

STM1-1
STM1-2

up to 80E1

Cross
Connect
Matrix

permanent
up to 21E1

R
a
d
i
o

up to 32E1
NBUS1
NBUS2

Trib A/B
Port A

Switch

LAN1
LAN2
LAN3
LAN4

Fig.55 - ALCplus2e block diagram

STM1/3

NMS

to ODU 1B (V)

STM1/4

to ODU 2B (H)
Slave

SPEED

LAN 2

LAN 4

Trib. B

STM1
1

2

ON

MNGT

LAN 3

Trib. 9-16

2
1

2

LAN 1

1
SW

Trib. A

LAN 3

STM1/1

48V

NURG URG

LCT
LINK

2

M 3.15A
250V

NBUS

LAN 4

1
R
GREEN

Trib. 1-8
1

2

TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

to ODU 1A (V)

STM1/2

+

YELLOW

-

to ODU 2A (H)
Master

SPEED

LAN 2

LAN 4

Trib. B

STM1
1

2

ON

MNGT

LAN 3

1

LINK

LAN 1

LAN 3

Trib. A

2

2

M 3.15A
250V
NURG URG

48V
1

LCT

R

Trib. 9-16

2
NBUS

LAN 4

1
GREEN

Trib. 1-8
1

2

SW
USER IN/OUT

TEST ON

+

YELLOW

-

Fig.56 - ALCplus2e 1+1 layout

110

MN.00224.E - 011

EST

SPEED

LAN 2

Trib. B

STM1

LAN 4

Trib. 17-24

Trib. 9-16

1

LAN 4

LAN 1

LAN 3

Trib. A

2

NURG URG

M 3.15A
250V

48V
1

LCT

R
LINK

Trib. 25-32
2

ON
LAN 3

1
GREEN

Trib. 1-8

2

1

2
MNGT

SW
USER IN/OUT

TEST ON

+

YELLOW

WEST

-

Fig.57 - ALCplus2e 2+0 layout

MN.00224.E - 011

111

Rx1

DEM

+

H data

+

V data

H
XPIC

XPIC
V

Rx2

DEM

Fig.58 - Frequency reuse system

112

MN.00224.E - 011

10

ODU DESCRIPTION

10.1

ODU VERSIONS

Two ODU versions are available: AS and ASN.
In the following pages eventual differences are pointed out.
The ODU (refer to Fig.59) consists of a two shell aluminium mechanical structure, one shell housing all the
ODU circuits, the other forming the covering plate.
On the ODU are accessible:

the “N” type connector for cable interfacing IDU and ODU

the “BNC” connector for connection to a multimeter with the purpose to measure the received field
strength

a ground bolt.

The 1+1 configuration consists of two 1+0 ODUs mechanically secured to a structure housing the hybrid
(or branching unit) for the antenna connection.

10.1.1

AS ODU

The AS ODU is shown in Fig.59 (single ODU) and in Fig.60 (1+1 ODU with branching unit). Electrical and
mechanical characteristics are listed in a separate addendum relevant to ODU frequency.

10.1.2

ASN ODU

The ASN ODU is shown in Fig.59 (single ODU) and in Fig.60 (1+1 ODU with branching unit). Electrical and
mechanical characteristics are listed in a separate addendum relevant to ODU frequency.

10.2

DESCRIPTION

The blocks that arrange the ODU are the following:

cable interface

power supply

Tx section

Rx section

1+1 branching unit

MN.00224.E - 011

113

10.3

CABLE INTERFACE

The cable interface permits to interface the cable interconnecting IDU to ODU and viceversa.
It receives/transmits the following signals:

330 MHz (from IDU to ODU)

140 MHz (from ODU to IDU)

17.5 MHz (from IDU to ODU)

5.5 MHz (from ODU to IDU)

remote power supply.

The 17.5 MHz and 5.5 MHz FSK modulated carriers, carry the telemetry channel. This latter consists of two
388 kbit/s streams one from IDU to ODU with the information to manage the ODU (RF power, RF frequency, capacity, etc...) while the other, from ODU to IDU, sends back to IDU measurements and alarms of the
ODU. The ODU management is made by a µP.

10.4

POWER SUPPLY

The battery voltage is dropped from the cable interface and then sent to a DC/DC converter to generate
three stabilized output voltages to be distributed to the ODU circuitry.

10.5

TX SECTION

Refer to block diagram shown in Fig.61.
The 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier from the cable interface (see chapter 10.3 CABLE INTERFACE) is forwarded to a mixer passing through a cable equalizer for cable loss compensation up to 40 dB at 330 MHz.
The mixer and the following bandpass filter give rise to a second IF Tx carrier the frequency of which depends on the go/return frequency value. The mixer is of SHP type.
All the IF and RF local oscillators are P controlled.
The IF carrier is converted to RF and then amplified making use of a MMIC circuit. The conversion mixer is
SSB type with side band selection.
The power at the MMIC output can be manually attenuated by 40 dB, 1 dB step (20dB, 1dB step for ODU
ASN).
The automatic adjustment is performed making use of an ATPC (see paragraph 10.5.1 ATPC operation for
details). The regulated output power is kept constant against amplifier stage gain variation by a feedback
including the AGC.
Before reaching the antenna side the RF signal at the output of MMIC passes through the following circuits:

a tea-clipper plus detector diode to measure the output power

a circulator to protect the amplifier stages against possible circuit mismatch.

a ON/OFF switch for 1+1 operation

an RF passband filter for antenna coupling.

A particular setting of Tx and Rx RF oscillators allows to obtain a RF Loop, managed by Controller module.
The particular way used to perform the RF loop avoids the necessity to switch off the remote Transmitter.
RF Loop is available in AS ODU only.

114

MN.00224.E - 011

10.5.1

ATPC operation

The ATPC regulates the RF output power of the local transmitter depending on the value of the RF level at
the remote terminal. This value has to be preset from the local terminal as threshold high and low. The
difference between the two thresholds must be equal or higher than 3 dB.
As soon as the received level crosses the preset threshold level low (see Fig.64) due to the increase of the
hop attenuation, a microP at the received side of the remote terminal sends back to the local terminal a
control to increase the transmitted power. The maximum ATPC range is 40 dB (ODU AS, 20dB only in ODU
ASN)
If the hop attenuation decreases and the threshold high is crossed then the control sent by the microP
causes the output power to decrease.

10.6

RX SECTION

The RF signal from the Rx passband filter is sent to a low noise amplifier that improves the receiver sensitivity. The following down–converter translates the RF frequency to approximately 765 MHz. The conversion mixer is SSB type. The sideband selection is given through a µP control.
A second down converter generates the 140 MHz IF carrier to be sent to the demodulator within the IDU.
The level of the IF carrier is kept constant to –5 dBm thank to the IF amplifier stages, AGC controlled,
distributed in the IF chain.
Between two amplifiers a passband filter assures the required selectivity to the receiver. The filter is SAW
type and the bandwidth depends on the transmitted capacity.

10.7

1+1 TX SYSTEM

The two ODUs are coupled to the antenna side via a balanced or unbalanced hybrid.
1+1 Tx switching occurs in the 1+1 hot stand–by 1 antenna or 2 antennas versions as shown in Fig.62 and
Fig.63.
The transmitter switchover is controlled by Processor and the attenuation of the stand-by transmitter is
at least 50 dB.

MN.00224.E - 011

115

Reference tooth
O-ring
ODU side flange

ASN version

"N"

"BNC"

Ground bolt

AS version

Fig.59 - AS and ASN ODUs

116

MN.00224.E - 011

ASN version
Suncover (optional)

AS version

Fig.60 - Final 1+1 assembly with AS and ASN ODU

MN.00224.E - 011

117

Fig.61 - ODU block diagram

118

MN.00224.E - 011

PRx
meas.

BNC

N type
330
MHz

AGC

µP

140
MHz

REC
17.5
MHz

MOD
5.5
5.5
MHz MHz

17.5
MHz

Cable
interface

-48 V

Vdc

Vdc

DEM
17.5
MHz

388
kbit/s

ctrl

Alarm
manag
&
control

variable
bandwidth
(capacity
depending)

388
kbit/s

MUX
DEMUX

Cable
equaliz.

to RF circuitry

to IF circuitry

to radio controller

140
MHz

Alm
comm
loops
ctrl

Rx

IF LO
unit

Tx

IF Rx

ctrl

IF Tx

0 to 40 dB (ODU AS)
0 to 20 dB (ODU ASN)

PTx att.
control

T

AGC

µP

Rx LO

µP

Tx LO

MMIC

LNA

x

antenna
side

Tx side
SW control

Rx side
Antenna
side
Tx side
SW control

Rx side

Fig.62 - 1+1 hot stand–by 1 antenna

Tx side
SW control

First
antenna

Rx side

Tx side
SW control
Second
antenna
Rx side

Fig.63 - 1+1 hot stand–by 2 antennas

MN.00224.E - 011

119

Remote PRx
dBm

Local

Remote
Rx

Tx

Thresh High

PRx recording
level

PTx actuation
Thresh Low
µP

µP
PTx control
Transmission

Rx

Tx

of PTx control

Hop attenuation (dB)
Local PTx
dBm

PTx max.
40 dB (ODU AS)
20 dB (ODU ASN)
ATPC range
PTx min.

Hop attenuation (dB)

Fig.64 - ATPC operation

120

MN.00224.E - 011

Section 3.
INSTALLATION

11

INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSURING THE ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

11.1

GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION

The equipment is a split mount (indoor-outdoor) radio link system operating in the frequency ranges 4, 6,
7, 8, 13, 15, 18, 23, 25, 28 and 38 GHz, for low, medium and high transport capacity (from 4 up to 622
Mbit/s), designed to establish LAN-LAN connections and PDH/SDH access. For the details related to the
actual used frequency band refer to the label on the equipment.
The system is provided with an integral antenna; however, in case its antenna is not used, it should be
connected to an antenna conforming to the requirements of ETSI EN 302 217-4-2 for the relevant frequency band.
The equipment is composed by the following separate units:

radio unit (outdoor) with or without integral antenna

Baseband (indoor)

Warning: This equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.
Warning: Class 2 radio equipment subject to Authorisation of use. The equipment can operate only at the
frequencies authorised by the relevant National Authority.
Warning: The deployment and use of this equipment shall be made in agreement with the national regulation for the Protection from Exposure to Electromagnetic Field.
Warning: The symbol
indicates that, within the European Union, the product is subject to separate
collection at the product end-of-life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. For
more information, please contact the relevant supplier for verifying the procedure of correct disposal.

MN.00224.E - 011

121

11.2

GENERAL

The equipment consists of IDU and ODU(s) units and is mechanically made up of a wired 19” subrack (IDU)
and a weather proof metallic container (ODU). The two units are shipped together in an appropriate cardboard box.
After unpacking, mechanical installation takes place followed by electrical connections as described in the
following paragraphs.
The installation phases of the whole system are described in the following paragraphs and it must be done
only by service person suitably trained.

11.3

11.3.1

MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

IDU

On their sides the subracks making up the several IDU versions are provided with two holes for the M6
screws fastening the subracks to a rack or to a 19” mechanical structure. The front of the IDU mechanical
structure is provided with the holes at the sides. This permits to fasten the subrack to a 19” rack by means
of 4 M6 screws.

11.3.2

IDU installation

ALPlus2 - To avoid overtemperature problems the free space below and above an IDU must be 22 mm
(1/2RU) minimum.
ALCPlus2 - IDUs can be stacked.
ALCPlus2e - IDUs can be stacked.

11.4

ELECTRICAL WIRING

The electrical wiring must be done using appropriate cables thus assuring the equipment responds to the
electromagnetic compatibility standards.
The cable terminates to flying connectors which have to be connected to the corresponding connectors on
the equipment front.
Position and pin–out of the equipment connectors are available in this section.
Tab.15 shows the characteristics of the cables to be used and the flying connector types.

122

MN.00224.E - 011

Tab.15 - Characteristics of the cables
Interconnecting points
Battery

a.
b.

Type of connector terminating the
cable

Type of cable/conductor

Polarized SUB–D 3W3 female con- Section of each wire  2.5
nector
sq.mm a

Tributary signals

SCSI 50 pin male connector

8 conductor cable different
for 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm
signals

User input/alarm output

Female type D connector with 9
pins and shielded holder

9 conductor cable with
double brass sheath type
interconductor DB28.25 or
equivalent

LCT

USB B

Standard “printer” cable

b

NBUS

RJ45

F035998 - 0.3m superflex
F03597 - 0.5m
F03580 - 0.75m
F03581 - 1m
F03592 - 2.95m

STM1

Plug-in

Relevant to plug-in module

Optical LAN port

Plug-in

Relevant to plug-in module

Electrical LAN port

RJ45

Standard CAT5 cable

RS232

Female type D connector with 9
pins and shielded holder

9 conductor cable with
double brass sheath type
interconductor DB 28.10 or
equivalent

GND

Faston male type

Section area  6 sq. mm.

For power cable length longer than 20 m. a section of 4 mm is required.
Max length 2.5 m

MN.00224.E - 011

123

11.5

OPTICAL CONNECTORS

In case of necessity of optical connectors, please use the optical plug-in modules supplied by SIAE. Ask
SIAE Microelettronica for different modules.

11.6

CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS

During the final installation, the IDU must be protected by a magneto-thermal switch (not supplied with
the equipment), whose characteristics must comply with the laws in force in one's country.
The disconnection from the supply mains is made disconnecting the connector SUB-D 3W3 from the IDU.

11.7

11.7.1

IDU-ODU INTERCONNECTION CABLE

Electrical characteristics

-

Cable type

coaxial

-

Cable impedance

50 ohm

-

Insertion loss

24 dB at 330 MHz

-

Return loss (connectors included)

better than 22 dB (from 100 MHz to 400 MHz)

-

Max total DC resistance

4 Ohm

-

Shielding effectiveness

90 dB

11.7.2

Connectors

N-type male connectors on both sides.

11.7.3

Max length

With the 1/4” cable, the max length is 300m for all modulation profile.
With 1/8” cable, any length that respects max 24dB at 330 MHz and a Max total DC resistance of 4 Ohm.

11.7.4

Suggested cable

RG8 or 1/4” cable on any coaxial cable that respect the previous electrical characteristics.

124

MN.00224.E - 011

11.8

GROUNDING CONNECTION

Fig.65 and annexed legend show how to perform the grounding connections.

Indoor

3

4

3

4

ODU
unit
1

5

IDU
unit

7

(+) (-)

2

6

Station
ground

Local
ground

ground
rack

Legend
1. IDU grounding point, copper faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be ³ 4 sq.
mm. The Faston is available on the IDU both sides.
2. ODU grounding M6 bolt copper faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be ³ 16
sq. mm (V60052)
3. IDU–ODU interconnection cable type Celflex CUH 1/4” or RG8 cable terminated with N–type male
connectors at both sides.
4. Grounding kit type Cabel Metal or similar to connect the shield of interconnection cable.
5. Matching cable (tail) terminated with SMA male and N female connectors.
6. Battery grounding point of IDU to be connected to earth by means of a cable with a section area
2.5 sq. mm. Length  10 m.
7. Grounding cords connected to a real earth internal of station. The cross section area of the cable
must be  16 sq. mm
Fig.65 - Grounding connection

11.9

IDU-ODU CABLE GROUNDING KIT INSTALLATION

11.9.1

Grounding kit K09283F (for RG8 or 1/8” cable)

The kit is made up by:

grounding kit

sealant (in a small sachet)

a short tape (to define the part of the jacket to remove from the cable)

MN.00224.E - 011

125

a transparent plastic bag, with instructions printed over, which contains all the items.

In order to install the grounding kit, follow the instructions supplied with the kit itself and position the kit
in the proper points along the IDU-ODU cable (position and number of the points can vary depending on
local rules and/or customer request).
After grounding kit installation, it is necessary to seal it. Please, use two kinds of tape in the following order:

self amalgamating waterproof tape against water and moisture

black PVC tape against sun UV

Procedure for both tapes:

apply the first (of two) layer of sealing tape overlapping the IDU-ODU cable jacket by 3 cm on each
ends. The layer must cover 3cm of cable before the grounding clamp, the clamp itself and 3 cm
after the clamp.

every wrapping must overlap the previous.

The grounding bolt (opposite to the grounding clamp of the kit) must remain without sealing.

11.9.2

Grounding kit ICD00072F (for any cable with shield)

Fig.66
The kit is made up by:

a copper plate connected to a M8x20 grounding bolt

50 cm of tin copper tube of 3mm of diameter

30 cm of vinyl mastic self amalgamating waterproof tape

2 m of black PVC tape against sun UV.

In order to install the grounding kit, follow the instructions supplied with the kit itself and position the kit
in the proper points along the IDU-ODU cable (position and number of the points can vary depending on
local rules and/or customer request).
The installation procedure is the following:
1. remove 52mm of jacket from the cable that has to be grounded
2. insert one end of the tin copper tube of 3 mm of diameter in the relevant hole over the plate copper
bar of the grounding kit

126

MN.00224.E - 011

3. the grounding kit must be placed as Fig.67 (the plate copper bar must be higher point of the grounding kit)
4. put the plate copper bar over the shield of the cable and tie firmly the plate to the cable using the
tin copper tube. When the tin copper tube is over, wedge its end inside a notch of the plate in order
to fix it
5. apply two layers of vinyl mastic self amalgamating waterproof tape overlapping the IDU-ODU cable
jacket by 3 cm on each ends as in Fig.67. Every wrapping must overlap the previous.
6. Apply two layers of black PVC UV proof tape overlapping the waterproof tape layers as in Fig.67.
Every wrapping must overlap the previous.
7. Insert the grounding bolt in the closest grounding point.
The grounding bolt (opposite to the grounding clamp of the kit) must remain without sealing.

Fig.67 - Grounding kit positioning

11.10 SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION

Gas dischargers are present both in IDU and ODU.

Characteristics
-

DC spark-over voltage

-

Nominal impulse discharge current (wave 8/20 ms) 20kA

-

Single impulse discharge current (wave 8/20 ms)

25kA

-

Performances

in accordance to EN 301 489.

MN.00224.E - 011

150V ±20%

127

12

ALPLUS2 CONNECTORS

12.1

IDU FRONT PANEL

The front panel of the ALplus2 modular IDU is made up by the front panels of the modules LIM, RIM and
Controller. See Fig.68.

12.1.1

LIM connectors

Ethernet port 1 electrical, 10/100/1000BaseT

RJ45 (see Tab.16)

Ethernet port 1, 100/1000BaseX

SFP-LC

Ethernet port 2 electrical, 10/100/1000BaseT

RJ45 (see Tab.16)

Ethernet port 3, 100/1000BaseX

SFP-LC

Electrical port 1 and port 2 can be configured MDI or MDIX via WebLCT.

STM-1 1 in/out

SFP

STM-1 2 in/out

SFP

SFP can be I.1, S1.1, L1.1, L1.2, electrical coaxial 1.0/2.3

Trib 1-8, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm E1 in/out

50 pin SCSI female
(Tab.17 for 75Ohm and Tab.18
for 120Ohm)

Trib 9-16, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm E1 in/out

50 pin SCSI female
(Tab.17 for 75Ohm and Tab.18
for 120Ohm)

E1, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm interfaces are present in the same connector (different pins).

12.1.2

Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU

SMA (max tightening torque = 0.5 Nm)

-48 Vdc power supply

SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)

12.1.3

128

RIM connectors

Controller connectors

LCT, management

USB type B (receptable)

RS232, management

SUB-D male 9 pin (see Tab.19)

USER IN/OUT

SUB-D male 9 pin (see Tab.20)

MNGT/1, management

RJ45 (see Tab.21)

MN.00224.E - 011

MNGT/2, management

RJ45 (see Tab.21)

Port MNGT/1 and port MNGT/2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically.

CH1 service channel

not connected

CH2 service channel

RJ45 (see Tab.22)

2 Mbit/s wayside, 120 Ohm E1 in/out

RJ45 (see Tab.23)

12.2

IDU BODY CONNECTORS

Ground connection

6.3 mm male (Faston).

Ethernet
Port 2 Port 3 2xSTM-1

Port 1
1

2

ON

3

48V
PoE
FAIL

10-100-1000 BaseT/100-1000 BaseX

1

STM1

Trib: 1-8

2

RS232

USER IN/OUT

MNGT/1

Trib: 9-16

LINK IDU ODU
ACT

LINK
ACT
LCT

+

ACT
LINK

48V

REM TEST

MNGT/2

Management/
Management/
Configuration
Configuration
4 user IN
2 alarm OUT

-

WAY
SIDE
CH1

CH2

+

SPEED

Power
supply

IDU-ODU
cable

16E1

2Mb/s

-

ON/OFF

CH1, CH2 2 Mbit/s
service
wayside
channel
(CH1 not connected)

Fig.68 - IDU ALplus2 front panel

Tab.16 - 10/100/1000BaseT, RJ45
Pin RJ45

MN.00224.E - 011

Function
10/100BaseT

1000BaseT

1

Twisted pair IN_P

BI_DB+

2

Twisted pair IN_N

BI_DB-

3

Twisted pair OUT_P

BI_DA+

4

nc

BI_DD+

5

nc

BI_DD-

6

Twisted pair OUT_N

BI_DA-

7

nc

BI_DC+

8

nc

BI_DC-

129

Tab.17 - 8xE1, 50 pin SCSI female 75 Ohm
Pin

75 Ohm

48

Ground A

23

Tributary 1/9 input

50

Ground A

25

Tributary 1/9 output

47

Ground A

22

Tributary 2/10 input

45

Ground A

20

Tributary 2/10 output

42

Ground A

17

Tributary 3/11 input

43

Ground A

18

Tributary 3/11 output

40

Ground A

15

Tributary 4/12 input

39

Ground A

14

Tributary 4/12 output

36

Ground B

11

Tributary 5/13 input

37

Ground B

12

Tributary 5/13 output

34

Ground B

9

Tributary 6/14 input

33

Ground B

8

Tributary 6/14 output

29

Ground B

4

Tributary 7/15 input

31

Ground B

6

Tributary 7/15 output

28

Ground B

3

Tributary 8/16 input

26

Ground B

1

Tributary 8/16 output

Note: Join pin 44 with ground A pins, join pin 32 with ground B pins.
25

.........................

1

.........................

50

26

Fig.69 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female

130

MN.00224.E - 011

Tab.18 - 8xE1, 50 pin SCSI female 120 Ohm)

MN.00224.E - 011

Pin

120 Ohm

49

Tributary 1/9 input

23

Tributary 1/9 input

44

Ground A

24

Tributary 1/9 output

25

Tributary 1/9 output

44

Ground A

21

Tributary 2/10 input

22

Tributary 2/10 input

44

Ground A

46

Tributary 2/10 output

20

Tributary 2/10 output

44

Ground A

16

Tributary 3/11 input

17

Tributary 3/11 input

44

Ground A

19

Tributary 3/11 output

18

Tributary 3/11 output

44

Ground A

41

Tributary 4/12 input

15

Tributary 4/12 input

44

Ground A

13

Tributary 4/12 output

14

Tributary 4/12 output

44

Ground A

10

Tributary 5/13 input

11

Tributary 5/13 input

32

Ground B

38

Tributary 5/13 output

12

Tributary 5/13 output

32

Ground B

35

Tributary 6/14 input

9

Tributary 6/14 input

32

Ground B

7

Tributary 6/14 output

8

Tributary 6/14 output

32

Ground B

131

Pin

120 Ohm

5

Tributary 7/15 input

4

Tributary 7/15 input

32

Ground B

30

Tributary 7/15 output

6

Tributary 7/15 output

32

Ground B

27

Tributary 8/16 input

3

Tributary 8/16 input

32

Ground B

2

Tributary 8/16output

1

Tributary 8/16 output

32

Ground B

25

.........................

1

.........................

50

26

Fig.70 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female

Tab.19 - RS232 SUB-D 9 pin male

132

Pin

Description

1

DCD (IN)

2

RD (IN)

3

TD (OUT)

4

DTR (OUT)

5

GND

6

Not connected

7

RTS (OUT)

8

CTS (IN)

9

Not connected

MN.00224.E - 011

Tab.20 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT)
Pin

Description

1

C relay contact- branch 1

2

NA/NC relay contact - branch 1

3

C relay contact - branch 2

4

NA/NC relay contact - branch 2

5

User input 01

6

User input 02

7

User input 03

8

User input 04

9

Ground

Tab.21 - MNGT/1 and MNGT/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection (RJ45)
Pin

Description

1

Tx+

2

Tx-

3

Rx+

4

--

5

--

6

Rx-

7

--

8

--

Tab.22 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45)

MN.00224.E - 011

Pin

Description

1

D-V11-Tx

2

D+V11-Tx

3

C-V11-Tx

4

C+V11-Tx

5

D-V11-Rx

6

D+V11-Rx

7

C-V11-Rx

8

C+V11-Rx

133

Tab.23 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pin-out (RJ45)

134

Pin

Description

1

Tx-C (IN) common

2

TX-F (IN) 120 Ohm

3

GND

4

TX-F (IN) 75 Ohm

5

Rx-C (OUT) common

6

Rx-F (OUT) 120 Ohm

7

GND

8

Rx-F (OUT) 75 Ohm

MN.00224.E - 011

13

ALCPLUS2 CONNECTORS

13.1

IDU FRONT PANEL

The front panel of the ALCplus2 IDU is made up by various connectors depending on IDU version: in the
following type of connectors and relevant pin-out are listed. On the body of each IDU there is the ground
connection: 6.3mm male (Faston).

13.2

ALCPLUS2 1+0/1+1 (GAI0157/GAI0152)

In Fig.7 and Fig.8 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are available:

MNGT1, 2 management
Port MNGT 1, 2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically

RJ45 (Tab.21)

LAN port 1, 2, 3, 4 electrical 10/100/1000BaseT
Electrical port 1, 2, 3, 4 can be configured
MDI or MDIX via WebLCT

RJ45 (Tab.16)

LAN port 3, 4 100/1000BaseX

SFP-LC

Trib A, B

RJ45 (Tab.24)

LCT, management

USB type B (receptable)

USER IN/OUT

SUB-D male 9 pin (Tab.25)

Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU
1 connector 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1

SMA (max tightening torque = 0.5 Nm)

-48 Vdc power supply
1 connector in 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+11

SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)

Tab.24 - Trib A, B connector

1

PIN RJ45

Function

1

Rx-F (OUT) 120 Ohm

2

Rx-C (OUT) 120/75 Ohm common

3

GND

4

Tx-F (IN) 120 Ohm

5

Tx-C (IN) 120/75 Ohm common

6

Tx-F (IN) 75 Ohm

7

GND

8

Rx-F (OUT) 75 Ohm

In 1+1 the two power supply connectors are in parallel

MN.00224.E - 011

135

Tab.25 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT

13.3

PIN RJ45

Function

1

C relay contact

2

NO relay contact

3

User Input 01

4

User Input 02

5

Ground

6

Do not use

7

NC relay contact

8

Not connected

9

Do not use

ALCPLUS2 16E1 1+0/1+1 (GAI0155/GAI0156)

In Fig.9 and Fig.10 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are presents:

MNGT1, 2 management
Port MNGT 1, 2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically

RJ45 (Tab.21)

LAN port 1, 2, 3, 4 electrical 10/100/1000BaseT
Electrical port 1, 2, 3, 4 can be configured
DI or MDIX via WebLCT

RJ45 (Tab.16)

LAN port 3, 4 100/1000BaseX

SFP-LC

Trib A, B

RJ45 (Tab.24)

LCT, management

USB type B (receptable)

USER IN/OUT

SUB-D male 9 pin (Tab.25)

Trib 1/8, 9/16
E1, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm interfaces are present
in the same connectors (different pins)


13.4

50 pin SCSI female (Tab.17 for 75 Ohm
and Tab.18 for 120 Ohm)

Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU
1 connector 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1

SMA

-48 Vdc power supply
1 connector in 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1

SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)

1

ALCPLUS2 NODAL 1+0/1+1 (GAI0163/GAI0162)

In Fig.13 and Fig.14 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are present:

136

MNGT1, 2 management
Port MNGT 1, 2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically

RJ45 (Tab.21)

MN.00224.E - 011

LAN port 1, 2, 3, 4 electrical 10/100/1000BaseT
Electrical port 1, 2, 3, 4 can be configured
MDI or MDIX via WebLCT

RJ45 (Tab.16)

STM-1 1, 2 in/out
SFP can be I.1, S1.1, L1.1, L1.2, electrical coaxial 1.0/2.3 SFP

LAN port 3, 4 100/1000BaseX

SFP-LC

Trib A, B

RJ45 (Tab.24)

N-BUS 1, 2 connection among IDUs only
through SIAE cable

see Tab.15 for cable length and
SIAE code

LCT, management

USB type B (receptable)

USER IN/OUT

SUB-D male 9 pin (Tab.25)

Trib 1/8, 9/16
E1, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm interfaces are present
in the same connectors (different pins)
and Tab.18 for 120 Ohm)


13.5

50 pin SCSI female (Tab.17 for 75 Ohm

Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU
1 connector 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1

SMA

-48 Vdc power supply
1 connector in 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1

SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)

1

ALCPLUS2 32E1 1+0/1+1 (GAI0169/GAI0168)

In Fig.11 and Fig.12 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are present:

MNGT1, 2 management
Port MNGT 1, 2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically

RJ45 (Tab.21)

LAN port 1, 2, 3, 4 electrical 10/100/1000BaseT
Electrical port 1, 2, 3, 4 can be configured
MDI or MDIX via WebLCT

RJ45 (Tab.16)

STM-1 1, 2 in/out
SFP can be I.1, S1.1, L1.1, L1.2, electrical coaxial 1.0/2.3

SFP

LAN port 3, 4 100/1000BaseX

SFP-LC

Trib A, B

RJ45 (Tab.24)

N-BUS 1, 2 connection among IDUs only
through SIAE cable

see Tab.15 for cable length and
SIAE code

LCT, management

USB type B (receptable)

USER IN/OUT

SUB-D male 9 pin (Tab.25)

Trib 1/8, 25/32
E1, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm interfaces are present
in the same connectors (different pins)


50 pin SCSI female (Tab.17 for
75 Ohm and Tab.18 for 120 Ohm)

Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU
1 connector 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1

SMA

-48 Vdc power supply
1 connector in 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1

SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)

MN.00224.E - 011

1

137

14

ALCPLUS2E CONNECTORS

14.1

IDU FRONT PANEL

The front panel of the ALCplus2e IDU is made up by various connectors depending on IDU version: in the
following type of connectors and relevant pin-out are listed. On the body of each IDU there is the ground
connection: 6.3mm male (Faston).

14.2

ALCPLUS2E 1+0 (GAI0178), 2+0/1+1 (GAI0175), 2+0/XPIC
(GAI0172)

In Fig.7 and Fig.8 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are available:

MNGT1, 2 management
Port MNGT 1, 2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically

RJ45 (Tab.21)

LAN port 1, 2, 3, 4 electrical 10/100/1000BaseT
Electrical port 1, 2, 3, 4 can be configured
MDI or MDIX via WebLCT

RJ45 (Tab.16)

LAN port 3, 4 100/1000BaseX

SFP-LC

Trib A, B

RJ45 (Tab.24)

LCT, management

USB type B (receptable)

USER IN/OUT

SUB-D male 9 pin (Tab.25)

Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU
1 connector 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1/2+0

SMA (max tightening torque = 0.5 Nm)

-48 Vdc power supply
1 connector in 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+12

SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)

Tab.26 - Trib A, B connector

2

138

PIN RJ45

Function

1

Rx-F (OUT) 120 Ohm

2

Rx-C (OUT) 120/75 Ohm common

3

GND

4

Tx-F (IN) 120 Ohm

5

Tx-C (IN) 120/75 Ohm common

6

Tx-F (IN) 75 Ohm

7

GND

8

Rx-F (OUT) 75 Ohm

In 1+1 the two power supply connectors are in parallel

MN.00224.E - 011

Tab.27 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT

14.3

PIN RJ45

Function

1

C relay contact

2

NO relay contact

3

User Input 01

4

User Input 02

5

Ground

6

Do not use

7

NC relay contact

8

Not connected

9

Do not use

ALCPLUS2E 18E1 2XSTM1 NODAL (GAI0176), 2+0/1+1
(GAI0173), 2+0/XPIC (GAI0170)

In Fig.13 and Fig.14 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are present:

MNGT1, 2 management
Port MNGT 1, 2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically

RJ45 (Tab.21)

LAN port 1, 2, 3, 4 electrical 10/100/1000BaseT
Electrical port 1, 2, 3, 4 can be configured
MDI or MDIX via WebLCT

RJ45 (Tab.16)

STM-1 1, 2 in/out
SFP can be I.1, S1.1, L1.1, L1.2, electrical coaxial 1.0/2.3 SFP

LAN port 3, 4 100/1000BaseX

SFP-LC

Trib A, B

RJ45 (Tab.24)

N-BUS 1, 2 connection among IDUs only
through SIAE cable

see Tab.15 for cable length and
SIAE code

LCT, management

USB type B (receptable)

USER IN/OUT

SUB-D male 9 pin (Tab.25)

Trib 1/8, 9/16
E1, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm interfaces are present
in the same connectors (different pins)
and Tab.18 for 120 Ohm)


50 pin SCSI female (Tab.17 for 75 Ohm

Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU
1 connector 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1

SMA

-48 Vdc power supply
1 connector in 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1

SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)

MN.00224.E - 011

1

139

14.4

ALCPLUS2E 34E1 2XSTM1 1+0 (GAI0177), 2+0/1+1
(GAI0174), 2+0/XPIC (GAI 0171)

In Fig.11 and Fig.12 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are present:

MNGT1, 2 management
Port MNGT 1, 2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically

RJ45 (Tab.21)

LAN port 1, 2, 3, 4 electrical 10/100/1000BaseT
Electrical port 1, 2, 3, 4 can be configured
MDI or MDIX via WebLCT

RJ45 (Tab.16)

STM-1 1, 2 in/out
SFP can be I.1, S1.1, L1.1, L1.2, electrical coaxial 1.0/2.3

SFP

LAN port 3, 4 100/1000BaseX

SFP-LC

Trib A, B

RJ45 (Tab.24)

N-BUS 1, 2 connection among IDUs only
through SIAE cable

LCT, management

USB type B (receptable)

USER IN/OUT

SUB-D male 9 pin (Tab.25)

Trib 1/8, 25/32
E1, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm interfaces are present
in the same connectors (different pins)


140

see Tab.15 for cable length and
SIAE code

50 pin SCSI female (Tab.17 for
75 Ohm and Tab.18 for 120 Ohm)

Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU
1 connector 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1

SMA

-48 Vdc power supply
1 connector in 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1

SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)

1

MN.00224.E - 011

15

INSTALLATION NOTE ON FREQUENCY REUSE
SYSTEMS (XPIC)

15.1

FREQUENCY REUSE

The ALS with frequency reuse is double carrier systems with one carrier on vertical path and one carrier
on horizontal path. One carrier can have a radio frame up to 341 Mbit/s for a total of 682 Mbit/s.
For frequency reuse systems to assume the achievement of guaranteed performances of XPIC functionalities some cares shall be taken for IDU-ODU cabling. ALS XPIC systems use IDU ALCplus2e; ODU can be
AS version or ASN version in accordance with necessity.

15.2

CHARACTERISTICS

15.2.1

Antennas

Antennas will be double polarization type.

15.2.2

RF channel

RF channel shall be the same for vertical polarization path and horizontal polarization path.

15.2.3

ATPC

Low ATPC level shall be 15 dB higher than BER 10-6 threshold.

15.2.4

IDU-ODU cable

The IDU-ODU cable length difference shall be:

cable from RT1A to IDU-ODU SMA connector 1 and cable from RT1B to IDU-ODU SMA connector 2
shall have the same length with the following tolerance:
-

6 m for 14 MHz bandwidth systems

-

3 m for 28 MHz bandwidth systems

-

1.5 m for 56 MHz bandwidth systems

MN.00224.E - 011

141

16

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA

16.1

INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:

1+0 version
-

antisliding strip (see Fig.71)

-

supporting plate plus 60–114 mm pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.72)

-

adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.73)

-

Band-it fixing system (see Fig.76)

-

antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.74)

-

support with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.72)

-

connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional)
(see Fig.74)

-

kit for ground connection making part of ODU

1+0 version (6 GHz only)
Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32409) must be used (see Fig.82). The
flange is UDR70.

1+1 version
-

antisliding strip (see Fig.71)

-

supporting plate plus pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.72)

-

adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.73)

-

hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.75)

-

flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional) (see Fig.74)

-

kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.

1+1 version (6 GHz only)
Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32415) must be used (see Fig.83). The
flange is UDR70.

Warning: in order to avoid damages to flexible waveguides, don’t fold or twist them more than values specified as limit in installation instructions of the waveguide supplier.

In case of flexible wave guide use, Tab.30 shows the maximum bending radius.

142

MN.00224.E - 011

16.2

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

N.2 13mm torque wrench

N.1 15 mm torque wrench

N.1 17 mm torque wrench

N.1 3 mm Allen wrench

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

16.3

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:
3

Version 1+0: installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

Version 1+0: installation onto the pole of the support plate by Band-it

Version 1+1: installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

Installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version)

ODU grounding

3

1+0 version – Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate
Fig.71 – Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position
of the supporting plate (see next step)
Fig.72 – Adhere the supporting plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole
through the fixing bracket for 60–114 mm pole (see Fig.72). Bolts and nuts are available on the supporting
plate. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm.
Warning: As shown in Fig.73 an adapting kit must be used for the 219 mm pole. It consists of an additional

plate to enlarge the standard supporting plate dimension and relevant U–bolt for 219 mm pole fixing.
Fig.74 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:
Tab.28 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies

Screw

Tool

Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz

Allen screw M3

Allen key 2.5 mm

1 Nm

up to 15 GHz

Allen screw M4

Allen key 3 mm

2 Nm

Fig.74 – Fix the antenna side flange to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be
mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.74) or vertically as function of convenience.
Fig.75 – Fix the support with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate making use of available
bolts and nuts. Fig.75 shows the possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.

3

In case of 219 mm pole, an adapting kit is supplied for the purpose.

MN.00224.E - 011

143

1+0 version – Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate by Band-it
In case of 1+0 ODU installation, a Band-it pole mounting kit can be used: through slots (see Fig.76) on
the supporting plate two metallic bands secure the plate on the pole. Band characteristics are:

thickness

0.76 mm

width

19 mm.

It is also possible to use the anti-sliding system (optional).

1+1 version – Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate
Fig.71 – Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position
of the supporting plate (see next step)
Fig.72 – Position the supporting plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole
through the fixing bracket for 60–114 mm pole (see Fig.72). Bolts and nuts are available on the supporting
plate kit. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm.
Fig.77 – Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate using bolt and nuts
available on the support plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides.

Fig.77 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:
Tab.29 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies

Screw

Tool

Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz

Allen screw M3

Allen key 2.5 mm

1 Nm

up to 15 GHz

Allen screw M4

Allen key 3 mm

2 Nm

Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange
as shown in Fig.80. This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.

Installation of the ODU
1. Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4
to the O–ring of Fig.79.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange.
2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side.
3. Position the ODU body close to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side
flange (see Fig.79) to antenna side flange (see Fig.74 – 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see
Fig.77 – 1+1 version).
Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.78 depending on the polarisation.
4. With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise and then insert
the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth on the support
(see Fig.74 – 1+0 version or Fig.77 – 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail Fig.79)
5. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until “clack” is heard and the ODU rotation stops.
6. Secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig.74 – 1+0 version or Fig.77 – 1+1
version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm.
Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.80. A parasol mounting is optionally possible.

144

MN.00224.E - 011

16.4

GROUNDING

The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.81.
Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm.

Tab.30 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Frequency

Bending radius with- Bending radius with- Bending radius with Bending radius with
out rebending
out rebending
rebending
rebending
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
E-plane a
H-plane b
E-plane a.
H-plane b.

6 GHz or 7 GHz
low

200 (7,9)

500 (19,8)

300 (11,9)

600 (23,7)

7 GHz high

200 (7,9)

500 (19,8)

250 (9,9)

600 (23,7)

11 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

13 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

15 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

18 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

23 GHz

110 (4,3)

230 (9,1)

130 (5,1)

250 (9,9)

38 GHz

80 (3,1)

140 (5,5)

90 (3,6)

150 (5,9)

a.

Bending E-plane

Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)
b.

Bending H-plane

Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)

MN.00224.E - 011

145

Plastic blocks

Antisliding strip

Fig.71 - Antisliding strip

146

MN.00224.E - 011

Use 17 mm wrench
(32Nm torque)

Supporting plate
Use 15 mm wrench
(32Nm torque)

Fig.72 - 60–114 mm pole supporting plate fixing

MN.00224.E - 011

147

Fig.73 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole

148

MN.00224.E - 011

In option

Antenna side flange

Support with ODU fast
lockinh mechanism

Reference tooth
Reference tooth

1
1

Position of antenna
side flange

1. 13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque
Fig.74 - Mounting position

MN.00224.E - 011

149

A

Adapting kit for 219 mm pole

B

C

Fig.75 - Possible positions of the support with ODU fast locking mechanism

150

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.76 - Band-it pole mounting kit

MN.00224.E - 011

151

Use 13 mm wrench
(18 Nm torque)

Hybrid with ODU fast
locking mechanism

Reference tooth

Reference tooth

Optional vawe
guide
1

1

RT1

RT2

Fig.77 - Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

152

MN.00224.E - 011

Vertical

Horizontal

Fig.78 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side.

MN.00224.E - 011

153

Reference tooth
O-ring
ODU side flange

ASN version

"N"

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm
"BNC"

Ground bolt

AS version

Fig.79 - ODU body reference tooth

154

MN.00224.E - 011

ASN version
Suncover (optional)

AS version

Fig.80 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version

MN.00224.E - 011

155

1
2
3
4
5

ASN version

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

AS version

Fig.81 - ODU grounding

156

MN.00224.E - 011

Spring

Washer
Screw M5x25
UDR70 antenna flange

Screw M4x8

Fig.82 - Kit V32409

MN.00224.E - 011

157

UDR70 flange

Screw M4x18
Spring
Washer
O-Ring

Hybrid 6 GHz
(balanced or
unbalanced)

Fig.83 - Kit V32415

158

MN.00224.E - 011

17

INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU
WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA

17.1

INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:

1+0 version
-

wall supporting plate with additional contact surface extension plates (see Fig.84)

-

antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.85)

-

support with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.85)

-

connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional)
(see Fig.85)

-

kit for ground connection making part of ODU

1+0 version (6 GHz only)
Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32409) must be used (see Fig.92). The
flange is UDR70.

1+1 version
-

supporting plate with additional contact surface extension tools (see Fig.84)

-

hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.87)

-

connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional)
(see Fig.85)

-

kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.

1+1 version (6 GHz only)
Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32415) must be used (see Fig.93). The
flange is UDR70.

In case of flexible wave guide use, Tab.33 shows the maximum bending radius.

17.2

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

N.2 13mm torque wrench

N.1 15 mm torque wrench

N.1 17 mm torque wrench

N.1 3 mm allen wrench.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

MN.00224.E - 011

159

17.3

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:

version 1+0: installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

version 1+1: installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version)

ODU grounding.

1+0 version – Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate
Fig.84 – Fix on the supporting plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall contact surface.
Fig.84 – Secure the supporting plate on the wall using the more suitable screws.
Use the expansion plug suitable to the wall. Test the installed bracket with a load of 50kg. No deformation
should be noted.
Fig.85 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:
Tab.31 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies

Screw

Tool

Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz

Allen screw M3

Allen key 2.5 mm

1 Nm

up to 15 GHz

Allen screw M4

Allen key 3 mm

2 Nm

Fig.85 – Fix the antenna side flange to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be
mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.85) or vertically as function of convenience.
Fig.86 – Fix the support with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate making use of available
bolts and nuts. Fig.86 shows three possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.

1+1 version – Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate
Fig.84 – Fix on the supporting plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall contact surface.
Fig.84 – Secure the supporting plate on the wall using the more suitable screws.
Warning: Use the expansion plug suitable to the wall. Test the installed bracket with a load of 50kg. No
deformation should be noted.

Fig.87 – Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate using bolt and nuts
available on the support plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides.

Fig.87 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:
Tab.32 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies

Screw

Tool

Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz

Allen screw M3

Allen key 2.5 mm

1 Nm

up to 15 GHz

Allen screw M4

Allen key 3 mm

2 Nm

Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange
as shown in Fig.90 This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.

160

MN.00224.E - 011

Installation of the ODU
1. Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4
to the O–ring of Fig.89.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange.
2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side.
3. Position the ODU body close to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side
flange (see Fig.89) to antenna side flange (see Fig.85 – 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see
Fig.87 – 1+1 version).
Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.88 depending on the polarisation.

4. With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise and then insert
the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth on the support
(see Fig.85 – 1+0 version or Fig.87 – 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail Fig.89)
5. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until “clack” is heard and the ODU rotation stops.
6. Secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig.85 – 1+0 version or Fig.87 – 1+1
version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm.
Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.90. A parasol mounting is optionally possible.

MN.00224.E - 011

161

17.4

GROUNDING

The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.91.
Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm.

Tab.33 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Frequency

Bending radius with- Bending radius with- Bending radius with Bending radius with
out rebending
out rebending
rebending
rebending
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
E-plane a
H-plane b
E-plane a.
H-plane b.

6 GHz or 7 GHz
low

200 (7,9)

500 (19,8)

300 (11,9)

600 (23,7)

7 GHz high

200 (7,9)

500 (19,8)

250 (9,9)

600 (23,7)

11 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

13 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

15 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

18 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

23 GHz

110 (4,3)

230 (9,1)

130 (5,1)

250 (9,9)

38 GHz

80 (3,1)

140 (5,5)

90 (3,6)

150 (5,9)

a.

Bending E-plane

Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)
b.

Bending H-plane

Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)

162

MN.00224.E - 011

Extension plate

Supporting plate

M8 bolt and nut

Another possible fixation

Fig.84 - Wall supporting plate

MN.00224.E - 011

163

In option

Antenna side flange

Support with ODU fast
locking mechanism

Reference tooth
Reference tooth

1
1
13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque

Position of antenna
side flange

Fig.85 - Support with ODU fast locking mechanism

164

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.86 - Mounting possible positions

MN.00224.E - 011

165

Use 13 mm wrench
(18 Nm torque)

Hybrid with ODU fast
locking mechanism

Reference tooth

Reference tooth

Optional wave
guide

1

1

RT1

RT2

Fig.87 - Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

166

MN.00224.E - 011

Vertical

Horizontal

Fig.88 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side.

MN.00224.E - 011

167

Reference tooth

O-ring
ODU side flange

ASN version

"N"

"BNC"

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm
Ground bolt

AS version

Fig.89 - ODU body reference tooth

168

MN.00224.E - 011

Suncover (optional)

ASN version

AS version

Fig.90 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version

MN.00224.E - 011

169

1
2
3
4
5

ASN version

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

AS version

1. Bolt
2. Spring washer
3. Flat washer
4. Earth cable collar
5. Flat washer
Fig.91 - ODU grounding

170

MN.00224.E - 011

Spring

Washer
Screw M5x25

UDR70 antenna flange

Screw M4x8

Fig.92 - Kit V32409

MN.00224.E - 011

171

UDR70 flange

Screw M4x18
Spring
Washer
O-Ring

Hybrid 6 GHz
(balanced or
unbalanced)

Fig.93 - Kit V32415

172

MN.00224.E - 011

18

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA

18.1

FOREWORD

The installation onto the pole of the ODU with integrated antenna concerns both 1+0 and 1+1 versions.

18.2

INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:

1+0 version

60 to 114 mm pole mounting kit consisting of:
-

centring ring and relevant screws (see Fig.94)

-

antislide strip (see Fig.95)

-

pole support system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.96)

-

ODU with O–ring and devices for ground connection

1+1 version

pole mounting kit from 60 to 114 mm for 1+1 consisting of:
-

centring ring and relevant screws (see Fig.94)

-

antislide strip (see Fig.95)

-

pole support system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.96)

hybrid mechanical body (see Fig.105)

polarization twist disk (see Fig.107)

2 ODUs with O–rings and devices for ground connection.

MN.00224.E - 011

173

18.3

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

N.2 13 mm torque wrench

N.1 15 mm torque wrench

N.1 17 mm torque wrench

N.1 3 mm allen wrench.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

18.4

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure proceeds according with the following steps:

1+0 version
1. installation onto the pole of the support system
2. installation of the antenna
3. installation of ODU
4. antenna aiming
5. ODU grounding

1+1 version
1. installation onto the pole of the support system
2. installation of the antenna
3. installation of hybrid circuit
4. installation of the two ODUs
5. antenna aiming
6. ODU grounding.

18.4.1

Installation onto the pole of the support system and the antenna

Fig.94 – Set the antenna in such a position as to be able to operate on its rear side. Locate the five threaded
holes around antenna flange. Mount centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with 3 calibrated bolts.
Caution: centring ring should be mounted so that the screws do not stick out.
Define if the antenna will be mounted with vertical or horizontal polarization. Check that free drain holes
stay at bottom side. Mount bolt type M10x30, in position A leaving it loose of 2 cm approx. With horizontal
polarization mount bolt type M10x30 in position D, leaving it loose of 2 cm approx.
Fig.95 – Mount antislide strip onto the pole. Place blocks as in Fig.95 following antenna aiming direction.
Tighten the strip with screwdriver.
Fig.96 – Mount pole supporting system with relevant pole fixing brackets following antenna aiming direction as indicated by arrow. Antislide strip should result at the centre of supporting plate. Supporting system

174

MN.00224.E - 011

should lean against antislide clamp with the tooth as in Fig.97. Position the antenna in such a way that bolt
in position A or D of Fig.94 cross through hole E of Fig.98. Secure the support system to the pole by means
of the pole fixing brackets and relevant fixing bolts.
Fig.99 – Rotate the antenna body until the remainder three antenna holes coincide with the three support
holes. Secure the antenna to the support by tightening the relevant passing through bolts.

18.4.2

Installation of ODU

1+0 version
1. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O–ring (4) of Fig.102 by protecting finger
hands with gloves.
2.

Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The ODU handle
can assume position of Fig.100 depending on the polarization.

3. Position the ODU body near the support system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange
(see Fig.101). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise
and then insert the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth
on the support (see Fig.101) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.102).
4. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until “clack” is heard and the ODU rotation stops.
Fig.103 and Fig.104 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respectively.
5. Secure ODU body on the support system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.101.

1+1 version
Fig.105 – Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to O–rings (1). Insert O–rings (1) and (6) into
twist polarization disk (2).
Vertical polarization
Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing marker (4), on disk, close to V mark.
Horizontal polarization
Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing reference (4), on disk, close to H mark.
In 13 GHz and 15 GHz ODUs the polarization disk is fixed to the hybrid flange by means of 3 screws as
shown in Fig.106.
Caution: Twist disk has two planes. Take care of position marker (4) on twist disk. The position of marker

(4) plane should be in contact to hybrid like in figure. Tighten progressively and alternatively screws (7)
with the same number of spring washers (8) with the following torque:
Tab.34 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies

Screw

Tool

Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz

Allen screw M3

Allen key 2.5 mm

1 Nm

up to 15 GHz

Allen screw M4

Allen key 3 mm

2 Nm

Fig.107 – Fix hybrid to support system with four bolts (1) taking care of RT1/RT2 position shown by labels
of Fig.107. Tighten progressively and alternatively four bolts (1).

MN.00224.E - 011

175

18.4.3

ODU installation

The installation procedure of the two ODUs is the same.
1. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O–ring (4) of the Fig.102 by protecting finger
hands with gloves.
2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. For 1+0 the
ODU can assume position of Fig.100 depending on the polarisation. For 1+1 the handle ODU position is always placed at the right side (horizontal polarization).
3. Position the ODU body near the support system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange
(see Fig.101). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise
and then insert the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth
on the support (see Fig.101) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.102).
4. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until “clack” is heard and the ODU rotation stops.
Fig.103 and Fig.104 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respectively for 1+0 version.
Fig.108 shows ODU housing final position for 1+1 version.
5. Secure ODU body on the support system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.101.

18.5

ANTENNA AIMING

Antenna aiming for 1+0 version and 1+1 version is the same. The antenna aiming devices allow to perform
the following adjustments with respect to the starting aiming position:
-

Horizontal

± 15° operating on the nut (3) shown in Fig.109, only after having loosen
the nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.110.

-

vertical

± 15° operating on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) shown in Fig.109
only after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.110 and (4) and (5) of
Fig.109.
For adjustment from 0° to +30° extract nut (1) Fig.110 and position it in
hole (4), extract nut (2) Fig.110 and position it in hole (6). Operate on
vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of
Fig.110 and (4) of Fig.109.
For adjustment from 0° to –30° extract nut (1) of Fig.110 and position it in
hole (3), extract nut (2) of Fig.110 and position it in hole (5). Operate on
vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of
Fig.110 and (4) of Fig.109.
For vertical adjustment some markers, every 10°, are available on support.
The bigger marker gives 0° starting aiming position. Once the optimum aiming
position is obtained, tighten firmly the four nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.110 and
(4) and (5) of Fig.109 for vertical adjustment and the four nuts (7), (8), (9),
(10) of Fig.110 for horizontal adjustment. Tighten with 15 mm wrench and
32 Nm torque.

18.6

COMPATIBILITY

The pole installation kit of the ODU unit in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration is compatible with integrated antenna
complying with SIAE standard with measures 0.2 m, 0.4 m, 0.6 m, 0.8 m of diameter.

176

MN.00224.E - 011

18.7

GROUNDING

See Fig.111.
On ODU grounding can be connected with the available bolt spring washer and flat washers as shown. Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm.

A

D

D

C

B

C

A

B

Vertical polarization

horizontal polarization

3 mm allen key
2,5 Nm torque

2
3

A
C

1

B

1. Antenna
2. Calibrated Allen screw
3. Centring ring
Fig.94 - Centring ring position

MN.00224.E - 011

177

2

1

1. Steel belt
2. Plastic blocks
Fig.95 - Antislide strip

178

MN.00224.E - 011

1

2
Antenna aiming direction

3

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

3

3

1
3

3

3
1. Pole fixing brackets
2. Tooth
3. Bolt
4. Pole support system
Fig.96 - Support mount on pole

MN.00224.E - 011

179

Antenna aiming direction

1

1. Tooth
Fig.97 - Supporting system position

E

Fig.98 - Hole E

180

MN.00224.E - 011

B

A

C

D
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

A, B, C, D Bolt slots
Fig.99 - Antenna installation on pole support

Vertical

Horizontal

Fig.100 -Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.

MN.00224.E - 011

181

1

13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque

H
H

H
H
1
1
H
H

H
H

1

H: Reference tooth
Fig.101 - Support system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence

182

MN.00224.E - 011

Reference tooth

O-ring
ODU side flange

ASN version

"N"

"BNC"

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

Ground bolt

AS version

Fig.102 - ODU body reference tooth

MN.00224.E - 011

183

5
30

Fig.103 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization

5
30

5
30

Fig.104 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization

184

MN.00224.E - 011

7
8
1
2
4

6

5

3

1. O–ring
2. Polarization twist disk
3. Hybrid mechanical body
4. Position marker of twist disk
5. Reference label for twist disk
6. O–ring
7. Allen screws
8. Spring washer
Fig.105 - Hybrid and polarization disk

MN.00224.E - 011

185

Horizontal polarization

Vertical polarization

Fig.106 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13GHz and 15 GHz)

186

MN.00224.E - 011

1
RT1
2
1
RT2
13 mm wrench
18 Nm torque
1. Bolts
2. Spring washer
Fig.107 - Hybrid mount on pole support

MN.00224.E - 011

187

ASN version

AS version

Fig.108 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version

188

MN.00224.E - 011

3

4
5

2

1

1. Marker
2. Vertical adjustment
3. Horizontal adjustment
4. Bolt
5. Fixing nut
Fig.109 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments

MN.00224.E - 011

189

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

4

11

7

1

3

8

10
9
5

6

2

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

1., 2., 3., 4. Horizontal aiming block bolts
5., 6., 7. Vertical aiming block bolts
8., 11. Threaded hole for vertical aiming up to –30°
9., 10. Threaded hole for vertical aiming up to +30°
Fig.110 - Antenna aiming block

190

MN.00224.E - 011

1
2
3
4
5

ASN version

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

AS version

1. Bolt
2. Spring washer
3. Flat washer
4. Earth cable collar
5. Flat washer
Fig.111 - ODU grounding

MN.00224.E - 011

191

19

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307,
V32308, V32309)

19.1

FOREWORD

The description concerns pole mounting of ODU, in 1+0 and 1+1 version, using following installation kits:
-

V32307

for ODU with frequency from 10 to 13 GHz

-

V32308

for ODU with frequency from 15 to 38 GHz

-

V32309

for ODU with frequency from 7 to 8 GHz

Differences regard the dimensions and the presence of the centring ring (see Fig.112):
-

V32307

centring ring for antenna flange from 10 to 13 GHz

-

V32308

centring ring for antenna flange from 15 to 38 GHz

-

V32309

no centring ring (and relevant screws).

19.2

INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions.

1+0 version

60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:
-

centring ring and relevant screws

-

pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets

-

1+0 ODU support and relevant screws

-

ODU with O–ring and devices for ground connection

1+1 version

192

60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:
-

centring ring and relevant screws

-

pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets

-

1+0 ODU support

-

hybrid and relevant screws

-

polarization twist disk and relevant screws

-

2 ODUs with O–rings and devices for ground connection.

MN.00224.E - 011

19.3

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench

N.1 3 mm Allen wrench

N.1 6 mm Allen wrench

N.1 13 mm spanner

N.2 17 mm spanner.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

19.4

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure is listed below:

1+0 version
1. antenna polarization
2. installation of the centring ring on the antenna
3. installation of 1+0 ODU support
4. installation onto the pole of the assembled structure
5. installation of ODU
6. antenna aiming
7. ODU grounding

1+1 version
1. antenna polarization
2. installation of the centring ring on the antenna
3. installation of 1+0 ODU support
4. installation onto the pole of the assembled structure
5. installation of hybrid
6. installation of ODUs
7. antenna aiming
8. ODU grounding.

MN.00224.E - 011

193

19.5

19.5.1

1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES

Setting antenna polarization

Fig.112 – Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the four M3 Allen screws
around the antenna flange. Unscrew them (use 2.5 mm Allen wrench) and position the antenna flange according on: horizontal wave guide –> vertical polarization, vertical wave guide –> horizontal polarization. Screw again the four Allen screws (torque = 1 Nm).

19.5.2

Installation of the centring ring on the antenna

Fig.112 – Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the three holes around the
antenna flange. Mount the centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use
3mm Allen wrench, torque 2 = Nm).

19.5.3

Installation of 1+0 ODU support

Fig.112 – Mount the support onto assembled structure (pole support system plus antenna) using the four
M8 Allen screws (use 6 mm Allen wrench, torque 18 = Nm). Two of the four screws, diagonally opposed,
must be mounted with the two bushes around.

19.5.4

Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

Fig.112 – Mount the assembled structure on the pole using the two pole fixing brackets and the four M10
screws (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 13 Nm); the heads of the screws are inserted on the antenna side,
the four nuts and the springs between nut and brackets are inserted on bracket side.

19.5.5

Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)

Fig.113 – Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 on the O–ring by protecting fingers with gloves.
Fig.114 – Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the Wave guide of the antenna: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter–clockwise into the support and search
for matching between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.115) and reference tooth on the ODU body.
Fig.116 – When alignment of the references teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until rotation
is stopped. In figure are shown ODU final position for both polarizations.
Fig.115 – When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 13mm
spanner, torque = 6Nm).

194

MN.00224.E - 011

19.5.6

Antenna aiming

Antenna aiming procedure for 1+0 version or 1+1 version is the same.
Horizontal aiming: ±5° operating on the 17 mm nut shown in Fig.117 with a 17 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the two 17 mm nut on the pivot.
Vertical aiming: ±20° operating on the 13 mm nut shown in Fig.117 with a 13 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the three 13 mm nut on the pole support.
Once optimum position is obtained, tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.

19.5.7

ODU grounding

ODU grounding is achieved with:

M8 screw without washers

M6 screw with washer

as shown in Fig.118.

19.6

1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES

In further page are explained all the mounting step not already discussed in paragraph “19.5 1+0
MOUNTING PROCEDURES”.

19.6.1

Installation of Hybrid

Fig.119 – The polarization disk must be always fixed on hybrid flange. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow
Corning 4 on the O–rings by protecting fingers with gloves. Bring the polarization twist disk with the position marker down. Insert the O–ring into polarization twist disk.
Vertical polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards V mark.
Horizontal polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards H mark.
In 13 GHz and 15 GHz ODUs the polarization disk is fixed to the hybrid flange by means of 3 screws as
shown in Fig.120.
Tighten progressively and alternatively the screws and the spring washer with following torque:
Tab.35 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies

Screw

Tool

Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz

Allen screw M3

Allen key 2.5 mm

1 Nm

up to 15 GHz

Allen screw M4

Allen key 3 mm

2 Nm

Fig.121 – Fix hybrid body to 1+0 support with four M8 bolts (use 13 mm spanner, torque = 18 Nm), tighten
progressively and alternatively the bolts.

MN.00224.E - 011

195

19.6.2

Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version)

For both ODUs.
Fig.113 – Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O–ring by protecting fingers with gloves.
Fig.114 – Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the wave guide of the hybrid: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter–clockwise and then insert the ODU body
into the support. For 1+1 system the handle of the ODU is always positioned on the right. The polarization
twist disk on the hybrid matches the antenna polarization.
Fig.122 – When alignment of the reference teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until the rotation stops. In figure are shown ODUs final position.
Fig.115 – When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 17 mm
spanner, torque = 6 Nm).
Warning: Internal codes (e.g. installation items, antennas, PCB) are here reported only as example. The

Manufacturer reserves the right to change them without any previous advice.

Four 13mm
screws
Centring ring
(not present in V32309)

Three 3mm Allen screws
(not present in V32309)

Antenna

1+0 support
Two bushes

Fig.112 - 1+0 pole mounting

196

MN.00224.E - 011

Reference tooth
O-ring
ODU wave guide

"N"
"BNC"

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

Ground bolt

Fig.113 - ODU body reference tooth

Vertical

Horizontal

Fig.114 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.

MN.00224.E - 011

197

3
1
2

1
5
4

4
1
5

1
2
3
1. 6 mm Allen screw
2. Bush (diagonally placed)
3. 17 mm Tightening bolts (max torque = 6 Nm)
4. Reference point for horizontal polarization
5. Reference point for vertical polarization
Fig.115 - 1+0 support

198

MN.00224.E - 011

1+0 ODU HP with handle on the right:
horizontal polarization

1+0 ODU standard with handle on the left:
vertical polarization

Fig.116 - ODU housing final position for both polarization

MN.00224.E - 011

199

Horizontal aiming:
two 17mm block screws

Vertical aiming:
13mm block screws
Pole support

17mm nut for horizontal
adjustment of antenna

Internal 5mm Allen
screw for vertical
adjustment of antenna

Fig.117 - Antenna aiming

200

MN.00224.E - 011

1
2
3
4
5

ASN version

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

AS version

1. Bolt
2. Spring washer
3. Flat washer
4. Earth cable collar
5. Flat washer
Fig.118 - ODU grounding

MN.00224.E - 011

201

7
8
1
2
4

6

5

3

1. O–ring
2. Polarization twist disk
3. Hybrid mechanical body
4. Position marker of twist disk
5. Reference label for twist disk
6. O–ring
7. Allen screws
8. Spring washer
Fig.119 - Hybrid and twist disk

202

MN.00224.E - 011

Horizontal polarization

Vertical polarization

Fig.120 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz)

MN.00224.E - 011

203

Fig.121 - Hybrid installation

204

MN.00224.E - 011

ASN version

AS version

Fig.122 - 1+1 ODUs installation

MN.00224.E - 011

205

20

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH RFS INTEGRATED ANTENNA

20.1

FOREWORD

The installation onto the pole of the ODU with integrated antenna concerns both 1+0 and 1+1 version.

20.2

INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions.

1+0 version

60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:
-

centring ring and relevant screws

-

pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets

-

1+0 ODU support and relevant screws

-

ODU with O–ring and devices for ground connection

1+1 version

20.3

206

60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:
-

centring ring and relevant screws

-

pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets

-

1+0 ODU support

-

hybrid and relevant screws

-

polarization twist disk and relevant screws

-

2 ODUs with O–rings and devices for ground connection.

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench

N.1 3 mm Allen wrench

MN.00224.E - 011

N.1 6 mm Allen wrench

N.1 13 mm spanner

N.2 17 mm spanner.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

20.4

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure is listed below:

1+0 version
1. antenna polarization
2. installation of the centring ring on the antenna
3. installation of 1+0 ODU support
4. installation onto the pole of the assembled structure
5. installation of ODU
6. antenna aiming
7. ODU grounding

1+1 version
1. antenna polarization
2. installation of the centring ring on the antenna
3. installation of 1+0 ODU support
4. installation onto the pole of the assembled structure
5. installation of hybrid
6. installation of ODUs
7. antenna aiming
8. ODU grounding.

20.5

1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES

20.5.1

Setting antenna polarization

Fig.112 – Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the four M3 Allen screws
around the antenna flange. Unscrew them (use 2.5 mm Allen wrench) and position the antenna flange according on: horizontal wave guide –> vertical polarization, vertical wave guide –> horizontal polarization. Screw again the four Allen screws (torque = 1 Nm).

MN.00224.E - 011

207

20.5.2

Installation of the centring ring on the antenna

Fig.112 – Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the three holes around the
antenna flange. Mount the centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use
3mm Allen wrench, torque 2 = Nm).

20.5.3

Installation of 1+0 ODU support

Fig.112 – Mount the support onto assembled structure (pole support system plus antenna) using the four
M8 Allen screws (use 6 mm Allen wrench, torque 18 = Nm). Two of the four screws, diagonally opposed,
must be mounted with the two bushes around.

20.5.4

Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

Fig.112 – Mount the assembled structure on the pole using the two pole fixing brackets and the four M10
screws (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 13 Nm); the heads of the screws are inserted on the antenna side,
the four nuts and the springs between nut and brackets are inserted on bracket side.

20.5.5

Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)

Fig.113 – Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 on the O–ring by protecting fingers with gloves.
Fig.114 – Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the Wave guide of the antenna: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter–clockwise into the support and search
for matching between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.115) and reference tooth on the ODU body.
Fig.116 – When alignment of the references teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until rotation
is stopped. In figure are shown ODU final position for both polarizations.
Fig.115 – When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 13mm
spanner, torque = 6Nm).

20.5.6

Antenna aiming

Antenna aiming procedure for 1+0 version or 1+1 version is the same.
Horizontal aiming: ±5° operating on the 17 mm nut shown in Fig.117 with a 17 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the two 17 mm nut on the pivot.
Vertical aiming: ±20° operating on the 13 mm nut shown in Fig.117 with a 13 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the three 13 mm nut on the pole support.
Once optimum position is obtained, tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.

208

MN.00224.E - 011

20.5.7

ODU grounding

ODU grounding is achieved with:

M8 screw without washers

M6 screw with washer

as shown in Fig.118.

20.6

1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES

In further page are explained all the mounting step not already discussed in paragraph “19.5 1+0
MOUNTING PROCEDURES”.

20.6.1

Installation of Hybrid

Fig.119 – The polarization disk must be always fixed on hybrid flange. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow
Corning 4 on the O–rings by protecting fingers with gloves. Bring the polarization twist disk with the position marker down. Insert the O–ring into polarization twist disk.
Vertical polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards V mark.
Horizontal polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards H mark.
In 13 GHz and 15 GHz ODUs the polarization disk is fixed to the hybrid flange by means of 3 screws as
shown in Fig.120.
Tighten progressively and alternatively the screws and the spring washer with following torque:
Tab.36 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies

Screw

Tool

Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz

Allen screw M3

Allen key 2.5 mm

1 Nm

up to 15 GHz

Allen screw M4

Allen key 3 mm

2 Nm

Fig.121 – Fix hybrid body to 1+0 support with four M8 bolts (use 13 mm spanner, torque = 18 Nm), tighten
progressively and alternatively the bolts.

20.6.2

Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version)

For both ODUs.
Fig.113 – Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O–ring by protecting fingers with gloves.
Fig.114 – Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the wave guide of the hybrid: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter–clockwise and then insert the ODU body
into the support. For 1+1 system the handle of the ODU is always positioned on the right. The polarization
twist disk on the hybrid matches the antenna polarization.

MN.00224.E - 011

209

Fig.122 – When alignment of the reference teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until the rotation stops. In figure are shown ODUs final position.
Fig.115 – When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 17 mm
spanner, torque = 6 Nm).
WARNING: Internal codes (e.g. installation items, antennas, PCB) are here reported only as example. The

Manufacturer reserves the right to change them without any previous advice.

Centering ring

Three 3 mm
Allen screws
Four 13mm screws

Antenna

1+0 support

Fig.123 - 1+0 pole mounting

210

MN.00224.E - 011

Reference tooth
O-ring
ODU wave guide

"N"
"BNC"

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

Ground bolt

Fig.124 - ODU body reference tooth

Vertical

Horizontal

Fig.125 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.

MN.00224.E - 011

211

2
1

1
4
3

3
1
4

1

2
1. 6 mm Allen screw M10
2. 17 mm Tightening bolts (max torque = 6 Nm)
3. Reference point for horizontal polarization
4. Reference point for vertical polarization
Fig.126 - 1+0 support

212

MN.00224.E - 011

1+0 ODU with handle on the left:
vertical polarization

1+0 ODU with handle on the right:
horizontal polarization

Fig.127 - ODU housing final position for both polarization

MN.00224.E - 011

213

Pole support
Vertical aiming
2

1
Horizontal aiming

Fig.128 - Antenna aiming

214

MN.00224.E - 011

1
2
3
4
5

ASN version

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

AS version

1. Bolt
2. Spring washer
3. Flat washer
4. Earth cable collar
5. Flat washer
Fig.129 - ODU grounding

MN.00224.E - 011

215

7
8
1
2
4

6

5

3

1. O–ring
2. Polarization twist disk
3. Hybrid mechanical body
4. Position marker of twist disk
5. Reference label for twist disk
6. O–ring
7. Allen screws
8. Spring washer
Fig.130 - Hybrid and twist disk

216

MN.00224.E - 011

Horizontal polarization

Vertical polarization

Fig.131 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz)

MN.00224.E - 011

217

Fig.132 - Hybrid installation

218

MN.00224.E - 011

AS version

ASN version

Fig.133 - 1+1 ODUs installation

MN.00224.E - 011

219

21

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF ODU ASN
WITH STANDARD LOCK

21.1

ODU COUPLING KIT

Two versions of ODU can be connected to ALplus2/ALCplus2 IDU: ODU AS and ODU ASN. Both versions
need to be completed with a coupling kit to be connected to the mechanical structure for the installation.

21.1.1

ODU AS

ODU AS is factory assembled with a “Fast Lock” coupling kit (see Fig.134); for the installation it needs Oring and grounding bolt only.

21.1.2

ODU ASN

ODU ASN can mount two different coupling kits in order to obtain a Fast Lock ASN or a Standard ASN. After
having mounted the proper coupling kit the ODU needs O-ring and grounding bolt.

21.1.2.1

Fast lock coupling kit

The Fast Lock coupling kit is the same used in ODU AS and so after kit, O-ring and grounding bolt assembly,
the ASN Fast Lock can be installed in the same way of ODU AS.

Coupling kit assembly procedure
See Fig.135 - Put the Fast Lock coupling kit on the ODU.
Align the four holes of the coupling kit with the four nut screws on the ODU. Insert and tighten the four
screws.

21.1.2.2

Standard coupling kit

The standard coupling kit is mounted on ASN ODU by means of four screws.

Coupling kit assembly procedure
See Fig.136 - Put the standard coupling kit on the ODU.
Align the four holes of the coupling kit with the four nut screws on the ODU. Insert and tighten the four
screws.

220

MN.00224.E - 011

21.2

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA

21.2.1

ODU AS and ODU ASN (Fast Lock)

The installation of ODUs with Fast Lock coupling kit is described in previous chapters.

21.2.2

ODU ASN (Standard Lock)

Mounting kit 1+0 version

Centring ring and relevant screws

M10 bolts

ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection

Mounting kit 1+1 version

Centring ring and relevant screws

M10 bolts for hybrid and ODU mounting

Hybrid mechanical body

Polarization twist disk (see Fig.139)

2 ODUs with O-rings and devices for ground connection.

21.2.2.1

1+0 ODU

Install the antenna using the antenna installation guide (specific for each antenna) inside the antenna box
provided by antenna producer. Keep attention to the polarization of the antenna feeder depending on requested polarization.
After the antenna is installed onto the pole, the ODU must be installed, see Fig.137.

Position the three holes circular flange (1) on the antenna flange and align the three holes on the
circular flange with the three relevant holes on the antenna flange

Insert and tighten the three 3mm M4 Allen screws (2) using a 3mm Allen wrench (torque = 2 Nm)

Add lubricant paste, e.g. MOLYKOTE P-40, on threads of four 25mm bolts (3). The sliding surfaces
should be cleaned. The paste should then be applied with a suitable brush, rag or grease gun. It
should not be mixed with grease or oils. Chemical protective gloves should be worn where repeated
or prolonged contact can occur.

Screw partially the four M10 bolts (3) on the antenna back plate: each bolt should be tightened to
have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14mm (the thickness of hook (4), use 15mm spanner)

Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and
insert in the proper track on the ODU flange

Position the ODU (5) vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna feeder:
-

vertical polarization: the handle (6) of the ODU is at the bottom left corner

MN.00224.E - 011

221

-

horizontal polarization: the handle (6) of the ODU is at the bottom right corner

After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach the
ODU to the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the
four bolts

Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15mm spanner,
torque=46mm)

Optional: sun cover kit - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

The ODU is ready to be connected to the IDU-ODU cable and to the grounding cable.

21.2.2.2

1+1 ODU

Install The antenna using the antenna installation guide (specific for each antenna) inside the antenna box
by antenna producer. Keep attention to the polarization of the antenna feeder depending on requested polarization.
After the antenna is installed onto the pole, follow the procedure below, see Fig.138.
Mounting the hybrid (3) on the back of the antenna:

Position the three holes circular flange (1) on the antenna flange and align the holes on the circular
flange with the relevant holes on the antenna flange

Insert and tighten the three 3mm M4 Allen screws (2) using a 3mm Allen wrench (torque = 2mm)

Prepare the polarization disk (see Fig.139) with the two O-rings: seal and lubricant grease Dow
Corning 4 must be applied to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves; each O-ring must be inserted in the proper track on each surface of the disk

Mount always (with vertical and with horizontal polarization) the polarization disk on the hybrid
flange (antenna side) as shown in Fig.139 and tighten the four screws (only three screws in 13 GHz
and 15 GHz hybrid). The polarization disk must br oriented depending on requested polarization by
antenna feeder (position V or H as shown in Fig.139. Torque values as in 21.3.2.2.
Tab.37 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies

Screw

Tool

Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz

Allen screw M3

Allen key 2.5 mm

1 Nm

up to 15 GHz

Allen screw M4

Allen key 3 mm

1 Nm

Mount the hybrid on the back of the antenna by means of four M10 bolts (4) (torque = 46 Nm)

Mounting each ODU on the hybrid:

222

Add lubricant paste, e.g. MOLYKOTE P-40, on threads of four 25mm bolts (3). The sliding surfaces
should be cleaned. The paste should then be applied with a suitable brush, rag or grease gun. It
should not be mixed with grease or oils. Chemical protective gloves should be worn where repeated
or prolonged contact can occur.

Screw partially four M10 bolts (4) on the hybrid flange (ODU side): each bolt should be tightened
to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm, use 15 mm spanner

Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and
insert in the proper track on the ODU flange

Position the ODU (5) vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna feeder: horizontal polarization must be used, the handle (6) of the
ODU is at the bottom right corner

After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach the
ODU to the antenna flange in order to have the four slots (7) of the Standard Lock cross between
the four bolts on the hybrid

MN.00224.E - 011

Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque
= 46Nm)

Optional: sun cover kit - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the IDU-ODU cable and to the grounding cable

Repeat for the other ODU on the other side

Optional: sun cover kit. Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the IDU-ODU cable and to the grounding cable.

21.3

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA

Diameter of the pole

21.3.1

60-114 mm

ODU AS and ODU ASN (Fast Lock)

The installation of ODUs with Fast Lock coupling kit is described in previous chapters.

21.3.2

ODU ASN (Standard Lock)

Mounting kit 1+0 version

Supporting plate, fixing bracket with M10 130mm bolts (with washer, spring and nut)

1 antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency, with relevant screws

M10 25mm bolts for ODU mounting

ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection

Mounting kit 1+1 version

Supporting plate, fixing bracket with M10 130mm bolts (with washer, spring and nut)

M10 25mm bolts for hybrid and ODUs mounting

Hybrid mechanical body

Polarization twist disk (see Fig.139)

2 ODUs with O-rings and devices for ground connection.

MN.00224.E - 011

223

21.3.2.1

1+0 ODU

See Fig.140.

Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four
130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15mm spanner, torque =
46Nm).

Fix the antenna side flange (4) with the proper screws (in Fig.140 the antenna flange is shown in
two different positions depending on the polarization), the screw holes side is the side where the
waveguide must be installed.

Add lubricant paste, e.g. MOLYKOTE P-40, on threads of four 25mm bolts (3). The sliding surfaces
should be cleaned. The paste should then be applied with a suitable brush, rag or grease gun. It
should not be mixed with grease or oils. Chemical protective gloves should be worn where repeated
or prolonged contact can occur.

On the supporting plate, on the opposite side respect to the antenna flange just mounted, insert in
holes (5) on the supporting plate the four 25mm M10 bolts (3): screw them partially, each bolt
should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm (the thickness of
hook (4), use 15mm spanner).

Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and
insert it in the proper track on the ODU flange.

Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the supporting plate and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna flange:
-

vertical polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom left corner

-

horizontal polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom right corner

After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach the
ODU to the supporting plate in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the
four bolts

Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque
=46 Nm).

21.3.2.2

1+1 ODU

See Fig.141.

Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four
130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15 mm spanner, torque = 46
Nm)

Mount the hybrid (4) on the back of the antenna by means of four 25 mm M10 bolts (5) (use 15
mm spanner with torque = 46 Nm) in the holes (6).

Mounting each ODU on the hybrid:

224

Add lubricant paste, e.g. MOLYKOTE P-40, on threads of four 25mm bolts (3). The sliding surfaces
should be cleaned. The paste should then be applied with a suitable brush, rag or grease gun. It
should not be mixed with grease or oils. Chemical protective gloves should be worn where repeated
or prolonged contact can occur.

Screw partially four 25 mm M10 bolts positioning them in the holes (7) on the hybrid flange (ODU
side): each bolt should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm,
use 15 mm spanner

Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and
insert in the proper track on the ODU flange

Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna feeder: horizontal polarization must be used, the handle of the ODU
is at the bottom right corner

After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach it to
the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the four bolts
on the hybrid

MN.00224.E - 011

Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque
= 46 Nm)

Optional: sun cover kit - insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the IDU-ODU cable and to the grounding cable

Repeat for the other ODU on the other side

MN.00224.E - 011

225

21.3.2.3

Waveguide towards the antenna

After having installed the ODU in 1+0 configuration or in 1+1 configuration, the waveguide towards the
antenna must be installed.

1+0: the waveguide must be fixed to the antenna flange on the supporting plate of the ODU. In
case of flexible waveguides, an excessive folding can damage the waveguide, see Tab.38 for details.

1+1: the waveguide must be fixed to the hybrid. In case of flexible waveguides, an excessive folding
can damage the waveguide, see Tab.38 for details.

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm.
Tab.38 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Frequency

Bending radius with- Bending radius with- Bending radius with Bending radius with
out rebending
out rebending
rebending
rebending
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
E-plane a
H-plane b
E-plane a.
H-plane b.

6 GHz or 7 GHz
low

200 (7,9)

500 (19,8)

300 (11,9)

600 (23,7)

7 GHz high

200 (7,9)

500 (19,8)

250 (9,9)

600 (23,7)

11 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

13 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

15 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

18 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

23 GHz

110 (4,3)

230 (9,1)

130 (5,1)

250 (9,9)

38 GHz

80 (3,1)

140 (5,5)

90 (3,6)

150 (5,9)

a.

Bending E-plane

Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)
b.

Bending H-plane

Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)

226

MN.00224.E - 011

O-ring

ODU AS

Eyelet terminal
Grounding bolt

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

Fig.134 - AS and ASN ODUs

MN.00224.E - 011

227

Fast lock coupling flange

Screws

O-ring

ODU ASN

Eyelet terminal
Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

Grounding bolt
Fig.135 - ODU ASN with fast lock coupling flange

228

MN.00224.E - 011

Standard coupling flange

Screws

O-ring

ODU ASN

Eyelet terminal
Grounding bolt
Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

Fig.136 - ODU ASN with standard coupling flange

MN.00224.E - 011

229

4

5

2 (Torque 2Nm)

1

M10

3 (Torque 46Nm)

Fig.137 - 1+0 ODU installation

230

MN.00224.E - 011

4

7

5
3

5

2

1

6

4
Fig.138 - 1+1 ODU installation

MN.00224.E - 011

231

Fig.139 - Polarization disk

114-60
3
1

2

4
5

4
Fig.140 - 1+0 antenna flange

232

MN.00224.E - 011

7
4
3

5

1

6

2

Fig.141 - 1+1 antenna flange

MN.00224.E - 011

233

22

INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF 8+0 ODU
WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA

22.1

GENERALS

To install the ODUs of 8+0 system you need the following components:

diameter of the pole: 60-114 mm

V60100-1 ASN support kit (60-114)

2x V60361 4+0 7GHz Multichannel support

8x ASN 7GHz Single channel ODU

8x V60049-10 kit with 4 M10 screws and O-ring

2 x same length flexible waveguide

dual Polarization High XPD Antenna with pole support

The 8 IDU-ODU coax cables plus tail must have the same length with a tolerance of 1.5 m.

22.2

N+0

See Fig.142.

Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four
130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15 mm spanner, torque = 46
Nm)

See Fig.143.

Mount the multichannel support (4) on the back of the supporting plate (1) by means of four 25
mm M10 bolts (5) (use 15 mm spanner with torque = 46 Nm) in the holes (6).

See Fig.143 and Fig.144.
Mounting each ODU on the multichannel support:

Add lubricant paste, e.g. MOLYKOTE P-40, on threads of four 25mm M10 bolts (8). The sliding surface should be cleaned. The paste should then be applied with a suitable brush, rag or grease gun.
It should not be mixed with grease or oils. Chemical protective gloves should be worn where repeated or prolonged contact can occur. Screw partially four 25 mm M10 bolts (8) positioning them
in the holes (7) on the multichannel support (ODU side): each bolt should be tightened to have the
square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm, use 15 mm spanner (9)

See Fig.145.

234

Install ODUs frequency according frequency organization into SLOTs

Apply silicon grease e.g. DOW CORNING 4 to the O-ring (10) and insert in the proper track on the
ODU flange

MN.00224.E - 011

Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the multichannel feeder: vertical polarization must be used, the handle of the
ODU is at the bottom left corner

After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach it to
the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the four bolts
on the hybrid

Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque
= 46 Nm)

Optional: sun cover kit - insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the IDU-ODU cable and to the grounding cable

Repeat for the other ODUs

Waveguides towards the antenna
See Fig.147.
After having installed the ODU in 8+0 configuration, the waveguides towards the antenna must be installed. The waveguides must be fixed to the antenna flange and on the two multichannel support. An excessive folding can damage the waveguide, see Tab.39 for details.
See Fig.146.
On optional kit V60366 must be installed onto Multichannel support port where ODU are not installed because of maintenance or because of N+0 less than 8+0 (e.g. 7+0).
See Fig.148 and Fig.149.
On Fig.149 measures are displayed in mm.

MN.00224.E - 011

235

GROUNDING
The ODUs must be grounded as per Fig.144.
Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm.

Tab.39 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Frequency

Bending radius with- Bending radius with- Bending radius with Bending radius with
out rebending
out rebending
rebending
rebending
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
E-plane a
H-plane b
E-plane a.
H-plane b.

6 GHz or 7 GHz
low

200 (7,9)

500 (19,8)

300 (11,9)

600 (23,7)

7 GHz high

200 (7,9)

500 (19,8)

250 (9,9)

600 (23,7)

11 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

13 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

15 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

18 GHz

130 (5,1)

280 (11,0)

150 (5,9)

300 (11,9)

23 GHz

110 (4,3)

230 (9,1)

130 (5,1)

250 (9,9)

38 GHz

80 (3,1)

140 (5,5)

90 (3,6)

150 (5,9)

a.

Bending E-plane

Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)
b.

Bending H-plane

Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)

236

MN.00224.E - 011

1

3
2

Fig.142 - 1+1 ASN support kit (60-114) code V60100-01

MN.00224.E - 011

237

5

1
4

6

7
Fig.143 - 7GHz multichannel support, code V60361

238

MN.00224.E - 011

9

7
8

Fig.144 - ODU with screws and O-ring from code V60049-10

MN.00224.E - 011

239

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 4

10

Slot 3
Fig.145 - Mounting ODUs onto multichannel support

240

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.146 - Mounting multichannel short V60366 onto multichannel support

MN.00224.E - 011

241

Fig.147 - Mounting flexible waveguides from antenna to multichannel support

242

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.148 - 8+0 layout

MN.00224.E - 011

243

1009
751

1494
433

646

1264
599

Ø 1310

300

350

636

406

258

R482
315

Ø 1262

839

433

Ø 114

R1291
100
105

Fig.149 - 8+0 layout and measures in mm

244

MN.00224.E - 011

Section 4.
LINE-UP

23

LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP

23.1

LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP

The line–up consists of the following steps:

on site radio terminal installation (user connections and ODU installation as described in the relevant chapters)

equipment switch–on

equipment configuration (through PC software)

antenna alignment for maximum received RF signal level

network element configuration

check measurements.

Equipment installation is described in Section 3. INSTALLATION.

23.1.1

Equipment configuration

In order to have the link working properly, in the local and remote equipment the same parameters have
to be set:

system layout (1+0, 1+1 hot stand-by, 1+1 frequency diversity.....) (Equipment - Configuration)

ACM Engine (Equipment - Modulation&Capacity): during Line-up “ACM Engine” must be disable

Bandwidth&Modulation (Equipment - Modulation&Capacity): during Line-up set the reference
Mod&Cap

link ID (Equipment - General)

RF channel (Equipment-Radio-Radio Branch1A/2A-Tx Frequency Selector)

MN.00224.E - 011

245

The software to run is Web LCT Console and Web LCT on Internet Explorer with Flash player.
You can download Web Lct Console program and Flash Player from http://www.siaemic.com.

Traffic (Baseband - Tributary)
Used tributaries must be enabled on local and on remote equipment.

23.1.2

Antenna alignment and received field measurement

Purpose of antenna alignment is to maximize the RF received signal level.
Proceed as follows:

connect a multimeter to BNC connector on the ODU for AGC measurement

adjust antenna pointing as soon as the maximum AGC voltage value is achieved.

The relationship between AGC voltage and received field is shown by Fig.150.
The received field level has a tolerance of ±4 dB in the full temperature range.

23.1.3

Network element configuration

A factory default address is assigned to each network element that must normally be reconfigurated on
site following the network administrator rules.
For this purpose it is required to connect the PC, where the WEB LCT program has been installed, to the
network interfaces: this has to be done via USB cable or Ethernet cable.
Warning: the checks that follow require the knowledge of the program use.
Run the program and perform the connection to equipment by choosing from menu “Option” the connection made via USB cable.
Perform the login to the equipment by entering:
4

Equipment IP address

User ID (default: SYSTEM)

Password: (default: siaemicr)

Proceed to program what above mentioned following this path:

IP Address: select Port Configuration. Enter the required port addresses in the available communication ports.

Routing Table and Default Gateway: select Routing table: add the routes and default gateway if necessary.
Warning: the routing policy depends on the routing type: static IP/OSPF/IS–IS. The relevant routing
rules must be normally given by network administrator.

4

246

Remote Element Table: select Remote Element Table. Add station name. Add local equipment IP
address, add remote equipment IP address selecting Remote Link.

Agent IP Address: select Equipment Properties. Assign the address in accordance to the address of
Ethernet port.

If the connection is made via USB cable, the IP address is automatically achieved.

MN.00224.E - 011

23.1.4

Few considerations about addresses

Here are listed few observation to follow during the address/netmask setup:
1. PPP connection (RS232 and LCT ports) - PC address can be selected among:
a. Ethernet port address +1
b. broadcast address -1
c. a given address.
For a correct management, solutions b) and c) must be different than Ethernet port address.
2. PPP connection (RS232 and LCT ports) - if Unnumbered is used, the netmask relevant RS232 and
LCT ports must be equal or wider than the Ethernet port netmask
3. PPP connection (RS232 and LCT ports) - never assign network addresses to RS232 or LCT ports
(check that they are hosts).

23.1.5

Radio checks

It is advisable to perform the following measurements to check the correct operation of the radio hop:

transmitted power

received power

RF frequency

S/N measurement

All these checks make use of the WLC program.

Transmitted power, received RF level, RF frequency
-

run WLC program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check.

-

on top of the window Tx/Rx power and frequency values are displayed. In case of Tx power and
frequency setup proceed to Branch 1/2 and Power/Frequencies submenus.

S/N measurement
-

Run WLC program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check.

-

On the left side select S/N meas. 1 or S/N meas.2
In alternative it is possible to use the PRBS function if one or 2 Mbit/s line is free.

-

Perform the S/N measurement and check that values comply with the requirements.

23.1.6

ACM setting

In order to enable the ACM features in the radio links, the following parameters must be set on both ends
just to have the same configuration.
ACM parameters can be set in WEB LCT in Modulation and Capacity card in the window.

Mod.Cap/LinkID in case of ALplus2 and ALCplus2

BW&Mod/LinkID in case of ALCplus2e

ACM engine

Enabled - the link uses different ACM profiles

Disabled - the link uses the reference modulation only

MN.00224.E - 011

247

The ACM can vary modulation profiles between two extremes defined by the operator through software
configuration:

Upper modulation: when propagation, into the given radio channel is in the better condition (high
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the maximum throughput defined at Upper Modulation: the
highest modulation profile that ACM can employ

Lower modulation: when propagation into the given radio channel is in the worst condition (low Rx
S/N), the radio link is working at the minimum throughput, defined at Lower Modulation: the lowest
modulation profile that ACM can employ

Reference Modulation defines the spectrum mask of the Tx signal.
When more then one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected reference modulation (i.e.: 4QAM and 4QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be automatically selected (i.e.:
4QAM).

About lower modulation
When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected lower modulation
(i.e: 4QAM and 4QAM strong), the minimum throughput profile will be automatically included (i.e.: 4QAM
strong).

About upper modulation
When more than ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected upper modulation (i.e.:
4QAM and 4QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be automatically included (i.e.: 4QAM).

Tx Power Constant Peak mode (ALplus2 and ALCplus2)
Tx Power Ramp Up To (ALCplus2e)

Enabled - The Tx power is the maximum allowed in each modulation profile (only if “reference modulation” is equal to “lower modulation”)

Disabled - The link uses the same Tx power in each profile (Tx power is the Tx power at “upper
modulation”)

Bandwidth and Modulation

Transmitted channel bandwidth

Reference modulation, with ACM enabled, or used modulation, with ACM disabled

Permanent TDM
Number of TDM (E1 streams) always transmitted.

Extra TDM
Number of TDM (E1 streams) transmitted besides the permanent TDM, in each ACM profile. In case of Extra
TDM usage, in the Extra TDM Priority card is present the list of which extra TDMs are transmitted.

248

MN.00224.E - 011

V

3
2,625
2,25
1,875
1,5
1,125
0,75

dBm

0
-100

-80

-70

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

Fig.150 - Detected voltage versus RF received signal

MN.00224.E - 011

249

24

BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION
WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS

24.1

SCOPE

This chapter describes the procedure to back up the full equipment configuration. This permits to recover
the original equipment configuration in case of faulty CONTROLLER module replacement with spare.

24.2

24.2.1

CONFIGURATION UPLOAD AND DOWNLOAD USING SCT

Configuration upload

Foreword: it is advisable to backup the configuration after the first installation. Proceed as follows:
1. Select “Equipment Configuration Wizard” from menu “Tools”; “Equipment Configuration Wizard” window will be displayed.
2. Select “Upload” and then “Backup Full Equipment Configuration”; “Template Selection” window will be displayed.
3. Select the correct equipment template (in case of uncorrected choice the backup will be aborted).
4. Press OK and then select the equipment to be uploaded from “Upload Configuration File” window.
5. Press OK and then edit the file name from “Save backup as” window.
6. Press Save; “Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete Backup” window will appear.
The window shows dynamically the backup procedure. If everything is OK, at the end of the upload
will appear the word “done” showing the procedure success.
7. Press OK to finish.

24.2.2

Configuration download

Once the spare controller has been installed, or every time you need the primitive configuration, proceed
as follows:
1. Select “Equipment Configuration Wizard” from menu “Tools”. “Equipment Configuration Wizard”
window will be displayed.
2. Select “Download” and than “Restore Full Equipment Configuration” from Equipment Configuration Wizard. “Select Backup File” window will be displayed.
3. Select the wanted backup file with extension .bku and then press Open. “Download Configuration
File” window will be displayed.

250

MN.00224.E - 011

4. Select the equipment to download and then press OK; “Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete
restore” window will be displayed. This window shows dynamically the download operation. The
word “done” indicates that download has been successfully.
5. Press OK to finish.
Warning: In case of EOC alarm proceed to restart the equipment.

24.3

CONFIGURATION UPLOAD AND DOWNLOAD USING WEBLCT

24.3.1

Configuration upload

Foreword: it is advisable to backup the configuration after the first installation. Proceed as follows:
1. select “Backup/Restore Configuration” in the “Main menu”
2. in the field “Backup File name” write the name of the configuration file you are going to upload in
the PC, complete with the full path of its folder
3. push Backup. The status of the backup procedure is shown in the “Operation Status” field.

24.3.2

Configuration download

Once the spare Controller has been installed or every time the saved configuration is necessary, proceed
as follow:
1. select “Backup/Restore Configuration” in the “Main menu”
2. select “Browse local system” in order to locate the configuration file you need and push Open when
it has been found
3. Push Restore. The status of the backup procedure is shown in the “operation Status” field. During
Restore operation the equipment creates a backup configuration, you can come back to this configuration at the end of the restore pushing Revert.

24.3.3

SD Memory card

A SD card slot is available on the ALplus2 Controller module (on the board) or on the front panel of
ALCplus2.
Using a SD memory card is possible to perform an auto restore of Configuration and of Equipment Firmware
every time a mismatch between running ones and saved occurs.
1. remove the screws of the SD cover
2. insert the SD into the slot
3. select “SD Memory Management” in the “Main menu”
4. in the “Actions” field select the operation you want to perform (......”Enable automatic restore (all)”
for example)
5. select Execute
6. remove SD
7. close the cover and tighten the screws.

MN.00224.E - 011

251

25

LINE-UP FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC

25.1

LAN SETUP

This paragraph deals with line-up of ALplus2 LIM Ethernet and ALCplus2/ALCplus2e IDU with details of WEB
LCT program related only to Ethernet application.
Differences among the IDUs are pointed out.
Main difference is the number of LAN ports: three in ALplus2 and four in ALCplus2/ALCplus2e, moreover
in ALplus2 the LAN2 port can manage POE functionality besides in ALCplus2/ALCplus2e Sync Signal can be
taken from LAN ports also (see relevant paragraph).
Assuming that the radio link is already in service, with correct frequency, output power and correct antenna
alignment, the line up procedure for two different kinds of connection set up of a radio link ALplus2,
equipped with LIM module with Ethernet ports, is hereafter described:

Local Lan-1 port to remote Lan-1 port connection Lan per port, see Fig.151

from 3 ports to 3 ports connections and segregated traffic for Untagged Traffic, see Fig.159

from 3 ports to 3 ports connections and segregated traffic for Tagged and Untagged Traffic, see
Fig.169.

Settings here below are intended to be done both into local and remote radio equipment. The software to
be used to configure the equipment is WEB LCT. In the following chapter the figures used as example can
differ in the position of main commands depending on WEB LCT release.

25.2

LOCAL LAN-1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN-1 PORT TRANSPARENT
CONNECTION LAN PER PORT

Settings for Untagged and Tagged Traffic

switch

switch

Lan-1

port 1

Lan-2

port 1
AL
radio

Lan-3

Lan-1
Lan-2

AL
radio

Lan-3
Nx2
Mbit/s

Nx2
Mbit/s
Local

Remote

Fig.151 - Local Lan-1 port to remote Lan-1 port connection
The first example is local Lan1 port to remote Lan1 port transparent connection for tagged and untagged
traffic please refer to Fig.151.

252

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.152 - Modulation and capacity
Select 1+0 or 1+1 configuration according system requirements.
Please refer to Fig.152. First selection is channel bandwidth and modulation, in this example we selected
28MHz and 16QAM.
ACM Engine, Upper Modulation, Lower Modulation, Permanent Traffic and extra TDM Capacity at any modulation must be the same local and remote.
The throughput at any modulation with 28 MHz bandwidth is shown in Fig.153 with View Current Config
button of Fig.152.

Fig.153 - View Current Configuration

MN.00224.E - 011

253

So with 4QAMstrong modulation the Ethernet capacity is 20 Mbit/s and with 256QAM modulation the Ethernet capacity is 140 Mbit/s.

Fig.154 - Switch general settings
See Fig.154 for general settings of the switch. All the used ports must be Enabled, so enable Lan-1 and
Internal Port A, see Fig.155.
Please notice the MAC Address Aging Time reduced, only for this test at 15 sec.
The other ports should be disabled. The correct cable crossover arrangement must be selected too (see
Fig.155). Enable LLF, if needed, only at the end of link line up.
Select Master or Slave Role for 1000BaseT interface.
Switch connections are done with Lan per port selections. Referring to Fig.156, incoming traffic at Lan-1
exits at internal Port A and as in Fig.157 and in Fig.158 incoming traffic at internal Port A exits at Lan-1
port. This connection are done for all Untagged packets and all Tagged packets with Vlan Id not described
into Vlan Configuration Table.
If Vlan Configuration Table is blank all Tagged traffic follows the rules of Lan per port.
Possible selections of Ingress Filtering Check:

"Disable 802.1q": no check of Virtual Lan tag is done and all packets follow Lan per port settings

"Fallback": if Tagged packets have their Vlan Id into Vlan Configuration Table they follow the connection described into the table, otherwise they follow the Lan per port settings as Untagged packets

"Secure": no Untagged packet transits; only Tagged packets with Vlan Id listed into the table can
transit.

For all previous configuration "Disable 802.1" should be selected. With Egress Mode as Unmodified the outgoing packets at Lan-1 port exit Untagged or Tagged exactly as they were Untagged or Tagged at the incoming port.

254

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.155 - Lan-1 interface settings

Fig.156- Vlan settings for LAN-1

MN.00224.E - 011

255

Fig.157 - Vlan settings for Port A

Fig.158 - Priority setting for Lan-1 and Port A

256

MN.00224.E - 011

25.3

FROM 3 PORT TO 3 PORT CONNECTIONS

Settings for Untagged traffic.

switch

switch
port 1

Lan-1

port 1
AL
radio

Lan-2

Lan-1
Lan-2

AL
radio

Lan-3

Lan-3

Nx2
Mbit/s

Nx2
Mbit/s
Remote

Local

Fig.159 - 3 ports to 3 ports connections with segregated traffic
In this example 3 local port must communicate with corresponding 3 remote ports. All the ports share the
same radio channel but traffic originated and directed to Lan1 should be kept separated from traffic from
Lan2 and Lan3 and viceversa.
Lan-1 to Lan-1, connection must transfer untagged packets.
Lan-2 and Lan-3 have the same requirements. Please refer to Fig.159.
Select 1+0 or 1+1 configuration according system requirements.

Fig.160 - Modulation and capacity
Please refer to Fig.160. First selection is channel bandwidth and modulation, in this example we selected
28MHz and 16QAM.
ACM Engine, Upper Modulation, Lower Modulation, Permanent Traffic and extra TDM Capacity at any modulation must be the same local and remote.

MN.00224.E - 011

257

The throughput at any modulation with 28 MHz bandwidth is shown in Fig.161 with View Current Config
button of Fig.160.

Fig.161 - View Current Configuration
So with 4QAMstrong modulation the Ethernet capacity is 20 Mbit/s and with 256QAM modulation the Ethernet capacity is 140 Mbit/s.

Fig.162 - Switch general settings
See Fig.162 for Switch general settings of the switch. All the used ports must be Enabled, so enable Lan1, Lan-2, Lan-3 and Internal Port, see Fig.163.
Please notice the MAC Address Aging Time reduced, only for this test, at 15 sec. The correct cable crossover
arrangement must be selected too (see Fig.163). Enable LLF if needed only at the end of link line up.
Select Master or Slave Role for 1000BaseT interface.

258

MN.00224.E - 011

For Untagged traffic, connections are done with Lan per port selections. Referring to Fig.164 incoming traffic at Lan-1 exits at internal Port A and into Fig.167 incoming traffic at internal Port A exits at Lan-1 port.
This connection are done for all Untagged traffic and all Tagged packets with Vlan Id not described into
Vlan Configuration Table.
If Vlan Configuration Table is blank all Tagged traffic follows the rules of Lan per port.
Possible selections of Ingress Filtering Check:

"Disable 802.1q": no check of Virtual Lan tag is made and all packets follow Lan per port settings

"Fallback": if Tagged packets have their Vlan Id into Vlan Configuration Table they follow the connection described into the table, otherwise they follow the Lan per port settings as Untagged packets

"Secure": no Untagged packet transits; only Tagged packets with Vlan Id listed into the table can
transit.

Fig.163 - Lan-1 interface settings
All the used ports must be Enabled.
The correct Cable Crossover arrangement must be selected too.
Untagged traffic transits only if the selection for Ingress Filtering Check is disabled at each input port and
a separated Vlan for Untagged traffic is set up for each port.
Each port of the switch must be associated with a different Default VLAN ID, Lan-1 with Default VID 4001,
Lan-2 with Default VID 4002, Lan-3 with Default VID 4003, for Lan-1 see Fig.163 and Fig.164.
Untagged packets coming at physical ports are tagged on common radio channel but tagged with different
Vlans. At receiving end packets are distributed at their ports and untagged.
Vlan Configuration Table will be defined in order to group traffic from Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3 to Port A.
The Vlan Configuration Table must be programmed as in Fig.168.

MN.00224.E - 011

259

Fig.164 - Lan1 Vlan settings

Fig.165 - Lan2 Vlan settings

260

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.166 - Lan3 Vlan settings

Fig.167 - Port A Vlan settings

MN.00224.E - 011

261

Fig.168 - Vlan Configuration Table

25.4

FROM 3 PORT TO 3 PORT CONNECTIONS

Settings for Tagged Traffic, QinQ

switch

switch
port 1

Lan-1

port 1
AL
radio

Lan-2

Lan-1
Lan-2

AL
radio

Lan-3

Lan-3

Nx2
Mbit/s

Nx2
Mbit/s
Local

Remote

Fig.169 - 3 ports to3 ports connections with segregated Tagged and Untagged traffic
In this example 3 local port must communicate with corresponding 3 remote ports. All the ports share the
same radio channel but traffic originated and directed to Lan1 should be kept separated from traffic from
Lan2 and Lan3 and viceversa.
Lan-1 to Lan-1, connection must transfer tagged and untagged packets. Lan-2 and Lan-3 have the same
requirements. Please refer to Fig.169.
Select 1+0 or 1+1 configuration according system requirements.

262

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.170 -Modulation and Capacity
Please refer to Fig.170. First selection is channel bandwidth and modulation, in this example we selected
28MHz and 16QAM.
ACM Engine, Upper Modulation, Lower Modulation, Permanent Traffic and extra TDM Capacity at any modulation must be the same local and remote.
The throughput at any modulation with 28 MHz bandwidth is shown in Fig.171 with View Current Config
button of Fig.170.

Fig.171 - View Current Configuration

MN.00224.E - 011

263

So with 4QAMstrong modulation the Ethernet capacity is 20 Mbit/s and with 256QAM modulation the Ethernet capacity is 140 Mbit/s.

Fig.172 - Switch general settings
See Fig.172 for Switch general settings of the switch. All the used ports must be Enabled, so enable Lan1, Lan-2, Lan-3 and internal Port A, see Fig.155.
For already Tagged traffic we need to add a second Vlan Tag to the packets creating the Vlan of Vlan into
radio channel, so we need a Max packet size of 2048.
Settings are as reported in Fig.173, Fig.174, Fig.175, Fig.176, Fig.177.

Fig.173 - Lan1 Vlan settings

264

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.174 - Lan2 Vlan settings

Fig.175 - Lan3 Vlan settings

MN.00224.E - 011

265

Fig.176 - Port A Vlan settings

Fig.177 - Vlan Configuration Table

266

MN.00224.E - 011

26

HOW TO CHANGE ADDRESS ON REMOTE EQUIPMENT WITHOUT LOSING THE CONNECTION

26.1

TOOLS

The following procedure can be done with SCT/LCT or with Web LCT and similar windows.

26.2

PROCEDURE

1. Set new addresses on remote equipment
2. Clear the Stored Routing Table on remote equipment and add new lines to it
3. Set the new Agent and restart remote equipment
4. Configure Local equipment
5. Prepare Subnetwork on local equipment, capture the remote equipment and send it the new subnetwork

Select the remote equipment
Select menu Equipment -> Configuration Setup -> Port Configuration

MN.00224.E - 011

267

Fig.178 - Subnetwork Craft Terminal - Communication setup

Configuration
Configure:
IP Ethernet ->Ip address and netmask (see Fig.179)
Lct PPP -> Ip address and netmask (see Fig.180)
PPP Radio -> Ip address and netmask (see Fig.181)
If you have other port to configure ex. PPP RS232 - 2Mbit/s EOC etc. configure it with IP and netmask

268

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.179 - IP Ethernet

Fig.180 - LCT PPP

MN.00224.E - 011

269

Fig.181 - PPP Radio
At the end select Set Values -> Confirm and Store -> Confirm.

270

MN.00224.E - 011

Select the equipment
Select menu Equipment -> Configuration Setup -> Stored Routing Table

Fig.182 - Store Routing Table
In this menu delete all lines and default gateway, push Apply and then Save.

MN.00224.E - 011

271

Fig.183 - Stored Routing Table
Add new routine lines (relevant the new addresses configuration) pushing the Add button.
When the Stored Routing Table is complete, push Apply and then Save.

Select the remote equipment
Select menu Equipment -> Properties. Set new Agent (equal to Ethernet port address).
Push Restart and then Confirm.
After the restart, the Remote Equipment disappears from SCT display.

Configure the local equipment
Configure the local equipment with the same procedure seen before. Then restart the local equipment.

Subnetwork Configuration Wizard
To see both local and remote equipment the new subnetwork (station and equipment) must be prepared.
Select menu Tools -> Subnetwork Configuration Wizard.

272

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.184 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard

MN.00224.E - 011

273

Fig.185 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard - Actual Configuration

Push Add Station, write its name and push OK.

274

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.186 - Add new station
Select this new station and push Add Element.
The Ip Address to set is the Agent (equal to Ethernet port address).

MN.00224.E - 011

275

Fig.187 - Add New Network Element

After having set the Equipment Address, push OK.
The new element is created inside the previously created station
This step must be done for local and remote equipment.

276

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.188 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard
Select the local equipment (the one with System (Local))

MN.00224.E - 011

277

Fig.189 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard

Send the configuration to local equipment.
When the remote equipment appears in Actual Configuration, prepare again the network configuration you
have set before (or select the local equipment, push Retrieve) and send the configuration to remote equipment.

278

MN.00224.E - 011

27

LINE-UP OF THE NODE WITH NODAL IDU

27.1

OVERVIEW

The following paragraph deals with the activation of the Node with Nodal IDU unit with details of the SCT/
LCT program relevant to the functionalities offered by the cross-connection matrix and Ethernet switch in
relation to the achievable connections.
Supposing that the radio links are already commissioned, the following items are described:

tributary - radio cross-connection

tributary - tributary cross-connection

ethernet switch.

27.2

NODE CONNECTIONS

The connections among the IDUs in the node are the following:

connections for E1: Nbus cables are used (connectors NBUS1 and NBUS2 are involved)

connections for Ethernet: Ethernet cables are used (ports LAN1 and LAN2 are involved).

The number of IDUs in the node is between 2 and 8.
In Fig.190 there is an example of connection between one IDU and the adjacent IDUs in the same node.
Remember that in a node for Ethernet Traffic can be used port 3 and port 4 only because port LAN1 and
LAN2 are used for nodal connections.

MN.00224.E - 011

279

From LAN1 of IDU8

IDU1

Max 8

IDU2

IDU3

From NB1 of IDU8

LAN1

LAN2

NB1

NB2

LAN1

LAN2

NB1

NB2

LAN1

LAN2

NB1

NB2

Node traffic transport:
- TDM (E1) --> NBUS cable
- LAN --> LAN cable

...........................

IDU8

LAN1

LAN2

From LAN2 of IDU1

NB1

NB2

LAN1 and LAN2 are used for cabling

From NB2 of IDU1

Fig.190 - ALCplus2 node connections

27.3

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

The operations to enable the functionalities offered by the internal cross-connection matrix and Ethernet
switch are the following:

280

run the software SCT, select tools and Subnetwork Configuration Wizard

insert all the Nodal IDU present into the Node, all these Nodals must be reachable and connected

select Network, Nodal ALCplus2 Manager as in Fig.191

configure the Node with Station name, Node name, define is Nodal cables are Protected or Not
Protected

configure the Node indicating the number of IDU setting the Node for E1 TDM traffic, Number of
TDM Elem.

configure the Node indicating the number of IDU setting the Node for E1 TDM traffic, Number of
ETH Elem.

insert the IP number of the IDU setting the Node and press Apply Config button

at this point there are Cross-connections and Ethernet LAN details.

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.191 - Nodal ALCplus2 Manager

27.4

TRIBUTARY CONFIGURATION

The operations to create and configure this cross-connection are:

to run the software WebLCT, open Equipment Menu, TDM Tributaries, E1 and select the type
of used tributary

to enable the E1 and/or STM-1 tributaries (transport of 63 E1 each) involved by the cross-connection

MN.00224.E - 011

281

to route an E1 stream to remote equipment, a Tributary-Radio cross-connection must be created,
the enabling of the stream itself is not sufficient, the cross-connection can be done directly into Nodal ALCplus2 Manager

in case of STM-1 streams, configure the parameters VC4 (Label - TUG Structure) and any VC12 (Label: Asynchronous) and the synchronization parameters (WebLCT, Equipment Menu, Synchronisation).

27.5

CONFIGURATION OF THE CROSS-CONNECTION MATRIX

The operations to configure a cross-connection can be done IDU by IDU into WebLCT or easier into the
Nodal ALCplus2 Manager:

run the software SCT, open Network, Nodal ALCplus2 Manager and press Cross-connection

select the type of cross-connection:
-

tributary - radio: cross-connection between the tributaries available on the front side of IDUs
(E1, STM-1, IDU1 to IDU8) and the tributaries available on the radio link, IDU1 to 8 Radio Extra
E1 and Permanent E1

-

tributary - tributary: cross-connection between the tributaries available on the front side of IDUs
(E1, STM-1, IDU1 to 8).

27.5.1

Tributary - Radio Cross-connection

The operations to create and configure this cross-connection are:

select the type of tributary to use on the front side of the IDU: the relevant E1 streams will be displayed in the window together with the number of E1 streams relevant to the radio link

select which radio link you want to use in cross-connection (up to eight available)

move the symbol of the E1 stream (the number corresponds to the physical position in the connector of the IDU) by dragging and dropping from a type of tributary to the position to use in the radio
frame, see Fig.192.

the tributaries in the radio frame (link direction A or others) can be involved in a tributary loop towards the corresponding remote radio by means of a double click on the relevant box that points
out the position in the frame, see Fig.193

the tributaries on radio side can transit directly from a radio link to the other without need to pass
from the tributaries on matrix side: by means of drag’n’drop, a box relevant to an E1 on radio side
is moved from a link to the other link. The two involved links must be selected in the fields 1st Radio
and 2nd Radio. A pass- through (transit) cross-connection is so executed: see Fig.194

to delete a cross-connection, move it to the trash

to activate the configuration, press Apply and Confirm.

27.5.2

Tributary - Tributary Cross-connection

The operations to create and configure this cross-connection are:

282

select the two types of tributary (1st tributary and 2nd tributary) on the front side of the IDUs module to use as ends: the relevant E1 streams will be displayed in the top and bottom part of the window

MN.00224.E - 011

move the symbol of the E1 stream (the number corresponds to the physical position in the connector on the IDU) by means of the drag’n’drop from a tributary type to another, see Fig.195

to delete a cross-connection, move to the trash

to activate the configuration, press Apply and Confirm.

This type of cross-connection includes even those relevant to the transport of E1 streams from a nodal IDU
to another one belonging to the same node.
NBUS connections are not displayed.

27.6

ETHERNET SWITCH

For Ethernet connections the Nodals are as one big switch with two Lan ports and a radio Ethernet port for
any IDU.
Connections between the IDU are not shown into SCT but are programmed automatically by SCT in order
to create the big switch.
Setting of the Ethernet switch is performed through Nodal ALCplus2 Manager which then programs any
Nodal part of the switch.
All settings of Ethernet switches part of the Node can be done directly into Nodal ALCplus2 Manager.
See from Fig.196 to Fig.207.

Fig.192 - Drag and drop E1 stream

MN.00224.E - 011

283

Fig.193 - VC auto loop

284

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.194 - Pass-through cross-connection

MN.00224.E - 011

285

Fig.195 - Drag and drop E1 stream

286

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.196 - Ethernet switch settings

MN.00224.E - 011

287

Fig.197 - Ethernet switch settings

288

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.198 - Ethernet switch settings

MN.00224.E - 011

289

Fig.199 - Ethernet switch settings

290

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.200 - Ethernet switch settings

MN.00224.E - 011

291

Fig.201 - Ethernet switch settings

292

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.202 - Ethernet switch settings

MN.00224.E - 011

293

Fig.203 - Ethernet switch settings

294

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.204 - Ethernet switch settings

Fig.205 - Ethernet switch settings

MN.00224.E - 011

295

Fig.206 - Ethernet switch settings

296

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.207 - Ethernet switch settings

MN.00224.E - 011

297

28

EXAMPLE OF ALCPLUS2 NODE EXPANSION

28.1

INTRODUCTION

The goal of this chapter is to define a procedure to add one (or more) ALCplus2 IDU to an existing node of
similar IDUs, carrying live traffic. This procedure is applicable to the following IDUs:

GAI0162

GAI0163

equipped with system versions 01.01.xx.
In the following paragraphs some screenshots are provided, related to a 3-IDU node expanded to a 4-IDU
node, as an example. The example can be easily applied to a N-IDU node (i.e. a node composed by a number of IDUs equal to N) expanded to N+K-IDU node: the 3 to 4 IDU case corresponds to the N=3 K=1 case.
This procedure does not provide specific guidance about the GEthernet traffic: with this respect the node
expansion shall be treated as an usual case of interconnection between Ethernet Switches, implementing
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
Attention: this procedure covers also the case when you want to withdraw one (or more) IDU from the

node.

28.2

PRECONDITIONS

The SCT distribution to be used to perform this task shall be 4.6.8 or greater.
All the IDUs are reachable by the PC running the SCT/Web browser. All the operations performed via SCT/
WebLCT shall be done logged as 'System' into the relevant equipment.
The existing node is composed by IDUs configured as "AlcPlus2 (Protected)". See hereafter the screenshots
relevant to an example.

298

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.208 - Node composition

MN.00224.E - 011

299

Fig.209 - Node composition

28.3

NBUS AND INTRA-NODE GE CABLING RULES

In a N-IDU node, the NBUS cabling shall be as follows:

IDU 1 NBUS 1 shall be connected to IDU 2 NBUS 2

IDU 2 NBUS 1 shall be connected to IDU 3 NBUS 2

IDU J NBUS 1 shall be connected to IDU J+1 NBUS 2

IDU N NBUS 1 shall be connected to IDU 1 NBUS 2.

In a N-IDU node, the intra-node GEth. cabling shall be as follows:

300

IDU 1 LAN1 port shall be connected to IDU 2 LAN2 port

IDU 2 LAN1 port shall be connected to IDU 3 LAN2 port

IDU J LAN1 port shall be connected to IDU J+1 LAN2 port

IDU N LAN1 port shall be connected to IDU 1 LAN2 port.

MN.00224.E - 011

28.4

NODE EXPANSION FROM N TO N+K ELEMENTS

28.4.1

Step 1

Install the K new IDUs in the same rack where the existing node is installed (or in an adjacent rack, provided that the NBUS cables length is compatible with the installation). Do not connect the N-BUS cables
to the new IDUs.
Configure the new IDUs as "AlcPlus2 (Protected)", with the following parameters:

Nodes Id: from N+1 to N+K, depending on the IDU position inside the node

Number of nodes: N+K

28.4.2

Step 2

Interconnect the new IDUs with the nodal bus, as per rule in 28.2 PRECONDITIONS. Do not connect the
new IDUs to the existing IDUs.

28.4.3

Step 3 (traffic affecting)

Disconnect the N-BUS 2 from IDU 1.
Depending on the number and kind of interconnections among the IDUs, there will be errors and/or AIS
on some of the E1, due to the traffic protection intervention on the N-BUS. The typical duration of the traffic
interruption, measured at E1 level, is around 1s.
Alarms will appear: some possibly related to E1 traffic (depending on the existing interconnections) and at
least two one related to the nodal bus interruption. The E1 related alarms will disappear as soon as the
protection on the N-BUS will take place. The N-BUS related alarms will remain. See screenshots hereafter
as an example.

MN.00224.E - 011

301

Fig.210 - Current alarms

28.4.4

Step 4

Change configuration of IDU 1 and IDU N, modifying the 'number of nodes' parameter from N to N+K.
Change configuration of IDUs from number 2 to number N-1, modifying the 'number of nodes' parameter
from N to N+K.

28.4.5

Step 5 (traffic affecting)

Connect the N-BUS from IDU N to IDU N+1 as per rule in paragraph 28.2 PRECONDITIONS. Connect the
N-BUS from IDU N+K to IDU 1, as per rule in paragraph 28.2 PRECONDITIONS.
Depending on the number and kind of interconnections among the IDUs, there will be errors and/or AIS
on some of the E1, due to the traffic protection intervention on the N-BUS. The typical duration of the traffic
interruption, measured at E1 level, is around 1s.
The N-BUS related alarms shall disappear.

302

MN.00224.E - 011

28.5

NODE REDUCTION FROM N+K TO N ELEMENTS

Basically this procedure consists in reverting the steps done to expand the node.

28.5.1

Step 1 (traffic affecting)

Disconnect the N-BUS from IDU N to IDU N+1 and from IDU N+K to IDU 1.
Depending on the number and kind of interconnections among the IDUs, there will be errors and/or AIS
on some of the E1, due to the traffic protection intervention on the N-BUS. The typical duration of the traffic
interruption, measured at E1 level, is around 1s.
The N-BUS related alarms shall appear in IDU 1, IDU N, IDU N+1 and IDU N+K.

28.5.2

Step 2

Change configuration of IDU 1 and IDU N, modifying the 'number of nodes' parameter from N+K to N.
Change configuration of IDUs number 2 to number N-1, modifying the 'number of nodes' parameter from
N+K to N.

28.5.3

Step 3 (traffic affecting)

Connect the N-BUS from IDU N to IDU 1, as per rule in paragraph 28.2 PRECONDITIONS.
Depending on the number and kind of interconnections among the IDUs, there will be errors and/or AIS
on some of the E1, due to the traffic protection intervention on the N-BUS. The typical duration of the traffic
interruption, measured at E1 level, is around 1s.
At the end of a transitional period the N-BUS related alarms shall disappear.

28.5.4

Step 4

Withdraw the IDUs from N+1 to N+K.

MN.00224.E - 011

303

29

LINE-UP RADIO TRUNKING (LINK AGGREGATION RADIO SIDE)

29.1

RADIO TRUNKING MODE (INTERNAL PORT - PORT A)

This mode is available only for equipment belonging to an ALCplus2 node and interconnected by nodal Bus
Ethernet. The radio Trunking mode allows aggregating some radio streams of a nodal system.
The functionality manages an aggregation group (Trunk): Enable-Trunk1.
To insert a radio port of a switch in the Trunk, it is necessary to enable the radio Trunking mode for this
port (Enable-Trunk1). In this mode, up to 4 radio ports can be aggregated.
The use of the radio Trunking mode is alternative to the use of the Spanning Tree protocol.

29.1.1

To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the trunking
mode

Operations available only if the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is interconnected to the other
node elements by the nodal Bus Ethernet.
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens.
2. Bring in front of page the STP/Trunking tab. The tab points out the status of the port in relation to
the Trunking modality or to the Spanning Tree protocol.
Fig.211 reports an example of the tab when the Trunking modality is active.

Fig.211 - STP/Trunking tab (Trunk active) (Port A contextual area)

304

MN.00224.E - 011

Trunk Value:

Disable. Trunking mode disabled

Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled at radio port level.

If the STP protocol is enabled the parameter Trunk is automatically forced to the value Disable. To modify
the value, it is first necessary to disable the Spanning Tree protocol. STP Parameters relevant to the Spanning Tree protocol.

29.1.2

To enable/disable the Trunking mode for the internal port

Operations available only if the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is interconnected to other elements of the node through nodal Bus Ethernet. The Trunking modality cannot be enabled when the Spanning Tree protocol is enabled.

Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens.

Bring in front of page the STP/Trunking tab. The Trunk parameter points out the enabling status of
the Trunking mode for the selected port (see Fig.211).

To change the parameter, select the value:

-

Disable. Trunking mode disabled.

-

Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled at radio port level.

Press Apply and confirm.

MN.00224.E - 011

305

30

LINE-UP LINE TRUNKING (LINK AGGREGATION
LINE SIDE)

30.1

LINE TRUNKING MODE

This mode is available for a connection between IDU and ODU and from a node to other node connected
via Lan ports.
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command.
The LAN <port number> contextual area opens.
2. Bring in front of page the STP/ELP/Trunking tab.
The tab points out the status of the port in relation to the Ethernet Line Protection, to the Spanning Tree
protocol or to the Trunking modality. Fig.212 reports an example of the tab when the Trunking modality is
active.

Fig.212 - Trunking tab (Trunk active)
Parameter:

Status. Status of the port as regards the LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol):

Up. Protocol active.

Down. Protocol inactive.

Partner Id. MAC Address of the remote equipment located at the other end of the Ethernet connection (remote switch).

Tx Pck Cnt. LACP packets transmitted to the remote switch.

Rx Pck Cnt. LACP packets received from the remote switch.

Value:

306

Disable. Trunking mode disabled.

MN.00224.E - 011

Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN port is aggregated to the equipment
LAN ports, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk1.

Enable-Trunk2. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN port is aggregated to the equipment
LAN ports, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk2.

Enable-Trunk3. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN port is aggregated to the equipment
LAN ports, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk3.

Enable-Trunk4. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN port is aggregated to the equipment
LAN ports, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk4.

It is possible to aggregate up to 4 LAN ports for each group (Trunk). Another example is to aggregate two
Lans on Trunk1 and other two Lans on Trunk2. Send Trunk1 to one IDU and Trunk2 to a second IDU.
All the Lan port belonging to a group (Trunk) must have the same speed.
If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and it is interconnected to other elements of the node
through nodal Bus Ethernet, this operation is available for the external ports LAN3 and LAN4.

MN.00224.E - 011

307

31

LINE-UP OAM

Please, first read paragraph “8.8 ETHERNET OAM (Operation Administration and Maintenance)”.
To use the OAM facilities it is necessary to:

assign a Domain with its Level

bind a Maintenance Association to a VLan (that is sufficient to create MIP)

bind a MEP to a VLan.

Do the same on remote equipment. Now it is possible to verify the status of connection with Remote MEP
(Rmep), or send a Loop back Message (Lbm) or send a Link trace Message (Ltm)

31.1

FM DOMAIN

The OAM-FM Domain command manages the OAM domain of an equipment.
In details it is possible:

To verify the characteristics of the OAM domain of an equipment

To define an OAM domain for an equipment

To remove the OAM domain of an equipment

The name or the level of an OAM domain associated to an equipment cannot be modified. In order to modify
one or both the parameters, it is necessary to remove the current domain and to define a new one.
To verify the characteristics of the OAM domain of an equipment

Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > OAM-FM Domain command.

The OAM-FM Domain contextual area opens where the name and level of the OAM domain of the equipment
are displayed Fig.213.

Fig.213 - OAM-FM Domain contextual area

308

MN.00224.E - 011

If the Domain field is empty and available for the setting, this means that no OAM domain is defined for
the equipment. To define an OAM domain for an equipment

Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > OAM-FM Domain command. The OAM-FM Domain contextual area opens (see Fig.213).

Into the Domain box, type the OAM domain name of the equipment (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 45 characters).

Move the cursor Level over a number between 0 and 7 according to the priority level you wish to
assign to the OAM domain (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).

Press Create.

The equipment is associated to the set OAM domain.

31.2

OAM-FM MA/MEP

This command is available only if an OAM domain has been defined for the equipment (see Fig.213).
The OAM-FM MA/MEP command manages the maintenance points of the OAM domain of the equipment.
To verify the status of the VLANs as regards the OAM Ethernet protocol

Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > OAM-FM MA/MEP command.

The OAM-FM MA/MEP contextual area opens, pointing out the status of the VLANs in relation to the OAM
Ethernet protocol.

Fig.214 - OAM-FM MA/MEP contextual area
Every VLAN is represented by a rectangle whose characteristics are described here below see Fig.215.

Fig.215 - Vlan status and commands

MN.00224.E - 011

309

31.3

VLAN IDENTIFIER - VLAN NAME - ETHERNET SWITCH PORT

Status of the port as regards the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the VLAN:

----, the port is not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan, other possible settings are: Untag, Tagged, Unmodif.

Name of the MA (Maintenance Association) associated to the VLAN.
Identifier of the MEP (Maintenance End Point) associated to the VLAN.
Only one VLAN at a time can be selected.
The Vlan must be into the range 2-4094 to be into OAM functionality.
Push-buttons:

Bind MA. Creates a MA and MIP.

Bind MEP. Creates a MEP.

Unbind. Removes the MA and/or the MEP associated to the VLAN.

The availability of the push-buttons depends on the status of the selected VLAN.
If a MA or a MEP is associated to the VLAN, only the Unbind push-button will be available.
In Fig.214 the arrow shows direction of messages, in this case the messages are sent into the equipment
at Lan 3 port. Further details can be found into Help on-line of WebLct for ALCplus2.

310

MN.00224.E - 011

32

LINE-UP ELP

32.1

ETHERNET LINE PROTECTION (ELP)

The Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) is a function which allows implementing a protection at physical level
(Level 2) between two or more LAN external ports.
When the user enables the Ethernet line protection, even the management of the ELP switch is enabled.
The switch operates in automatic mode: the equipment executes the switch when the LOS alarm is present
on the LAN port in service. When the alarm clears, the controller does not execute the switch again.
The Ethernet line protection is implemented by means of proprietary protocol. As consequence, the ELP
switch is managed without considering alarms or settings executed on the equipment on the other side of
the LAN connection.
In ALCplus2 equipment, the line Ethernet protection can be enabled at equipment level or at node level.
This last chance is available and meaningful only for the equipment belonging to an ALCplus2 node and
which are interconnected to other node elements through the nodal Bus Ethernet.

Fig.216 - ELP Enabling Protection
There are two groups of protection: Protection1 and Protection2. One group may have Lan1…Lan4 up to 4
ports. Normal situation is two ports on Protection1 and two ports on Protection2. Protection1 can go to one
IDU Protection2 to a second IDU. Selection between ports is based on priority and cost.
The port with highest priority (that is lowest number) is selected. The port with lowest cost is selected
(ports with same speed, as the protected two, have same cost).

MN.00224.E - 011

311

33

LINE-UP ACL

33.1

ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL)

Access Control List (ACL) permits to define a list of IP address allowed to control the equipment.
It is possible to define some address or a range of address.
It is possible to create a white list or a black list.
Before activating Enable please create the list of allowed IP address, see Fig.217.
After creating a correct list of allowed IP address it is possible to Enable the ACL, see Fig.218.
Warning: with no address into the list and Enable active no computer can access the equipment via Lan.
With USB cable it is always possible to access the equipment.

ACL is effective only on local equipment, remote equipment reached by routing are not affected by local
ACL.

Fig.217 - Inserting allowed IP address

312

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.218 - List of allowed IP address

MN.00224.E - 011

313

34

LINE-UP SYNCHRONISATION

34.1

LINE-UP SYNCHRONISATION

With reference to Fig.219 let’s do the examples:

(Sync transmitted via Radio frame timing)

Local

Remote

SETS

SETS

NBUS

STM -1
NBUS

LAN3 , 4

STM-1
TRIBA =
2MHz/2Mbit

LAN3 , 4

TRIBB = 2Mbit

TRIBA = 2MHz/2Mbit

TRIB 1 -16 = 2Mbit

TRIBB = 2Mbit
TRIB 1 -16 = 2Mbit

Fig.219 - Sync transmitted from local to remote radio
Examples:
1. Synchronisation is coming from Lan3 local (working at 14 Gbit) and it is exiting from Lan3 on remote
radio
2. Synchronisation is coming from E1 tributary 1 and it is exiting from E1 tributary 1 on remote radio.

314

MN.00224.E - 011

34.2

SYNCHRONISATION FROM LAN3 AT 1GBIT/S

The starting point is that local SETS circuit is synchronised by an external source which may be one of the
sources shown in the picture so also Lan3 or Tributary 1. Sources can be one or many with different priority.
Synchronization signal is transmitted from local radio to remote radio via radio frame timing.
Remote SETS is synchronised by incoming radio frame generated by local SETS that is with SDH quality.
All local signals are generated by SETS and will have the same frequency precision and stability.
Settings at local radio:
See Fig.220.
With WebLct go to Configurator -> Sync Enable -> Enable, press Apply and Confirm. Now into Equipment
Menu a new item Synchronization is available.
See Fig.221 into Synchronization the system is synchronised from Internal Source.
See Fig.222, now select TE-Lan3 and select Enabled with priority 1 which is the maximum.
See Fig.223, now if Lan3 is connected to a Lan port working at 1Gbit, the SETS is synchronised by Lan 3.
But Lan 3 Interface must be programmed as Slave and external Lan port must be programmed as Master
(for Gbit clock).
Now if local radio is receiving a correct signal, the SETS is synchronized by Lan 3 as in Fig.224
Settings at remote radio:
On remote radio enable synchronization as Fig.220.
On remote radio into Synchronization SETS folder select Radio and Enable with Priority 1. See Fig.225.
Now if remote radio is receiving a correct signal the SETS is synchronized by radio as in Fig.226.

34.3

SYNCHRONIZATION FROM E1

See Fig.227.
E1 tributary N is used as a signal transfer and a synchronization source for external equipment into remote
site.
Local SETS is synchronised by E1 Trib. 1. Remote radio SETS is synchronised by receiving radio frame.
We must Enable E1 Retiming so the E1 Trib. 1 at remote site can be used by external equipment as an
SDH synchronism source as in Fig.228.

MN.00224.E - 011

315

Fig.220

Fig.221

316

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.222

Fig.223

MN.00224.E - 011

317

Fig.224

Fig.225

318

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.226

(Sync transmitted via Radio frame timing)

Remote

Local

SETS

SETS
Modem

TRIB1

Modem
Memory

TRIB1

E1Trib1 used as 2Mbit timing source on remote for external equipment, needs
E1 retiming = Enabled on remote
Local = SETS synchronised by TRIB1
Remote = SETS synchronised by Radio, TRIB1 distributing synchronisation
(and data) to external equipment
Fig.227 - E1 retiming

MN.00224.E - 011

319

Fig.228

320

MN.00224.E - 011

Section 5.
COMMISSIONING REPORT

35

COMMISSIONING REPORT FOR ALCPLUS2E IDU

35.1

GENERAL INFORMATIONS

This chapter describes how to prepare a commissioning report regarding the installation of a link.
This report helps an installation team in the check of all the steps performed during the job.

35.1.1

Documentation

The site is installed and commissioned according to the following documentation set:
DOCUMENT NUMBER
1

DOCUMENT NAME
MN.00224 User Manual

The site must be installed and commissioned according to the Link document.
Checked
Item

DESCRIPTION

1

Enclosed copy of the Link project

2

Enclosed report of the factory test

3

Enclosed antenna data

MN.00224.E - 011

OK


NOT OK

321

35.1.2

Site Identifiers

Identifier of LOCAL Site
Identifier of REMOTE Site
Link identifier (from/to)

35.1.3

Configurations

Terminal (Site A or Site B)
IDU Part number
IDU Serial number
Equipment Firmware

System Version

N50010 Ver.___.___.___

Web LCT

N96109 Ver.___.___.___

Equipment Modulation/Bandwidth
Equipment Configuration

1+0
2X(1+0) eth S.P.
XPIC

Antenna orientation:

1+1 HSB

1+1 FD

2X(1+0) eth D.P.
East-West

azimuth
Elevation

Polarization (H / V)
Cross
Polarization
Discrimination
(>30dB)(only for double polarization antennas)
Link ID
User Input 1
User Input 2
User Output 1

322

MN.00224.E - 011

35.1.4

Network addresses (DCN)

Equipment provided with IP/OSPF SW stack

Addresses
Agent IP address
Ethernet

.

.

.

.

IP Address

.

.

.

.

IP Net Mask

.

.

.

.

In Band Management
LCT PPP

Radio 1

OSPF Area

LAN1

LAN2

LAN3

LAN4

Port A

IP Address

.

.

.

.

IP Net Mask

.

.

.

.

IP Address

.

.

.

.

IP Net Mask

.

.

.

.

PPP Mode

Client

Server

Bridge

Radio 2

IP Address

.

.

.

.

(East-West)

IP Net Mask

.

.

.

.

Line EOC

Default Gateway

PPP Mode

Client

Server

Bridge

IP Address

.

.

.

.

IP Net Mask

.

.

.

.

PPP Mode

Client

EOC Settings

E1 Time Slot n. ________
.

Server

.

.

.

Interface

MN.00224.E - 011

323

Equipment provided with OSI SW stack
ADDRESSES
Agent IP address
Ethernet

LCT PPP

IP over OSI

NSap

.

.

.

.

IP Address

.

.

.

.

IP Net Mask

.

.

.

.

IP Address

.

.

.

.

IP Net Mask

.

.

.

.

IP Address

.

.

.

.

IP Net Mask

.

.

.

.

EOC radio

User

Network

East-West

Radio 1

Radio 2

Gosip address

Default Gataway

AFI

Domain
.

Area
.

Bridge

System ID
.

Sel.
.

Interface

Test Check

Passed----->

Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:
Date:

324

for Siae:

MN.00224.E - 011

35.2

SITE INSPECTION

Note: The purpose of this inspection is to be sure that the site is ready for the commissioning of the Radio

Link.
Checked
Item
1

DESCRIPTION

OK


NOT OK

Grounding connections present and properly installed

1.1

Grounding connection of the rack

1.2

Grounding connection of the IDU unit

1.3

Grounding connection of the ODU unit

1.4

Grounding connection of metallic structures for the equipment support
(if foreseen)

2

Check of the proper installation and tensile stress of the windbracings,
if required

3

Structure for the support of the ODU unit correctly installed and oriented to the required direction

4

Grounding Kit cables properly installed

5

Feeder and tails properly installed and fixed to the supports

6

Panel for antenna cable ingress drilled and provided with gaskets for
tin passage

7

Rack properly installed and fixed to wall and/or to floor

8

Cables in internal site properly fixed and labelled

8.1.

IDU/ODU cables (labelled on both sides)

8.2.

Tributary cables

8.3.

Power cables (cables labelled on both sides, labels on switches)

Notes:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Test Check

Passed----->

Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:
Date:

MN.00224.E - 011

for Siae:

325

35.3

COMMISSIONING CHECKS

Checked
Item
1

DESCRIPTION

OK

Check of the received material, recording of the possible defects

1.2

Recording of the damages caused by the transport

1.3

Factory Reports enclosed to SSD

2

Power supply voltage and polarity corresponding to the specifications

3

Cables connected and waveguide

3.1

IDU/ODU cables

3.2

Tributary cables

3.3

Alarm cables

3.4

Power supply cables

3.5

DCN cables and/or inserted terminations (if used, otherwise present)
Configurations in compliance with the Link documentation
Enabled

Disabled

Trib A

Priority:_____

Trib B

SETS
4.1

Synchronization

E1 retiming enabled
4.2

STM-1 MST mode

4.3

Radio Branch label

4.4

TX SW on rem alarm

4.5

RX alarm Threshold

326

Trib n___

None

Priority:________

STM-1 n.2

Priority:________

Radio 1A

Priority:_____
Priority:_____

LAN A n.__________

Priority:_____

LAN B n. __________

Priority:_____

Trib.A normal

Trib.A T2

Trib.A T3

Trib.B normal

Trib.B T2

Trib.B T3

Tributary n._______

1+0

1+1 MSP

Branch 1 Name:_____________
Enable

Priority:_____

STM-1 n.1

Radio 2A

E1 Source type

5

NOT OK

Equipment setup

1.1

4

Disable

1+1 MSP no ALS

Branch 2 Name:______________

Check Period_____

Alarm Thr_____

-_______dBm

Radio parameters

5.1

Set TX and RX frequencies Branch 1

5.2

Set TX and RX frequencies Branch 2 (1)

TX1 (MHz):
RX1 (MHz):
TX2 (MHz):
RX2 (MHz):

MN.00224.E - 011

5.3

RF channel number Branch 1

5.4

RF channel number Branch 2 (1)

5.5

TX Power set by webLCT - Branch 1

dBm

5.6

TX Power set by webLCT - Branch 2 (1)

dBm

6

ATPC

6.1

TX Power control Branch 1

Manual

Automatic (ATPC) Range(dB)__

6.2

TX Power control Branch 2 (1)

Manual

Automatic (ATPC) Range(dB)__

6.3

ATPC PRX threshold Branch 1

High:_________

Low________

6.4

ATPC PRX threshold Branch 2 (1)

High:_________

Low________

7

Modulation / Bandwidth and ACM
Branch 1

MHz/QAM

Branch 2a

MHz/QAM

7.1

Reference Bandwidth and Modulation

7.2

ACM engine

7.3

TX power ramp up to

QAM

7.4

Upper Modulation

QAM

7.5

Lower Modulation

QAM

7.6

Permanent TDM Traffic

Enabled
Disabled

Radio 1A TDM number
Radio 2A TDM numbera.
Radio 1A Extra TDM n. Radio 2A Extra TDM n.a.

Modulation
4QAM-st
4QAM
8PSK
7.7

ACM table profiles

16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM

8

Received signal level

8.1

RSL in reference mod. - Branch 1

b

dBm

8.2

RSL in reference mod. - Branch 2

a. b.

dBm

8.3

RSL in max. mod. - Branch 1

b.

dBm

8.4

RSL in max. mod. - Branch 2

a. b.

dBm

9
9.1
9.2

RX quality Link
Maximum Modulation with ACM Branch 1

c

Maximum Modulation with ACM Branch 2

QAM
a. c.

QAM

9.3

S/N max. Mod. in ACM - RX Branch 1

b. d

dB

9.4

S/N max. Mod. in ACM - RX Branch 2

a. b. d.

dB

MN.00224.E - 011

327

10

1+1 Coupler (if present)

10.1

Hybrid type

10.2

Attenuation Branch 1 by factory report (dB)

dB

10.3

Attenuation Branch 2 by factory report (dB)

dB

11

Balanced

General settings

11.1

Web LCT Measurements Resolution

11.2

Radio Switch TX Preferential

11.3

Set Active manual operation timeout = 2 s.

12

Unbalanced

___________dB
Auto

Branch 1 (if unbalanced hybrid)
WAIT TIME = 30s

Cross Connection list

a.

Only in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) configurations.

b.

Checked by WebLCT indication, in compliance with User Manual Addendum.

c.

Checked by WebLCT indication, in compliance with the project report.

d. In case of ACM enabled, indicate S/N measure related to the upper modulation scheme in compliance
with the project report.

Test Check

Passed----->

Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:
Date:

328

for Siae:

MN.00224.E - 011

35.4

COMMISSIONING MEASURES

Configure the Link as defined in the following figure.

35.4.1

Tributary connections stability

Fig.229
Connect an E1 Transmission analyser to the DDF and check NO ERRORS or ALARMS for each E1 tributaries.
Connect all Ethernet tributaries to the router/switch and check NO ALARMS (i.e LAN LOS) for each ETH
tributaries.
Checked
Item
1

DESCRIPTION

OK

NOT OK

Check NO ERRORS or ALARMS for each E1, STM-1 and ETH tributaries.
Check mechanical stability of the connections.

E1 TRIBUTARY

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

A

B

1

2

1

2

3

4

ERRORS / ALARMS
E1 TRIBUTARY
ERRORS / ALARMS
E1 TRIBUTARY
ERRORS / ALARMS
STM-1
ERRORS / ALARMS
ETH TRIBUTARY
ALARMS

Test Check

Passed----->

Failed----->

Comments:
Executed by:
Date:

MN.00224.E - 011

for Siae:

329

35.4.2

Link Fade Margin

Configure the Link as defined in the following figure:

Fig.230
Disable the ACM Engine and set the modulation scheme in compliance with the reference modulation by
project.
SIAE Microelettronica radio systems have an embedded PTX manual attenuation (up to 20dB for the ODU
Universal ASN, using the automatic Fade Margin procedure by webLCT, and up to 40 for the ODU Advanced
AS-03) in order to attenuate via SW the transmit power and therefore the received field in the opposite
station. If the TX internal attenuation is not enough to verify the Link Fade Margin, there are two solutions:

insert a fixed or variable attenuator between the ODU and the antenna (recommended solution).

verify the Link Fade Margin in the maximum modulation available, only if the Link project report
include all parameters about this modulation (Calculated Fade Margin, RX threshold, etc.).

Fill the following table
.

DESCRIPTION
Fade Margin results
(based on automatic FM procedure by webLct)
Calculated Fade Margin [Real FM]

dB

Value returned from LOCAL TX1 to REMOTE RX1 [Real FM verified]

dB

Value returned from LOCAL TX1 to REMOTE RX2 [Real FM verified]

a

dB

Value returned from LOCAL TX2 to REMOTE RX1 [Real FM verified]

a.

dB

Value returned from LOCAL TX2 to REMOTE RX2 [Real FM verified]

a. b

dB

a.
b.

in 1+1 HSB configuration.
in 1+1 FD or 2x(1+0) configuration.

Test Check

Passed----->

Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:
Date:

330

for Siae:

MN.00224.E - 011

35.4.3

Loops and maintenance

Fig.231
All available line loops are explained in the following Figure.

Fig.232

Line Local Loop
Enable tributary PPI 1 and connect a PDH analyser (Tx, Rx) on the local NE tributary E1#1. Set E1#1 to
"Line Loop On".

Fig.233
After the loop no errors are reported on PDH analyser.

Remote Local Loop
Enable tributary E1#1 (on local and remote NE) and connect a PDH analyser (Tx, Rx) on the local NE tributary E1#1. Set on Remote NE E1#1 to "Remote LoopOn".

Fig.234
After the loop no errors are reported on PDH analyser.

MN.00224.E - 011

331

IF Loop
Enable tributary PPI 1 (on local and remote NE) and connect a PDH analyser (Tx, Rx) on the local NE tributary E1#1 (PPI 1).
Set on IF Loop to "On"

Fig.235
After the loop no errors are reported on PDH analyser.

RF Loop
Enable tributary PPI 1 (on local and remote NE) and connect a PDH analyser (Tx, Rx) on the local NE tributary E1#1 (PPI 1).
Set on RF Loop to "On". (RF loop is available only on AS-03 ODU)
After the loop no errors are reported on PDH analyser.
Test Check

Passed----->

Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:
Date:

332

for Siae:

MN.00224.E - 011

35.5

ETHERNET TEST

IDU Settings
To verify the Ethernet performances set both equipment following this table:

GENERAL Switch Parameters

Max Packet size

2048 byte

MAC Learning Vid Basis

Enable

Aging Time

300

QinQ Eth Type

0x9100

Radio Packet Fragment

Disabled

PORT PARAMETERS
Interface
Port

Rate Control M/S Autoneg Master/Slave Flow Control Cable crossover

Lan 1

Full Rate

Port A

Enable

Enable

Master

Disable

Mac Learning Speed/Duplex

Auto

Enable

Auto

Enable

PORT BASED VLAN
Lan 1
Lan 1

Lan 2

Lan 3

Lan 4

Port A

Port B

Disable

Disable

Disable

Enable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Lan 2

Disable

Lan 3

Disable

Disable

Lan 4

Disable

Disable

Disable

Port A

Enable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Port B

---

---

---

---

MN.00224.E - 011

Disable
---

333

Ethernet Tributary test
Connect the PC as shown in the following figure and set IP Ethernet Address in the same subnetwork of
the MNGT/1 IP Ethernet of the remote terminal.
Connect, by means of a CAT5 cable, LAN1 port to MNGT/1 IP Ethernet port of the remote terminal.
A ping test between the PC and the MNG/1 port of the remote terminal, connecting them directly through
a CAT-5E cable, is required.

Fig.236

RESULT
OK

NOT OK

PING test

Test Check

Passed----->

Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:
Date:

334

for Siae:

MN.00224.E - 011

35.5.1

Link Residual BER test

Configure the Link as defined in the following figure:

Fig.237
Checked
Item
3

DESCRIPTION

NOT OK

Link Residual BER via internal PRBS test set (by Web LCT)

3.1

Unprotected system 1+0:

measure >12 hours

3.2

Protected system 1+1:

measure >12 hours on Branch 1 (manual switch)

3.3
4

OK

measure >12 hour on Branch 2 (manual switch)
Measure Report (if available)

Values accepted for 12h measure
NO ERRORS
(Guaranteed RBER limit < 1e-12)

Test Check

Passed----->

Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:
Date:

MN.00224.E - 011

for Siae:

335

35.6

FINAL CHECK LIST

Checked
Item

a.

ALARM CABLING (IF REQUIRED)

OK

5

Alarm cable terminated on terminal block

6

Alarms cabled in compliance with the specifications in rule

7

Check of the functionality of the alarm cabling forcing the error condition on
the equipment

NOT OK

a

Alarm list to cable on Customer's demand

Checked
Item
1

DESCRIPTION

OK

Not OK

Completed equipment

1.1

All the connectors properly tightened

1.2

Antenna fixing properly tightened

1.3

Radio Link System on

1.4

Installation, Commissioning and Integration completely executed

Test Check

Passed----->

Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:
Date:

336

for Siae:

MN.00224.E - 011

35.7

FINAL REPORT

35.7.1

Link activation date

Item
1

DESCRIPTION

DATE
dd/mm/yyyy

Radio link activated in service

Notes:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________

MN.00224.E - 011

337

35.7.2

Certificate

FINAL TEST CERTIFICATE

This certificates that the equipment listed below with the respective order/s has passed the Final Test.

Order number

Equipment Type:

Site / Terminal ID:

Company

Date

Name

Signature

For SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A

SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A.
Via Michelangelo Buonarroti, 21 - 20093 Cologno Monzese, Milano - Italy - Tel +39 0227325.1 - FAX +39 0225391585

www.siaemic.com

338

MN.00224.E - 011

Section 6.
MAINTENANCE

36

ALARMS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

36.1

GENERAL

In these pages a description of alarms is given in order to help operators to perform equipment troubleshooting.

36.2

FAULTY CONDITION

A faulty condition is pointed out by LEDs on front panel (alarm area) or by alarms reported by management
software. Power ON LEDs are not considered (equipment are ON).

36.2.1

Front panel LEDs

ALplus2

FAIL: controller self test failed (red LED)

PoE: Power Over Ethernet enabled (green LED)

URG: critical and/or major alarms (red LED)

NURG: minor and/or warning alarms (red LED)

SW: firmware mismatch (red LED)

TEST: local manual operation active (yellow LED).

MN.00224.E - 011

339

ALCplus2/ALCplus2e

FAIL: controller self test failed (red LED)

URG: critical and/or major alarms (red LED)

NURG: minor and/or warning alarms (red LED)

SW: firmware mismatch (red LED)

TEST: local manual operation active (yellow LED).

36.2.2

SCT/WEBLCT alarm window

SCT
Active and old alarms can be monitored in Event History Log area, with alarm correlation between starting
and clearing time. Alarms are from all the equipment reached by SCT.
Active alarms only, can be monitored in Current Alarms window. Alarms are from selected equipment only.

WEBLCT
In Event List area of WEBLCT all alarms are listed, local ones on the left, remote ones on the right (.... if
Remote List is well configured).
Moving the mouse over an alarm, its starting time, severity and group information are pointed out. There
is correlation between starting and clearing time.

36.2.3

Direction of an alarm

When an alarm occurs, its origin can be hardware or can be a problem caused by failures or a bad situation
(propagation and/or configuration mismatch) in previous parts of the equipment: an alarm can be caused
by previous alarms and, not only, the same alarm can produce further alarms.
In this way, it/s important to understand the direction of the problem described by alarms.

Tx direction, from LIM to ODU flange
A problem in LIM can cause alarms in ODU also: when a situation of more alarms is occurring, the most
significant alarm is at the beginning of Tx chain, all the others following are due to this.

Rx direction, from ODU flange to LIM
A problem in ODU, or in far end terminal, can cause alarms in LIM also: when a situation of more alarms
is occurring, the most significant alarm is at the beginning of Rx chain, all the others following are due to
this.

36.2.4

Alarms group

Alarms are divided in groups regarding the module that has generated them or the described function.

340

MN.00224.E - 011

Common
Alarms related to Controller module and EOC channel.

ETH LAN
Alarms (internal and external) regarding Ethernet traffic and relevant ports.

LIM
Alarms coming from LIM failure or from:

Tx direction - external failure (tributary LOS)

Rx direction - alarms in previous module (RIM, ODU) or external failure (bad propagation or remote
alarmed or no remote)

Node
Alarm relevant the connections between the IDUs composing the node.

Performance Monitoring
Alarms regarding all measurements performed in Performance Monitoring section.

Plug-in module
Alarms relevant the plug-in modules used for STM-1 lines.

Port service
Alarms relevant the service ports used in the link.

Radio
Alarms not relevant to a specific module but relevant to the link.

RIM
Alarms coming from RIM failure or from:

Tx direction - alarm in previous module (LIM) or external failure (tributary LOS)

Rx direction - alarms in previous module (IDU-ODU cable, ODU) or external failure (bad propagation
or remote alarmed or no remote)

RT
Alarms coming from RT (ODU) failure or from:

Tx direction - alarms in previous module (LIM, RIM, IDU-ODU cable) or external failure (tributary
LOS)

Rx direction - external failure (bad propagation or remote alarmed or no remote)

MN.00224.E - 011

341

SETS
Alarms (internal and external) relevant to the synchronism sources and their setting.

SNTP
Alarms regarding the SNTP server.

STM1
Alarms (internal and external) relevant to STM1 stream, line side.

36.3

ALARMS

Each alarm is ordered group by group with the following explanations:

hardware causes of the alarm

alarms that could have generated the alarm (if any)

alarms generated by the alarm (if any).

Alarms list is ordered as in the following tables.

36.3.1

Common alarms
Tab.40 -

Common alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
Alarms that could have
generated the alarm

Alarm

Causes

2Mb/s G704 Line Side AIS

Trib with EOC has AIS

2Mb/s G704 Line Side Fail

Trib with EOC is missing

2Mb/s G704 Radio Side AIS

Trib with EOC has AIS from remote

2Mb/s G704 Radio Side Fail

Trib with EOC is missing from remote

EOC trib LOS

Comm. 2Mb/s EOC Data Link

Trib with EOC is missing

EOC trib LOS

Comm. Radio EOC Data Link

Link EOC is missing

Link ID

Controller waiting for restore

Configuration mismatch (download
backup)

Equip. Man Op

Manual operation active (check list)

LAN Cable Fail

EOC LAN cable missing

RMON (Remote Monitoring)

Statistic Counter Ethernet

Fan

Rear Fans Failure

Rescue setup Active

Equipment in Rescue mode

OAM FM MEP

MEP not receiving

OAM FM MEP config.

MEP not configured properly

342

Alarm generated

EOC trib LOS

Telemetry Fail

MN.00224.E - 011

One Plus One
Configuration Mismatch

Master and Reserve configuration
Mismatch

Note: it can be cleared by
clicking on “IDU alignment”
button

One Plus One Twin alarmed

Twin Master (or Reserve) radio
alarmed

It may have generated a
switch

Branch 1, 2 XPIC Fail

Branch 1 or 2 XPIC failure

XPIC procedure Radio 1, 2 Xpic
disable (only for 1+0)

Fault Management Procedure active

Remote Xpic procedure Radio Fault Management Procedure active
1, 2 Xpic disable (only for 1+0)
into remote

36.3.2

Internal alarms

Local Xpic off
Remote Tx off

Remote internal alarms

Local Xpic off due to
Remote Tx off

ETH LAN alarms
Tab.41 - ETH LAN alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e

36.3.3

Alarm

Causes

Link loss

Loss of Ethernet signal

Sync

Gigabit frame not aligned

Auto Negotiation

Auto negotiation failed

Link loss forwarding

Link loss in remote ports

Master Slave Configuration

Configuration error

Lag Lacp Protocol Down

Link aggregation not working

LIM alarms
Tab.42 - LIM alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e

Alarm

Causes

Trib Signal Loss

Enabled trib missing or
disabled trib present

Trib AIS

AIS present in input

Modulator Fail

Modulator fail or without/low quality
input

Demodulator Fail

Demodulator fail or without/low quality input

ODU-IDU communication fail

Signal from ODU missing

Synch

Trib. Retiming not working

Temperature

IDU temperature > 75°C

MN.00224.E - 011

Alarms that could have
generated the alarm

Alarm generated

Fan

343

36.3.4

Node alarms
Tab.43 - Node alarms - ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
Alarms that could have
generated the alarm

Alarm

Causes

Los

NBUS cable missing

Lof

FAW not recognized

MsAis

MsAIS in NBUS frame payload

Check

Wrong NBUS connection order between IDUs

Config. Mismatch

Wrong Node configuration

36.3.5

Alarm generated

Performance Monitoring alarms

The following list of measurements can generate alarms if their thresholds are exceeded for a configurable
amount of seconds (regarding periods of 15 minutes or 24 hours):

G828 radio

quality measurements on signal radio received

G828 LimA E1 line side

quality measurements on E1 line side

G828 LimA E1 radio side

quality measurements on E1 radio side

Rx Pwr radio

Rx power measurements

Tx Pwr radio

Tx power measurements

ACM radio

ACM profile monitoring

G.829 RST B1

quality measurements on RST (STM1)

G.829 MST B2 M1

quality measurements on MST (STM1)

G.828 VC12

quality measurements on VC12 (STM1)

36.3.6

Plug-in alarms

The following alarms describe the plug-in status:

344

status change

module mismatch

module

los

MN.00224.E - 011

36.3.7

Radio alarms
Tab.44 - Radio alarms - ALplus/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
Alarms that could have
generated the alarm

Alarm

Causes

Link ID

Wrong ID received

Link Telemetry Fail

Radio link missing

Link ID

Revertive

Radio link working on reserve branch

Alarms of the preferential
branch

Tx Fail

Tx switch on remote Ber

PRBS Fail

PRBS not receiving

Reduced Capacity

Degraded radio link capacity (Actual
Tx modulation  Upper modulation)

36.3.8

Alarm generated
Link Telemetry Fail
Comm, radio EOC
data link

RIM alarms
Tab.45 - Radio alarms - ALplus/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
Alarms that could have
generated the alarm

Alarm

Causes

Power Supply

48 Vdc input missing, dc output not
compliant

RF unit not responding

Cable Open

IDU-ODU cable cut or not connected

RF unit not responding/
Comm. fail

Cable Short

IDU-ODU cable damaged (shortened)

RF unit not responding/
Comm. fail

Cable Open and Short
(both active)

Power supply is weak

RF unit not responding/
Comm. fail

MN.00224.E - 011

Alarm generated

345

36.3.9

RT alarms
Tab.46 - RT alarms - ALplus/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
Alarms that could have
generated the alarm

Alarm generated

Rx signal lower than Rx threshold

Remote Tx not working/
Bad propagation

LIM quality alarms

Tx power low

RT failure if Tx is ON

Man Op (Tx Off), Modulator
fail

IF fail

RT failure if Tx is ON

Man Op (Tx Off), Modulator
fail

RT VCO fail

RT failure

Rx quality alarm

BER  10-6

Bad propagation

Rx quality warning

BER  10-10

Bad propagation

IF out

Rx IF missing

Alarm

Causes

IDU-ODU communication

RT o relevant RIM damaged

Rx power low

36.3.10

Demod fail

SETS alarms
Tab.47 - SETS alarms - ALplus/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e

36.3.11

Alarm

Causes

T0Fail

T0 missing

FreeRunning

Equipment in FreeRunning status

Holdover

Equipment in Holdover status

SynkLos

Selected Synch missing

SynkDrift

Selected Synch bad quality

SNTP alarms
Tab.48 - SNTP alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e

346

Alarm

Causes

Unicast Server Lost

Server is missing

MN.00224.E - 011

36.3.12

STM1 alarms
Tab.49 - STM1 alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e

Alarm

Causes

Los

Enabled trib missing or disabled trib
present

Lof

FAW not recognised

B2ExcessiveBer

Excessive BER

B2SignalDegraded

Signal degraded

J0TraceIdentifierMismatch

J0received is not the expected one

MsAis

AIS in Multiplexer section

MsRdi

RDI in Multiplexer section

MN.00224.E - 011

Alarms that could have
generated the alarm

Alarm generated

EOC alarm

347

348

MN.00224.E - 011

Section 7.
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION

37

PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION

37.1

GENERAL

The radio equipment was designed to be easily programmed and supervised.
The following tools are implemented to the purpose:

SCT Subnetwork Craft Terminal + WEB LCT Local Craft Terminal. They are used for remote and local
control of a subnetwork consisted of a maximum of 100 radio equipment.

NMS5–UX Network Management. It is used for the remote control of an entire network consisted of
different SIAE equipment including radio equipment.

For details refer to relevant documentation. SCT/LCT documentation is available as help on–line.

37.2

WEBLCT

Equipment can be locally controlled by an embedded Web Server, the WEB LCT, and an http browser running on PC.
It is also available a software named SCT that can manage sub networks of SIAE Network Elements.
The hardware platform used by SCT is based on Personal Computer with at least the following characteristics:

HD with 100 Mbyte of free space

Windows XP/Windows Vista

Flash Player version 8.1 or higher

MN.00224.E - 011

349

Fault Management
The operator can check the status the equipment through an "Alarm Display Panel" that is automatically
updated by the system.
Alarm records are stored by the equipment in an history log together with all information which could be
of interest for the user, among which:

event occurrence date and time

equipment type and address

unit identification information

alarm description

event severity level

The operator can access the history log using different filters.

Equipment Configuration
The configuration parameters the operator can update from the WebLCT are:

System type (protected or not protected)

Channel bandwidth

ACM profiles

RF channel

ATPC enable/disable

ATPC Rx thresholds

RTPC

Rx power alarm threshold

Tributary port enable/disable

STM-1, VC4 and VC12 parameters

E1 cross connection matrix

Ethernet switch parameters

Synchronisation parameters

Alarm enable

Alarm severity

User inputs and relay configuration

TMN port configuration

Equipment Maintenance
The main maintenance parameters that the operator can update from the WebLCT are:

transmitter enable/disable

carrier only

loops5 (see Fig.238)

active state forcing in 1+1 configuration

PRBS

The following figure shows the loops that can be set from the WEBLCT, for any IDU configuration.
5 Line loops can be done for E1, STM-1 and Ethernet interfaces. Internal loops can be done for E1 and
STM-1 interfaces.

350

MN.00224.E - 011

Internal
loop (2)
IDU
Line
loop (1)

1.
2.
3.
4.

ODU
IDU
loop (3)

ODU
loop (4)

Line tributary loop
Internal tributary loop
IDU loop
RF loop
Fig.238 - Loop

Software management
A new firmware or a new WEBLCT release can be downloaded from the WEBLCT itself. Actual software release is reported to the operator.

Performance management
G828, Rx Power, Tx Power and ACM counters are calculated both on radio side and line side
All counters are available on 15 minutes basis and daily, the WEBLCT collects 16 blocks of 15 minutes counters showing in this way the history of 4 hours.
The user can Start and Stop the Performance Monitoring function.
The user can define a threshold for each counter, when the threshold is crossed an alarm is set by the
equipment, the performance alarm severity can be set by the operator.
Fig.239 reports all the Termination points for the performance monitoring supported by ALplus2.

G828 - 2 Mbit/s
radio side

G828 Radio 1

Rx&Tx
Power Radio 1

ODU1
G828 - B1 STM-1
G.829 B2 & M1 STM-1
Line side

IDU
ODU2

G828 - 2 Mbit/s
line side

Rx&Tx
Power Radio 2

G828 Radio 2
Fig.239 - Termination points for the Performance Monitoring
In addition to what shown in the figure above, the following performance monitoring features are available:

RMON for Ethernet port statistics, both on tributary and radio side

ACM performance monitoring counters

MN.00224.E - 011

351

Security Management
The WEBLCT Administrator creates and manages a set of user accounts, the security information (Password and User profile) is used for identification, authentication purpose.
Two operator levels are enabled depending on the profile assigned to the operator:

352

System: read and write user

RLOM: read only user.

MN.00224.E - 011

Section 8.
COMPOSITION

38

COMPOSITION OF ALPLUS2 IDU

38.1

GENERAL

The ALplus2 IDU is available in following versions:

1RU 1+0

1RU 1+1

1RU 2+0

All the units consist of plug-in modules as LIM/RIM/Controller that can individually be replaced.
Module part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.

38.2

IDU PART NUMBER

Every version is identified by a specific part number shown on a label (see Fig.242) attached on IDU, top
left side. Important power supply informations are also written.
The P/N consists of seven digits with the following meaning:

MN.00224.E - 011

353

Tab.50- IDU part number

38.3

Digit

Letter/number

Meaning

1

G

Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical
structure

2

A

AL equipment

3

I

Indoor installation

4 to 7

0165
0166

Modular 1+0 - 1 unit - 16E1 + 2xSTM1 + 3GE
Modular 1+1 - 1 unit - 16E1 + 2xSTM1 + 3GE

COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT

1+0/1+1/2+0 Ethernet version
The IDU consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER modules. Each module is identified through internal label indicating the relevant P/N.
The P/Ns are the following:
-

LIM

-

RIM

-

CONTROLLER.

SPEED

1

2

ON

3

48V
PoE
FAIL

10-100-1000 BaseT/100-1000 BaseX

1

STM1

Trib: 1-8

2

USER IN/OUT

RS232

MNGT/1

Trib: 9-16

LINK IDU ODU
ACT

LINK
ACT
LCT

+

ACT
LINK

MNGT/2

REM TEST

-

WAY
SIDE
CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

Fig.240 - IDU GAI0165

1

2

ON

3

48V
PoE
FAIL

10-100-1000 BaseT/100-1000 BaseX

1

STM1

LINK IDU ODU
ACT

LINK
ACT
LCT

RS232

USER IN/OUT

MNGT/1

Trib: 9-16

Trib: 1-8

2

+

ACT
LINK

MNGT/2

REM TEST

48V

-

WAY
SIDE
CH1

CH2

2Mb/s

+

SPEED

-

Fig.241 - IDU GAI0166

354

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.242 - IDU P/N

MN.00224.E - 011

355

39

COMPOSITION OF ALCPLUS2 IDU

39.1

GENERAL

The ALCplus2 IDU is available in many versions depending on he kind and the number of user connections
and facilities. The versions are listed in the following chapter and are offered in two different configuration:

1RU 1+0

1RU 1+1.

All of them consist of a single unit.

Unit part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.

39.2

IDU PART NUMBER

Every version is identified by a specific part number shown on a label (seeFig.242) attached on IDU, top
left side. Important power supply informations are also written.

ALCplus2 1+0 4GE 2xE1

GAI0157 (see Fig.243)

ALCplus2 1+1 4GE 2xE1

GAI0152 (see Fig.244)

ALCplus2 1+0 4GE 18xE1

GAI0155 (see Fig.245)

ALCplus2 1+1 4GE 18xE1

GAI0156 (see Fig.246)

ALCplus2 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1

GAI0169 (see Fig.247)

ALCplus2 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1

GAI0168 (see Fig.248)

ALCplus2 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 Nodal

GAI0163 (see Fig.249)

ALCplus2 1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 Nodal

GAI0162 (see Fig.250)

SPEED

YELLOW

LAN 2

Trib. B

LAN 4

2

M 3.15A
250VAC

MNGT

LAN 3

LAN 4

LINK

LAN 1

Trib. A

LAN 3

SD

SW
TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

+

GREEN

48VDC

NURG URG
LCT

1

-

Fig.243 - ALCplus2 1+0

SPEED

LAN 2

Trib. B

LAN 4

2
LAN 3

LAN 4
LCT

LINK

LAN 1

LAN 3

48VDC

NURG URG

1
GREEN

2

M 3.15A
250VAC

MNGT

Trib. A

1
SD

USER IN/OUT

2

1
SW
TEST ON

+

YELLOW

-

Fig.244 - ALCplus2 1+1

356

MN.00224.E - 011

SPEED

YELLOW

LAN 2

Trib. B

LAN 4

Trib. 1-8

Trib. 9-16

2

M 3.15A
250VAC

MNGT

LAN 3

LAN 4

LINK

LAN 1

Trib. A

LAN 3

SW
TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

SD

+

GREEN

48VDC

NURG URG
LCT

1

-

Fig.245 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp 16E1

SPEED

LAN 2

Trib. B

LAN 4

Trib. 1-8

Trib. 9-16

2
LAN 3

LAN 4

LINK

LAN 1

48VDC

NURG URG
LCT

1
GREEN

2

M 3.15A
250VAC

MNGT

Trib. A

LAN 3

1

1

2

SW
TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

SD

+

YELLOW

-

Fig.246 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp 16E1

LAN 2

Trib. B

STM1

LAN 4

Trib. 9-16

Trib. 1-8

Trib. 17-24

Trib. 25-32

2

1

2
MNGT

LAN 3

ON

LAN 4

NURG
LCT

1
GREEN

LINK

LAN 1

Trib. A

LAN 3

SW
TEST

USER IN/OUT

SD

URG

M 3.15A
250V

48V

-

+

SPEED

YELLOW

ON

Fig.247 - ALCplus2 1+0 32E1

SPEED

LAN 2

Trib. B

STM1

LAN 4

MNGT

LAN 3

ON

Trib. 9-16

LAN 1

Trib. 25-32
2
NURG

LCT
LINK

Trib. 17-24

LAN 4

1
GREEN

Trib. 1-8

2

1

2

Trib. A

LAN 3

1

2

M 3.15A
250V

48V
1

SW
TEST

USER IN/OUT

SD

URG

ON

-

+

YELLOW

Fig.248 - ALCplus2 1+1 32E1

SPEED

LAN 2

Trib. B

STM1

LAN 4

LAN 3

Trib. 9-16

2

ON

MNGT

M 3.15A
250VAC

NBUS

LAN 4

48VDC

NURG URG
LCT

1
GREEN

Trib. 1-8
1

2

1

2

LINK

LAN 1

Trib. A

LAN 3

SW
TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

SD

+

YELLOW

-

Fig.249 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp nodal

SPEED

LAN 2

LAN 4

Trib. B

STM1

LAN 3

LAN 4

LAN 3

48VDC

NURG URG
LCT

LAN 1

2

M 3.15A
250VAC

NBUS

1
LINK

Trib. 9-16

2

ON

MNGT

GREEN

Trib. 1-8
1

2

1

2

Trib. A

1
SD

USER IN/OUT

2

1
SW
TEST ON

+

YELLOW

-

Fig.250 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp nodal

MN.00224.E - 011

357

40

COMPOSITION OF ALCPLUS2E IDU

40.1

GENERAL

The ALCplus2e IDU is available in many versions depending on he kind and the number of user connections
and facilities.
The versions are listed in the following chapter and are offered in two different configuration:

1RU 1+0

1RU 1+1.

Unit part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.

40.2

IDU PART NUMBER

Every version is identified by a specific part number shown on a label (seeFig.242) attached on IDU, top
left side. Important power supply informations are also written.

1+0
EPP

2+0/1+1
EPP

358

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1

GAI0178

See Fig.251

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1

GAI0177

See Fig.252

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL

GAI0176

See Fig.253

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1 EPP

GAI0189

See Fig.251

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 EPP

GAI0188

See Fig.252

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL EPP

GAI0187

See Fig.253

ALCplus2 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1

GAI0175

See Fig.254.

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1

GAI0174

See Fig.255

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL

GAI0173

See Fig.256

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1 EPP

GAI0186

See Fig.254

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 EPP

GAI0185

See Fig.255

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL
EPP

GAI0184

See Fig.256

MN.00224.E - 011

XPIC

2+0 or
1+0 XPIC
1+1 XPIC
EPP

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 2xE1

GAI0172

See Fig.254

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1

GAI0171

See Fig.255

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1
NODAL

GAI0170

See Fig.256

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 2xE1 EPP

GAI0183

See Fig.254

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1
EPP

GAI0182

See Fig.255

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1
NODAL EPP

GAI0181

See Fig.256.

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1

GAI0196

See Fig.257

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1

GAI0209

See Fig.252

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL

GAI0208

See Fig.253

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 EPP

GAI0195

See Fig.257.

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP

GAI0211

See Fig.252

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL

GAI0210

See Fig.253

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 18E1

GAI0194

See Fig.257

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1

GAI0205

See Fig.255

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL

GAI0204

See Fig.256

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 18E1 EPP

GAI0197

See Fig.257

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP

GAI0207

See Fig.255

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL

GAI0206

See Fig.257

EPP

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 PWE3

GAI0198

See Fig.257

Hw
PWE3 2+0/1+1
ready

EPP

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 EPP PWE3

GAI0199

See Fig.257

Hw
PWE3
ready

2+0

EPP

ALFCplus2e 2+0 XPIC 4GE 18E1 EPP PWE3

GAI0200

See Fig.257

Hw
STM1 bulk
PWE3
transmission
ready

1+0

EPP

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP PWE3

GAI0201

See Fig.252

Hw
STM1 bulk
PWE3 2+0/1+1
transmission
ready

EPP

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP
PWE3

GAI0202

See Fig.252

Hw
STM1 bulk
PWE3
transmission
ready

EPP

ALCplus2E 2+0 XPIC 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP
PWE3

GAI0203

See Fig.252

1+0
EPP

1+1
EPP

Hw
PWE3
ready

MN.00224.E - 011

1+0

2+0

359

YELLOW

SPEED

LAN 2

Trib. B

LAN 4

M 3.15A
250V

2
LAN 3

LAN 4
LCT

R
GREEN

LINK

LAN 1

48V

NURG URG

1

SW

Trib. A

LAN 3

+

MNGT

TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

-

Fig.251 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1

YELLOW

SPEED

LAN 2

Trib. B

STM1

LAN 4

Trib. 1-8

Trib. 17-24

Trib. 9-16

Trib. 25-32

2

1

2

ON
LAN 3

LAN 4
LCT

GREEN

LINK

LAN 1

SW

Trib. A

LAN 3

48V

M 3.15A
250V

NURG URG

1

+

MNGT
R

TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

-

Fig.252 - ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1

SPEED

LAN 2

Trib. B

STM1

LAN 4

Trib. 1-8
1

2

1

2

LAN 3

Trib. 9-16

2

ON

MNGT

M 3.15A
250V

NBUS

LAN 4
LCT

GREEN

LINK

LAN 1

48V

NURG URG

1
R

SW

Trib. A

LAN 3

+

YELLOW

TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

-

Fig.253 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL

YELLOW

SPEED

LAN 2

Trib. B

LAN 4

2

M 3.15A
250V

2
LAN 3

1

LAN 4

1

2

1

LCT

R
GREEN

LINK

LAN 1

SW

Trib. A

LAN 3

48V

NURG URG

+

MNGT

TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

-

Fig.254 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1

LAN 2

Trib. B

STM1

LAN 4

Trib. 1-8

Trib. 9-16

Trib. 25-32
2

ON

MNGT

Trib. 17-24

2

1

2

LAN 3

2

1

LAN 4

1
GREEN

LINK

LAN 1

SW

Trib. A

LAN 3

48V
1

LCT

R

M 3.15A
250V

NURG URG

+

SPEED

YELLOW

TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

-

Fig.255 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1

SPEED

LAN 2

LAN 4

Trib. B

STM1
1

2

Trib. 1-8
1

2

MNGT

LAN 3

LAN 4

1

2

LINK

LAN 1

1
SW

Trib. A

LAN 3

48V

NURG URG

LCT

R
GREEN

2

M 3.15A
250V

NBUS

1

Trib. 9-16

2

ON

+

YELLOW

TEST ON

USER IN/OUT

-

Fig.256 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL

SPEED

LAN 2

Trib. B

Trib. 1-8

LAN 4

Trib. 9-16
2

2
MNGT
R
GREEN

LAN 3

1

LAN 4

1

LCT
LINK

LAN 1

LAN 3

Trib. A

2

NURG

URG

M 3.15A
250V

48V

SW
SD

USER IN/OUT

TEST

ON

+

YELLOW

-

1

Fig.257 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1

360

MN.00224.E - 011

41

COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT

41.1

GENERAL

The ODU consists of a mechanical structure that houses all the transceiver circuitry. In 1+1 HSB version
the connection to the antenna is performed through a passive hybrid.
Both transceiver and hybrid are offered in different versions depending on the operating bands, the antenna configuration etc...
A label (see Fig.258) attached on the ODU structure shows the most significant parameters as go/return
frequency value, subband, operating band and part number.
Part number identifies the ODU type. ODU description in the following tables shows frequency, go-return,
channel and capacity if specified.
For example:

ODU AS 11/530 ITU CH9L 2xSTM1 means:
ODU 11 GHz band frequency, 530 MHz go-return, CH9 Low fixed preset, 2xSTM1 capacity

ODU AS 23/1008 SB 2H means:
ODU 23 GHz band frequency, 1008 MHz go-return, 2 high subband.

In Tab.51, Tab.52 and Tab.53 various ODU versions and hybrid part number are listed.
Part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.
Tab.51 - Part number and description
RF band in GHz

MN.00224.E - 011

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS6L CH=1H

GE9185

ODU AS6L CH=1H

GE9185-03

ODU AS6L CH=1L

GE9184

ODU AS6L CH=1L

GE9184-03

ODU AS6L CH=2H

GE9187

ODU AS6L CH=2H

GE9187-03

ODU AS6L CH=2L

GE9186

ODU AS6L CH=2L

GE9186-03

ODU AS6L CH=3H

GE9189

ODU AS6L CH=3H

GE9189-03

ODU AS6L CH=3L

GE9188

ODU AS6L CH=3L

GE9188-03

361

RF band in GHz

6

362

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS6L CH=4H

GE9191

ODU AS6L CH=4H

GE9191-03

ODU AS6L CH=4L

GE9190

ODU AS6L CH=4L

GE9190-03

ODU AS6L CH=5H

GE9193

ODU AS6L CH=5H

GE9193-03

ODU AS6L CH=5L

GE9192

ODU AS6L CH=5L

GE9192-03

ODU AS6L CH=6H

GE9195

ODU AS6L CH=6H

GE9195-03

ODU AS6L CH=6L

GE9194

ODU AS6L CH=6L

GE9194-03

ODU AS6L CH=7H

GE9197

ODU AS6L CH=7H

GE9197-03

ODU AS6L CH=7L

GE9196

ODU AS6L CH=7L

GE9196-03

ODU AS6L CH=8H

GE9199

ODU AS6L CH=8H

GE9199-03

ODU AS6L CH=8L

GE9198

ODU AS6L CH=8L

GE9198-03

ODU AS6L SB=1H

GE9269

ODU AS6L SB=1H

GE9269-03

ODU AS6L SB=1L

GE9268

ODU AS6L SB=1L

GE9268-03

ODU AS6L SB=2H

GE9271

ODU AS6L SB=2H

GE9271-03

ODU AS6L SB=2L

GE9270

ODU AS6L SB=2L

GE9270-03

ODU AS6L SB=3H

GE9273

ODU AS6L SB=3H

GE9273-03

ODU AS6L SB=3L

GE9272

ODU AS6L SB=3L

GE9272-03

ODU AS6L SB=4H

GE9275

ODU AS6L SB=4H

GE9275-03

ODU AS6L SB=4L

GE9274

ODU AS6L SB=4L

GE9274-03

ODU AS6U CH=1H

GE9291

MN.00224.E - 011

RF band in GHz

6

MN.00224.E - 011

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS6U CH=1H

GE9291-03

ODU AS6U CH=1L

GE9290

ODU AS6U CH=1L

GE9290-03

ODU AS6U CH=2H

GE9293

ODU AS6U CH=2H

GE9293-03

ODU AS6U CH=2L

GE9292

ODU AS6U CH=2L

GE9292-03

ODU AS6U CH=3H

GE9295

ODU AS6U CH=3H

GE9295-03

ODU AS6U CH=3L

GE9294

ODU AS6U CH=3L

GE9294-03

ODU AS6U CH=4H

GE9297

ODU AS6U CH=4H

GE9297-03

ODU AS6U CH=4L

GE9296

ODU AS6U CH=4L

GE9296-03

ODU AS6U CH=5H

GE9299

ODU AS6U CH=5H

GE9299-03

ODU AS6U CH=5L

GE9298

ODU AS6U CH=5L

GE9298-03

ODU AS6U CH=6H

GE9301

ODU AS6U CH=6H

GE9301-03

ODU AS6U CH=6L

GE9300

ODU AS6U CH=6L

GE9300-03

ODU AS6U CH=7H

GE9303

ODU AS6U CH=7H

GE9303-03

ODU AS6U CH=7L

GE9302

ODU AS6U CH=7L

GE9302-03

ODU AS6U CH=8H

GE9305

ODU AS6U CH=8H

GE9305-03

ODU AS6U CH=8L

GE9304

ODU AS6U CH=8L

GE9304-03

ODU AS6U SB=1H

GE9285

ODU AS6U SB=1H

GE9285-03

ODU AS6U SB=1L

GE9284

ODU AS6U SB=1L

GE9284-03

ODU AS6U SB=2H

GE9287

ODU AS6U SB=2H

GE9287-03

363

RF band in GHz

6

7

364

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS6U SB=2L

GE9286

ODU AS6U SB=2L

GE9286-03

ODU AS6U SB=3H

GE9289

ODU AS6U SB=3H

GE9289-03

ODU AS6U SB=3L

GE9288

ODU AS6U SB=3L

GE9288-03

ODU AS6U SB=4H

GE9331

ODU AS6U SB=4L

GE9330

ODU AS7H/245 SB=1H

GE9137

ODU AS7H/245 SB=1H

GE9137-03

ODU AS7H/245 SB=1L

GE9136

ODU AS7H/245 SB=1L

GE9136-03

ODU AS7H/245 SB=2H

GE9139

ODU AS7H/245 SB=2H

GE9139-03

ODU AS7H/245 SB=2L

GE9138

ODU AS7H/245 SB=2L

GE9138-03

ODU AS7H/245 SB=3H

GE9141

ODU AS7H/245 SB=3H

GE9141-03

ODU AS7H/245 SB=3L

GE9140

ODU AS7H/245 SB=3L

GE9140-03

ODU AS7L/161 SB=1H

GE9253

ODU AS7L/161 SB=1H

GE9253-03

ODU AS7L/161 SB=1L

GE9252

ODU AS7L/161 SB=1L

GE9252-03

ODU AS7L/161 SB=2H

GE9255

ODU AS7L/161 SB=2H

GE9255-03

ODU AS7L/161 SB=2L

GE9254

ODU AS7L/161 SB=2L

GE9254-03

ODU AS7L/161 SB=3H

GE9257

ODU AS7L/161 SB=3H

GE9257-03

ODU AS7L/161 SB=3L

GE9256

ODU AS7L/161 SB=3L

GE9256-03

ODU AS7L/196 SB=1H

GE9009

ODU AS7L/196 SB=1H

GE9009-03

ODU AS7L/196 SB=1L

GE9008

ODU AS7L/196 SB=1L

GE9008-03

ODU AS7L/196 SB=2H

GE9011

MN.00224.E - 011

RF band in GHz

7

MN.00224.E - 011

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS7L/196 SB=2H

GE9011-03

ODU AS7L/196 SB=2L

GE9010

ODU AS7L/196 SB=2L

GE9010-03

ODU AS7L/196 SB=3H

GE9013

ODU AS7L/196 SB=3H

GE9013-03

ODU AS7L/196 SB=3L

GE9012

ODU AS7L/196 SB=3L

GE9012-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=10H

GE9329

ODU AS7M/154 SB=10L

GE9328

ODU AS7M/154 SB=10L

GE9328-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=1H

GE9173

ODU AS7M/154 SB=1H

GE9173-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=1L

GE9172

ODU AS7M/154 SB=1L

GE9172-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=2H

GE9175

ODU AS7M/154 SB=2H

GE9175-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=2L

GE9174

ODU AS7M/154 SB=2L

GE9174-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=3H

GE9177

ODU AS7M/154 SB=3H

GE9177-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=3L

GE9176

ODU AS7M/154 SB=3L

GE9176-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=4H

GE9179

ODU AS7M/154 SB=4H

GE9179-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=4L

GE9178

ODU AS7M/154 SB=4L

GE9178-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=5H

GE9181

ODU AS7M/154 SB=5H

GE9181-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=5L

GE9180

ODU AS7M/154 SB=5L

GE9180-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=7H

GE9323

ODU AS7M/154 SB=7H

GE9323-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=7L

GE9322

ODU AS7M/154 SB=7L

GE9322-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=8H

GE9325

ODU AS7M/154 SB=8H

GE9325-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=8L

GE9324

365

RF band in GHz

7

8

366

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS7M/154 SB=8L

GE9324-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=9H

GE9327

ODU AS7M/154 SB=9H

GE9327-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=9L

GE9326

ODU AS7M/154 SB=9L

GE9326-03

ODU AS7M/161 SB=1H

GE9259

ODU AS7M/161 SB=1H

GE9259-03

ODU AS7M/161 SB=1L

GE9258

ODU AS7M/161 SB=1L

GE9258-03

ODU AS7M/161 SB=2H

GE9261

ODU AS7M/161 SB=2H

GE9261-03

ODU AS7M/161 SB=2L

GE9260

ODU AS7M/161 SB=2L

GE9260-03

ODU AS7M/161 SB=3H

GE9263

ODU AS7M/161 SB=3H

GE9263-03

ODU AS7M/161 SB=3L

GE9262

ODU AS7M/161 SB=3L

GE9262-03

ODU AS7M/168 SB=1H

GE9015

ODU AS7M/168 SB=1H

GE9015-03

ODU AS7M/168 SB=1L

GE9014

ODU AS7M/168 SB=1L

GE9014-03

ODU AS7M/168 SB=2H

GE9017

ODU AS7M/168 SB=2H

GE9017-03

ODU AS7M/168 SB=2L

GE9016

ODU AS7M/168 SB=2L

GE9016-03

ODU AS7M/168 SB=3H

GE9019

ODU AS7M/168 SB=3H

GE9019-03

ODU AS7M/168 SB=3L

GE9018

ODU AS7M/168 SB=3L

GE9018-03

ODU AS8/266 SB=1H

GE9279

ODU AS8/266 SB=1H

GE9279-03

ODU AS8/266 SB=1L

GE9278

ODU AS8/266 SB=1L

GE9278-03

ODU AS8/266 SB=2H

GE9281

ODU AS8/266 SB=2H

GE9281-03

ODU AS8/266 SB=2L

GE9280

ODU AS8/266 SB=2L

GE9280-03

MN.00224.E - 011

RF band in GHz

8

11

MN.00224.E - 011

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS8/266 SB=3H

GE9283

ODU AS8/266 SB=3H

GE9283-03

ODU AS8/266 SB=3L

GE9282

ODU AS8/266 SB=3L

GE9282-03

ODU AS8/310 SB=1H

GE9145

ODU AS8/310 SB=1H

GE9145-03

ODU AS8/310 SB=1L

GE9144

ODU AS8/310 SB=1L

GE9144-03

ODU AS8/310 SB=2H

GE9147

ODU AS8/310 SB=2H

GE9147-03

ODU AS8/310 SB=2L

GE9146

ODU AS8/310 SB=2L

GE9146-03

ODU AS8/310 SB=3H

GE9149

ODU AS8/310 SB=3H

GE9149-03

ODU AS8/310 SB=3L

GE9148

ODU AS8/310 SB=3L

GE9148-03

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=1H

GE9051

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=1H

GE9051-01

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=1H

GE9051-03

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=1L

GE9050

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=1L

GE9050-01

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=1L

GE9050-03

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=2H

GE9053

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=2H

GE9053-01

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=2H

GE9053-03

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=2L

GE9052

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=2L

GE9052-01

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=2L

GE9052-03

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=3H

GE9265

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=3H

GE9265-03

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=3L

GE9264

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=3L

GE9264-03

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=4H

GE9267

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=4H

GE9267-03

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=4L

GE9266

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=4L

GE9266-03

ODU AS11 - G/R490 CH=9H

GE9129-03

367

RF band in GHz

11

368

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS11 SB=1H

GE9235

ODU AS11 SB=1H

GE9235-03

ODU AS11 SB=1L

GE9234

ODU AS11 SB=1L

GE9234-03

ODU AS11 SB=2H

GE9237

ODU AS11 SB=2H

GE9237-03

ODU AS11 SB=2L

GE9236

ODU AS11 SB=2L

GE9236-03

ODU AS11 SB=3H

GE9239

ODU AS11 SB=3H

GE9239-03

ODU AS11 SB=3L

GE9238

ODU AS11 SB=3L

GE9238-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=10H

GE9131

ODU AS11/490 CH=10L

GE9130

ODU AS11/490 CH=11H

GE9133

ODU AS11/490 CH=11H

GE9133-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=11L

GE9132

ODU AS11/490 CH=11L

GE9132-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=12H

GE9135

ODU AS11/490 CH=12L

GE9134

ODU AS11/490 CH=1H

GE9113

ODU AS11/490 CH=1L

GE9112

ODU AS11/490 CH=2H

GE9115

ODU AS11/490 CH=2L

GE9114

ODU AS11/490 CH=3H

GE9117

ODU AS11/490 CH=3L

GE9116

ODU AS11/490 CH=4H

GE9119

ODU AS11/490 CH=4H

GE9119-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=4L

GE9118

ODU AS11/490 CH=4L

GE9118-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=5H

GE9121

ODU AS11/490 CH=5H

GE9121-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=5L

GE9120

ODU AS11/490 CH=5L

GE9120-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=6H

GE9123

ODU AS11/490 CH=6L

GE9122

ODU AS11/490 CH=7H

GE9125

MN.00224.E - 011

RF band in GHz

11

MN.00224.E - 011

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS11/490 CH=7H

GE9125-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=7L

GE9124

ODU AS11/490 CH=7L

GE9124-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=8H

GE9127

ODU AS11/490 CH=8H

GE9127-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=8L

GE9126

ODU AS11/490 CH=8L

GE9126-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=9H

GE9129

ODU AS11/490 CH=9L

GE9128

ODU AS11/490 CH=9L

GE9128-03

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=10H

GE9229

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=10L

GE9228

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=11H

GE9231

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=11L

GE9230

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=12H

GE9233

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=12L

GE9232

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=1H

GE9211

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=1L

GE9210

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=2H

GE9213

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=2L

GE9212

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=3H

GE9215

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=3H 2XSTM1

GE9333

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=3L

GE9214

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=3L 2XSTM1

GE9332

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=4H

GE9217

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=4L

GE9216

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=5H

GE9219

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=5H 2XSTM1

GE9335

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=5L

GE9218

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=5L 2XSTM1

GE9334

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=6H

GE9221

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=6L

GE9220

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=7H

GE9223

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=7H 2XSTM1

GE9337

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=7L

GE9222

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=7L 2XSTM1

GE9336

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=8H

GE9225

369

RF band in GHz

11

13

370

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=8L

GE9224

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=9H

GE9227

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=9H 2XSTM1

GE9339

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=9L

GE9226

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=9L 2XSTM1

GE9338

ODU AS13 CH=1H

GE9151

ODU AS13 CH=1H

GE9151-03

ODU AS13 CH=1L

GE9150

ODU AS13 CH=1L

GE9150-03

ODU AS13 CH=2H

GE9153

ODU AS13 CH=2H

GE9153-03

ODU AS13 CH=2L

GE9152

ODU AS13 CH=2L

GE9152-03

ODU AS13 CH=3H

GE9155

ODU AS13 CH=3H

GE9155-03

ODU AS13 CH=3L

GE9154

ODU AS13 CH=3L

GE9154-03

ODU AS13 CH=4H

GE9157

ODU AS13 CH=4H

GE9157-03

ODU AS13 CH=4L

GE9156

ODU AS13 CH=4L

GE9156-03

ODU AS13 CH=5H

GE9159

ODU AS13 CH=5H

GE9159-03

ODU AS13 CH=5L

GE9158

ODU AS13 CH=5L

GE9158-03

ODU AS13 CH=6H

GE9161

ODU AS13 CH=6H

GE9161-03

ODU AS13 CH=6L

GE9160

ODU AS13 CH=6L

GE9160-03

ODU AS13 CH=7H

GE9163

ODU AS13 CH=7H

GE9163-03

ODU AS13 CH=7L

GE9162

ODU AS13 CH=7L

GE9162-03

ODU AS13 CH=8H

GE9165

ODU AS13 CH=8H

GE9165-03

ODU AS13 CH=8L

GE9164

ODU AS13 CH=8L

GE9164-03

MN.00224.E - 011

RF band in GHz

13

15

MN.00224.E - 011

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS13 SB=1H

GE9021

ODU AS13 SB=1H

GE9021-03

ODU AS13 SB=1L

GE9020

ODU AS13 SB=1L

GE9020-03

ODU AS13 SB=2H

GE9023

ODU AS13 SB=2H

GE9023-03

ODU AS13 SB=2L

GE9022

ODU AS13 SB=2L

GE9022-03

ODU AS13 SB=3H

GE9025

ODU AS13 SB=3H

GE9025-03

ODU AS13 SB=3L

GE9024

ODU AS13 SB=3L

GE9024-03

ODU AS13 SB=4H

GE9277

ODU AS13 SB=4H

GE9277-03

ODU AS13 SB=4L

GE9276

ODU AS13 SB=4L

GE9276-03

ODU AS15 CH=1H

GE9105

ODU AS15 CH=1L

GE9104

ODU AS15 CH=2H

GE9107

ODU AS15 CH=2L

GE9106

ODU AS15 CH=3H

GE9109

ODU AS15 CH=3L

GE9108

ODU AS15 CH=4H

GE9111

ODU AS15 CH=4L

GE9110

ODU AS15/315 /322 SB=3H

GE9205

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=1H

GE9201

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=1H

GE9201-03

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=1L

GE9200

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=1L

GE9200-03

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=1L

GE9207-03

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=2H

GE9203

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=2H

GE9203-03

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=2L

GE9202

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=2L

GE9202-03

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=3H

GE9205-03

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=3L

GE9204

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=3L

GE9204-03

371

RF band in GHz

15

372

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=4H

GE9207

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=4L

GE9206

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=4L

GE9206-03

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=5H

GE9209

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=5H

GE9209-03

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=5L

GE9208

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=5L

GE9208-03

ODU AS15/420 SB=1H

GE9027

ODU AS15/420 SB=1H

GE9027-03

ODU AS15/420 SB=1L

GE9026

ODU AS15/420 SB=1L

GE9026-03

ODU AS15/420 SB=2H

GE9029

ODU AS15/420 SB=2H

GE9029-03

ODU AS15/420 SB=2L

GE9028

ODU AS15/420 SB=2L

GE9028-03

ODU AS15/420 SB=3H

GE9031

ODU AS15/420 SB=3H

GE9031-03

ODU AS15/420 SB=3L

GE9030

ODU AS15/420 SB=3L

GE9030-03

ODU AS15/420 SB=4H

GE9033

ODU AS15/420 SB=4H

GE9033-03

ODU AS15/420 SB=4L

GE9032

ODU AS15/420 SB=4L

GE9032-03

ODU AS15/490 SB=1H

GE9035

ODU AS15/490 SB=1H

GE9035-03

ODU AS15/490 SB=1L

GE9034

ODU AS15/490 SB=1L

GE9034-03

ODU AS15/490 SB=2H

GE9037

ODU AS15/490 SB=2H

GE9037-03

ODU AS15/490 SB=2L

GE9036

ODU AS15/490 SB=2L

GE9036-03

ODU AS15/490 SB=3H

GE9039

ODU AS15/490 SB=3H

GE9039-03

ODU AS15/490 SB=3L

GE9038

ODU AS15/490 SB=3L

GE9038-03

ODU AS15/490 SB=4H

GE9041

ODU AS15/490 SB=4H

GE9041-03

MN.00224.E - 011

RF band in GHz

15

18

MN.00224.E - 011

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS15/490 SB=4L

GE9040

ODU AS15/490 SB=4L

GE9040-03

ODU AS15/644 SB=1H

GE9313

ODU AS15/644 SB=1H

GE9313-03

ODU AS15/644 SB=1L

GE9312

ODU AS15/644 SB=1L

GE9312-03

ODU AS15/644 SB=2H

GE9315

ODU AS15/644 SB=2H

GE9315-03

ODU AS15/644 SB=2L

GE9314

ODU AS15/644 SB=2L

GE9314-03

ODU AS15/728 CH=1H

GE9105-03

ODU AS15/728 CH=1L

GE9104-03

ODU AS15/728 CH=2H

GE9107-03

ODU AS15/728 CH=2L

GE9106-03

ODU AS15/728 CH=3H

GE9109-03

ODU AS15/728 CH=3L

GE9108-03

ODU AS15/728 CH=4H

GE9111-03

ODU AS15/728 CH=4L

GE9110-03

ODU AS15/728 SB=1H

GE9047

ODU AS15/728 SB=1H

GE9047-03

ODU AS15/728 SB=1L

GE9046

ODU AS15/728 SB=1L

GE9046-03

ODU AS18 CH=10H

GE9073

ODU AS18 CH=10L

GE9072

ODU AS18 CH=11H

GE9075

ODU AS18 CH=11L

GE9074

ODU AS18 CH=12H

GE9077

ODU AS18 CH=12L

GE9076

ODU AS18 CH=13H

GE9079

ODU AS18 CH=13L

GE9078

ODU AS18 CH=14H

GE9081

ODU AS18 CH=14L

GE9080

ODU AS18 CH=15H

GE9083

ODU AS18 CH=15L

GE9082

ODU AS18 CH=16H

GE9085

ODU AS18 CH=16L

GE9084

ODU AS18 CH=17H

GE9087

373

RF band in GHz

18

374

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS18 CH=17L

GE9086

ODU AS18 CH=1H

GE9055

ODU AS18 CH=1L

GE9054

ODU AS18 CH=2H

GE9057

ODU AS18 CH=2L

GE9056

ODU AS18 CH=3H

GE9059

ODU AS18 CH=3L

GE9058

ODU AS18 CH=4H

GE9061

ODU AS18 CH=4L

GE9060

ODU AS18 CH=5H

GE9063

ODU AS18 CH=5L

GE9062

ODU AS18 CH=6H

GE9065

ODU AS18 CH=6L

GE9064

ODU AS18 CH=7H

GE9067

ODU AS18 CH=7L

GE9066

ODU AS18 CH=8H

GE9069

ODU AS18 CH=8L

GE9068

ODU AS18 CH=9H

GE9071

ODU AS18 CH=9L

GE9070

ODU AS18 SB=1H

GE9001

ODU AS18 SB=1L

GE9000

ODU AS18 SB=2H

GE9003

ODU AS18 SB=2L

GE9002

ODU AS18 SB=3H

GE9005

ODU AS18 SB=3L

GE9004

ODU AS18 SB=4H

GE9007

ODU AS18 SB=4L

GE9006

ODU AS18/1010 CH=10H

GE9073-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=10L

GE9072-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=11H

GE9075-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=11L

GE9074-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=12H

GE9077-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=12L

GE9076-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=13H

GE9079-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=13L

GE9078-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=14H

GE9081-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=14L

GE9080-03

MN.00224.E - 011

RF band in GHz

18

23

MN.00224.E - 011

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS18/1010 CH=15H

GE9083-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=15L

GE9082-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=16H

GE9085-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=16L

GE9084-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=17H

GE9087-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=17L

GE9086-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=1H

GE9055-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=1L

GE9054-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=2H

GE9057-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=2L

GE9056-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=3H

GE9059-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=3L

GE9058-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=4H

GE9061-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=4L

GE9060-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=5H

GE9063-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=5L

GE9062-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=6H

GE9065-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=6L

GE9064-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=7H

GE9067-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=7L

GE9066-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=8H

GE9069-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=8L

GE9068-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=9H

GE9071-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=9L

GE9070-03

ODU AS18/1010 SB=1H

GE9001-03

ODU AS18/1010 SB=1L

GE9000-03

ODU AS18/1010 SB=2H

GE9003-03

ODU AS18/1010 SB=2L

GE9002-03

ODU AS18/1010 SB=3H

GE9005-03

ODU AS18/1010 SB=3L

GE9004-03

ODU AS18/1010 SB=4H

GE9007-03

ODU AS18/1010 SB=4L

GE9006-03

ODU AS18/1560 SB=1H

GE9183

ODU AS18/1560 SB=1H

GE9183-03

ODU AS18/1560 SB=1L

GE9182

ODU AS18/1560 SB=1L

GE9182-03

ODU AS23/1008 SB=1H

GE9171

375

RF band in GHz

23

25

32

376

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS23/1008 SB=1H

GE9171-03

ODU AS23/1008 SB=1L

GE9170

ODU AS23/1008 SB=1L

GE9170-03

ODU AS23/1008 SB=2H

GE9049

ODU AS23/1008 SB=2H

GE9049-03

ODU AS23/1008 SB=2L

GE9048

ODU AS23/1008 SB=2L

GE9048-03

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=1H

GE9241

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=1H

GE9241-03

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=1L

GE9240

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=1L

GE9240-03

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=2H

GE9243

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=2H

GE9243-03

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=2L

GE9242

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=2L

GE9242-03

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=3H

GE9245

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=3H

GE9245-03

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=3L

GE9244

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=3L

GE9244-03

ODU AS25 SB=1H

GE9167

ODU AS25 SB=1H

GE9167-03

ODU AS25 SB=1L

GE9166

ODU AS25 SB=1L

GE9166-03

ODU AS25 SB=2H

GE9169

ODU AS25 SB=2H

GE9169-03

ODU AS25 SB=2L

GE9168

ODU AS25 SB=2L

GE9168-03

ODU AS32 SB=1H

GE9317

ODU AS32 SB=1H

GE9317-03

ODU AS32 SB=1L

GE9316

ODU AS32 SB=1L

GE9316-03

ODU AS32 SB=2H

GE9319

ODU AS32 SB=2H

GE9319-03

ODU AS32 SB=2L

GE9318

ODU AS32 SB=2L

GE9318-03

ODU AS32 SB=3H

GE9321

ODU AS32 SB=3H

GE9321-03

MN.00224.E - 011

RF band in GHz
32

38

ODU description

Part number

ODU AS32 SB=3L

GE9320

ODU AS32 SB=3L

GE9320-03

ODU AS38 SB=1H

GE9307

ODU AS38 SB=1H

GE9307-03

ODU AS38 SB=1L

GE9306

ODU AS38 SB=1L

GE9306-03

ODU AS38 SB=2H

GE9309

ODU AS38 SB=2H

GE9309-03

ODU AS38 SB=2L

GE9308

ODU AS38 SB=2L

GE9308-03

Tab.52 - ODU ASN part number and description
RF band in GHz

6

7

MN.00224.E - 011

ODU description

Part number

ODU ASN6L SB=1H

GE9501

ODU ASN6L SB=1L

GE9500

ODU ASN6L SB=2H

GE9503

ODU ASN6L SB=2L

GE9502

ODU ASN6L SB=3H

GE9505

ODU ASN6L SB=3L

GE9504

ODU ASN6L SB=4H

GE9507

ODU ASN6L SB=4L

GE9506

ODU ASN6U SB=1H

GE9509

ODU ASN6U SB=1L

GE9508

ODU ASN6U SB=2H

GE9511

ODU ASN6U SB=2L

GE9510

ODU ASN6U SB=3H

GE9513

ODU ASN6U SB=3L

GE9512

ODU ASN7L/161 SB=1H

GE9519

ODU ASN7L/161 SB=1L

GE9518

ODU ASN7L/161 SB=2H

GE9521

ODU ASN7L/161 SB=2L

GE9520

ODU ASN7L/161 SB=3H

GE9523

ODU ASN7L/161 SB=3L

GE9522

ODU ASN7L/196 SB=1H

GE9525

ODU ASN7L/196 SB=1L

GE9524

ODU ASN7L/196 SB=2H

GE9527

377

RF band in GHz

7

8

10

13

378

ODU description

Part number

ODU ASN7L/196 SB=2L

GE9526

ODU ASN7L/196 SB=3H

GE9529

ODU ASN7L/196 SB=3L

GE9528

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=1H

GE9535

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=1L

GE9534

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=2H

GE9537

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=2L

GE9536

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=3H

GE9539

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=3L

GE9538

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=4H

GE9541

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=4L

GE9540

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=5H

GE9543

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=5L

GE9542

ODU ASN7M/161 SB=1H

GE9545

ODU ASN7M/161 SB=1L

GE9544

ODU ASN7M/161 SB=2H

GE9547

ODU ASN7M/161 SB=2L

GE9546

ODU ASN7M/161 SB=3H

GE9549

ODU ASN7M/161 SB=3L

GE9548

ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=1H

GE9583

ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=1L

GE9582

ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=2H

GE9585

ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=2L

GE9584

ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=3H

GE9587

ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=3L

GE9586

ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=4H

GE9589

ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=4L

GE9588

ODU ASN10/350 SB=1H

GE9601

ODU ASN10/350 SB=1L

GE9600

ODU ASN13 SB=1H

GE9613

ODU ASN13 SB=1L

GE9612

ODU ASN13 SB=2H

GE9615

ODU ASN13 SB=2L

GE9614

ODU ASN13 SB=3H

GE9617

ODU ASN13 SB=3L

GE9616

ODU ASN13 SB=4H

GE9619

ODU ASN13 SB=4L

GE9618

MN.00224.E - 011

RF band in GHz

15

18

23

25

MN.00224.E - 011

ODU description

Part number

ODU ASN15 315/322 SB=1H

GE9629

ODU ASN15 315/322 SB=1L

GE9628

ODU ASN15/420 SB=1H

GE9647

ODU ASN15/420 SB=1L

GE9646

ODU ASN15/420 SB=2H

GE9649

ODU ASN15/420 SB=2L

GE9648

ODU ASN15/420 SB=3H

GE9651

ODU ASN15/420 SB=3L

GE9650

ODU ASN15/420 SB=4H

GE9653

ODU ASN15/420 SB=4L

GE9652

ODU ASN15/728 SB=1H

GE9691

ODU ASN15/728 SB=1L

GE9690

ODU ASN18/1010 SB=1H

GE9701

ODU ASN18/1010 SB=1L

GE9700

ODU ASN18/1010 SB=2H

GE9703

ODU ASN18/1010 SB=2L

GE9702

ODU ASN18/1010 SB=3H

GE9705

ODU ASN18/1010 SB=3L

GE9704

ODU ASN18/1010 SB=4H

GE9707

ODU ASN18/1010 SB=4L

GE9706

ODU ASN18/1560 SB=1H

GE9717

ODU ASN18/1560 SB=1L

GE9716

ODU ASN23/1008 SB=1H

GE9719

ODU ASN23/1008 SB=1L

GE9718

ODU ASN23/1008 SB=2H

GE9721

ODU ASN23/1008 SB=2L

GE9720

ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=1H

GE9727

ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=1L

GE9726

ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=2H

GE9729

ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=2L

GE9728

ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=3H

GE9731

ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=3L

GE9730

ODU ASN25 SB=1H

GE9737

ODU ASN25 SB=1L

GE9736

ODU ASN25 SB=2H

GE9739

ODU ASN25 SB=2L

GE9738

379

Tab.53 - ODU ASN HP part number and description
RF band in GHz

7GHz

ODU description

Part Number

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=5L

GE2209

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=5H

GE2210

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=4L

GE2207

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=4H

GE2208

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=3L

GE2205

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=3H

GE2206

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=2L

GE2203

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=2H

GE2204

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=1L

GE2201

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=1H

GE2202

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=5L

GE2179

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=5H

GE2180

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=4L

GE2177

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=4H

GE2178

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=3L

GE2175

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=3H

GE2176

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=2L

GE2173

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=2H

GE2174

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=1L

GE2171

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=1H

GE2172

Fig.258 - Label attached on the ODU mechanical body AL

380

MN.00224.E - 011

Section 9.
LISTS AND SERVICES

42

LIST OF FIGURES

Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication................................................ 14
Fig.2 - Elasticized band .................................................................................................. 14
Fig.3 - Coiled cord ......................................................................................................... 14
Fig.4 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419 .................................................................... 15
Fig.5 - ALplus2 1+0 ....................................................................................................... 27
Fig.6 - ALplus2 1+1 ....................................................................................................... 27
Fig.7 - ALCplus2 1+0 and ALCplus2e 2E1 1+0................................................................... 27
Fig.8 - ALCplus2 1+1 and ALCplus2e E1 2+0/1+1 and ALCplus2e 2E1 XPIC 2+0.................... 28
Fig.9 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp 16E1 ....................................................................................... 28
Fig.10 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp 16E1 ..................................................................................... 28
Fig.11 - ALCplus2 1+0 32E1 ........................................................................................... 28
Fig.12 - ALCplus2 1+1 32E1 ........................................................................................... 28
Fig.13 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp nodal..................................................................................... 28
Fig.14 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp nodal..................................................................................... 28
Fig.15 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1 ................................................................................... 29
Fig.16 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 ....................................................................... 29
Fig.17 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL ............................................................ 29
Fig.18 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1 ............................................................................ 29
Fig.19 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 .............................................................. 29
Fig.20 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL ..................................................... 29
Fig.21 - N+0................................................................................................................. 30
Fig.22 - Synchronisation block diagram ............................................................................ 49
Fig.23 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................... 54

MN.00224.E - 011

381

Fig.24 - ALplus2 with 16E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram ........................................ 55
Fig.25 - ALPlus2 with 16E1, 2x(1+0) configuration, block diagram ....................................... 56
Fig.26 - Enabling Line Aggregation, Enable trunk1 ............................................................. 61
Fig.27 - Line trunking .................................................................................................... 62
Fig.28 - Radio trunking .................................................................................................. 63
Fig.29 - Line protection through distributed ELP................................................................. 64
Fig.30 - Hierarchical structure of Maintenance Domains ...................................................... 66
Fig.31 - ALCplus2 with 32E1 expansion, STM-1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram ............ 72
Fig.32 - ALCplus2 with 16E1 expansion, STM1, NBUS, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram .... 73
Fig.33 - ALCplus2 with 2E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram ........................................ 74
Fig.34 - ALCplus2 with 16E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram ...................................... 74
Fig.35 - Node block diagram in protected configuration ...................................................... 75
Fig.36 - ACAP: Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization ...................................................... 80
Fig.37 - ACCP: Adjacent Channel CoPolarization ................................................................ 80
Fig.38 - CCDP: CoChannel Dual Polarization ...................................................................... 80
Fig.39 - Frequency arrangement ..................................................................................... 81
Fig.40 - Layout of 2x(1+0) with XPIC............................................................................... 81
Fig.41 - Frequency arrangements .................................................................................... 82
Fig.42 - Layout of 2x(1+0) two channels with hybrid coupler............................................... 82
Fig.43 - Frequency arrangement ..................................................................................... 83
Fig.44 - Layout of 2x(1+0) with circulator......................................................................... 83
Fig.45 - Frequency arrangement ..................................................................................... 84
Fig.46 - Layout 4x(1+0) with XPIC and hybrid coupler........................................................ 84
Fig.47 - Frequency arrangement ..................................................................................... 85
Fig.48 - Layout of 4x(1+0) with circulator......................................................................... 85
Fig.49 - Frequency arrangement ..................................................................................... 86
Fig.50 - 8x(1+0) with XPIC and multicirculator.................................................................. 87
Fig.51 - Slot numbering into multicirculator ODUs.............................................................. 88
Fig.52 - Synchronization circuit ....................................................................................... 90
Fig.53 - RED curve ........................................................................................................ 96
Fig.54 - Line trunking .................................................................................................... 97
Fig.55 - ALCplus2e block diagram .................................................................................. 110
Fig.56 - ALCplus2e 1+1 layout ...................................................................................... 110
Fig.57 - ALCplus2e 2+0 layout ...................................................................................... 111
Fig.58 - Frequency reuse system ................................................................................... 112
Fig.59 - AS and ASN ODUs ........................................................................................... 116
Fig.60 - Final 1+1 assembly with AS and ASN ODU .......................................................... 117
Fig.61 - ODU block diagram .......................................................................................... 118
Fig.62 - 1+1 hot stand–by 1 antenna ............................................................................. 119
Fig.63 - 1+1 hot stand–by 2 antennas ........................................................................... 119
Fig.64 - ATPC operation ............................................................................................... 120
Fig.65 - Grounding connection ...................................................................................... 125
Fig.66 ........................................................................................................................ 126

382

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.67 - Grounding kit positioning .................................................................................. 127
Fig.68 - IDU ALplus2 front panel ................................................................................... 129
Fig.69 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female ................................................................. 130
Fig.70 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female ................................................................. 132
Fig.71 - Antisliding strip ............................................................................................... 146
Fig.72 - 60–114 mm pole supporting plate fixing ............................................................. 147
Fig.73 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole ............................................................................ 148
Fig.74 - Mounting position ............................................................................................ 149
Fig.75 - Possible positions of the support with ODU fast locking mechanism ........................ 150
Fig.76 - Band-it pole mounting kit ................................................................................. 151
Fig.77 - Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate ................................................. 152
Fig.78 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always vertical: handle at the left side. ........................................................................ 153
Fig.79 - ODU body reference tooth ................................................................................ 154
Fig.80 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version.................................................................... 155
Fig.81 - ODU grounding ............................................................................................... 156
Fig.82 - Kit V32409 ..................................................................................................... 157
Fig.83 - Kit V32415 ..................................................................................................... 158
Fig.84 - Wall supporting plate ....................................................................................... 163
Fig.85 - Support with ODU fast locking mechanism .......................................................... 164
Fig.86 - Mounting possible positions............................................................................... 165
Fig.87 - Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate.................................................. 166
Fig.88 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always vertical: handle at the left side. ........................................................................ 167
Fig.89 - ODU body reference tooth ................................................................................ 168
Fig.90 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version.................................................................... 169
Fig.91 - ODU grounding ............................................................................................... 170
Fig.92 - Kit V32409 ..................................................................................................... 171
Fig.93 - Kit V32415 ..................................................................................................... 172
Fig.94 - Centring ring position....................................................................................... 177
Fig.95 - Antislide strip.................................................................................................. 178
Fig.96 - Support mount on pole..................................................................................... 179
Fig.97 - Supporting system position ............................................................................... 180
Fig.98 - Hole E............................................................................................................ 180
Fig.99 - Antenna installation on pole support................................................................... 181
Fig.100 -Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.................................................................... 181
Fig.101 - Support system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence ........................ 182
Fig.102 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 183
Fig.103 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization ............................................. 184
Fig.104 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization .......................................... 184
Fig.105 - Hybrid and polarization disk ............................................................................ 185
Fig.106 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13GHz and 15 GHz)........................................... 186
Fig.107 - Hybrid mount on pole support ......................................................................... 187

MN.00224.E - 011

383

Fig.108 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version........................................................ 188
Fig.109 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments.................................................................. 189
Fig.110 - Antenna aiming block ..................................................................................... 190
Fig.111 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 191
Fig.112 - 1+0 pole mounting ........................................................................................ 196
Fig.113 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 197
Fig.114 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. ............................................................ 197
Fig.115 - 1+0 support.................................................................................................. 198
Fig.116 - ODU housing final position for both polarization ................................................. 199
Fig.117 - Antenna aiming ............................................................................................. 200
Fig.118 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 201
Fig.119 - Hybrid and twist disk...................................................................................... 202
Fig.120 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz).......................................... 203
Fig.121 - Hybrid installation .......................................................................................... 204
Fig.122 - 1+1 ODUs installation .................................................................................... 205
Fig.123 - 1+0 pole mounting ........................................................................................ 210
Fig.124 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 211
Fig.125 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. ............................................................ 211
Fig.126 - 1+0 support.................................................................................................. 212
Fig.127 - ODU housing final position for both polarization ................................................. 213
Fig.128 - Antenna aiming ............................................................................................. 214
Fig.129 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 215
Fig.130 - Hybrid and twist disk...................................................................................... 216
Fig.131 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz).......................................... 217
Fig.132 - Hybrid installation .......................................................................................... 218
Fig.133 - 1+1 ODUs installation .................................................................................... 219
Fig.134 - AS and ASN ODUs.......................................................................................... 227
Fig.135 - ODU ASN with fast lock coupling flange............................................................. 228
Fig.136 - ODU ASN with standard coupling flange ............................................................ 229
Fig.137 - 1+0 ODU installation ...................................................................................... 230
Fig.138 - 1+1 ODU installation ...................................................................................... 231
Fig.139 - Polarization disk ............................................................................................ 232
Fig.140 - 1+0 antenna flange ....................................................................................... 232
Fig.141 - 1+1 antenna flange ....................................................................................... 233
Fig.142 - 1+1 ASN support kit (60-114) code V60100-01 ................................................. 237
Fig.143 - 7GHz multichannel support, code V60361 ......................................................... 238
Fig.144 - ODU with screws and O-ring from code V60049-10 ............................................ 239
Fig.145 - Mounting ODUs onto multichannel support ........................................................ 240
Fig.146 - Mounting multichannel short V60366 onto multichannel support........................... 241
Fig.147 - Mounting flexible waveguides from antenna to multichannel support..................... 242
Fig.148 - 8+0 layout.................................................................................................... 243
Fig.149 - 8+0 layout and measures in mm ..................................................................... 244

384

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.150 - Detected voltage versus RF received signal ....................................................... 249
Fig.151 - Local Lan-1 port to remote Lan-1 port connection .............................................. 252
Fig.152 - Modulation and capacity ................................................................................. 253
Fig.153 - View Current Configuration ............................................................................. 253
Fig.154 - Switch general settings................................................................................... 254
Fig.155 - Lan-1 interface settings .................................................................................. 255
Fig.156 - Vlan settings for LAN-1.................................................................................... 255
Fig.157 - Vlan settings for Port A ................................................................................... 256
Fig.158 - Priority setting for Lan-1 and Port A ................................................................. 256
Fig.159 - 3 ports to 3 ports connections with segregated traffic ......................................... 257
Fig.160 - Modulation and capacity ................................................................................. 257
Fig.161 - View Current Configuration ............................................................................. 258
Fig.162 - Switch general settings................................................................................... 258
Fig.163 - Lan-1 interface settings .................................................................................. 259
Fig.164 - Lan1 Vlan settings ......................................................................................... 260
Fig.165 - Lan2 Vlan settings ......................................................................................... 260
Fig.166 - Lan3 Vlan settings ......................................................................................... 261
Fig.167 - Port A Vlan settings........................................................................................ 261
Fig.168 - Vlan Configuration Table ................................................................................. 262
Fig.169 - 3 ports to3 ports connections with segregated Tagged and Untagged traffic ........... 262
Fig.170 -Modulation and Capacity .................................................................................. 263
Fig.171 - View Current Configuration ............................................................................. 263
Fig.172 - Switch general settings................................................................................... 264
Fig.173 - Lan1 Vlan settings ......................................................................................... 264
Fig.174 - Lan2 Vlan settings ......................................................................................... 265
Fig.175 - Lan3 Vlan settings ......................................................................................... 265
Fig.176 - Port A Vlan settings........................................................................................ 266
Fig.177 - Vlan Configuration Table ................................................................................. 266
Fig.178 - Subnetwork Craft Terminal - Communication setup ............................................ 268
Fig.179 - IP Ethernet ................................................................................................... 269
Fig.180 - LCT PPP ........................................................................................................ 269
Fig.181 - PPP Radio ..................................................................................................... 270
Fig.182 - Store Routing Table ....................................................................................... 271
Fig.183 - Stored Routing Table...................................................................................... 272
Fig.184 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 273
Fig.185 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard - Actual Configuration ..................................... 274
Fig.186 - Add new station............................................................................................. 275
Fig.187 - Add New Network Element .............................................................................. 276
Fig.188 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 277
Fig.189 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 278
Fig.190 - ALCplus2 node connections ............................................................................. 280
Fig.191 - Nodal ALCplus2 Manager ................................................................................ 281
Fig.192 - Drag and drop E1 stream ................................................................................ 283

MN.00224.E - 011

385

Fig.193 - VC auto loop ................................................................................................. 284
Fig.194 - Pass-through cross-connection ........................................................................ 285
Fig.195 - Drag and drop E1 stream ................................................................................ 286
Fig.196 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 287
Fig.197 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 288
Fig.198 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 289
Fig.199 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 290
Fig.200 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 291
Fig.201 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 292
Fig.202 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 293
Fig.203 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 294
Fig.204 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 295
Fig.205 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 295
Fig.206 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 296
Fig.207 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 297
Fig.208 - Node composition .......................................................................................... 299
Fig.209 - Node composition .......................................................................................... 300
Fig.210 - Current alarms .............................................................................................. 302
Fig.211 - STP/Trunking tab (Trunk active) (Port A contextual area) .................................... 304
Fig.212 - Trunking tab (Trunk active)............................................................................. 306
Fig.213 - OAM-FM Domain contextual area ..................................................................... 308
Fig.214 - OAM-FM MA/MEP contextual area ..................................................................... 309
Fig.215 - Vlan status and commands ............................................................................. 309
Fig.216 - ELP Enabling Protection .................................................................................. 311
Fig.217 - Inserting allowed IP address............................................................................ 312
Fig.218 - List of allowed IP address................................................................................ 313
Fig.219 - Sync transmitted from local to remote radio ...................................................... 314
Fig.220 ...................................................................................................................... 316
Fig.221 ...................................................................................................................... 316
Fig.222 ...................................................................................................................... 317
Fig.223 ...................................................................................................................... 317
Fig.224 ...................................................................................................................... 318
Fig.225 ...................................................................................................................... 318
Fig.226 ...................................................................................................................... 319
Fig.227 - E1 retiming ................................................................................................... 319
Fig.228 ...................................................................................................................... 320
Fig.229 ...................................................................................................................... 329
Fig.230 ...................................................................................................................... 330
Fig.231 ...................................................................................................................... 331
Fig.232 ...................................................................................................................... 331
Fig.233 ...................................................................................................................... 331
Fig.234 ...................................................................................................................... 331
Fig.235 ...................................................................................................................... 332

386

MN.00224.E - 011

Fig.236 ...................................................................................................................... 334
Fig.237 ...................................................................................................................... 335
Fig.238 - Loop ............................................................................................................ 351
Fig.239 - Termination points for the Performance Monitoring ............................................. 351
Fig.240 - IDU GAI0165 ................................................................................................ 354
Fig.241 - IDU GAI0166 ................................................................................................ 354
Fig.242 - IDU P/N........................................................................................................ 355
Fig.243 - ALCplus2 1+0 ............................................................................................... 356
Fig.244 - ALCplus2 1+1 ............................................................................................... 356
Fig.245 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp 16E1.................................................................................. 357
Fig.246 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp 16E1.................................................................................. 357
Fig.247 - ALCplus2 1+0 32E1 ....................................................................................... 357
Fig.248 - ALCplus2 1+1 32E1 ....................................................................................... 357
Fig.249 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp nodal ................................................................................. 357
Fig.250 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp nodal ................................................................................. 357
Fig.251 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1 ............................................................................... 360
Fig.252 - ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 ................................................................... 360
Fig.253 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL......................................................... 360
Fig.254 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1 ........................................................................ 360
Fig.255 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1........................................................... 360
Fig.256 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL.................................................. 360
Fig.257 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 ............................................................................... 360
Fig.258 - Label attached on the ODU mechanical body AL ................................................. 380

MN.00224.E - 011

387

388

MN.00224.E - 011

43

LIST OF TABLES

Tab.1 - Artificial respiration .............................................................................................13
Tab.2 - ALCplus2e IDU configurations ...............................................................................23
Tab.3 - ALCplus2e IDU configurations (updated hardware)...................................................24
Tab.4 - Optical interface characteristics .............................................................................33
Tab.5 - Ethernet optical interfaces characteristics, SPF and LLC connectors ............................33
Tab.6 - Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) for ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
(Ethernet only) ...............................................................................................................34
Tab.7 - Estimated Ethernet throughput ............................................................................35
Tab.8 - Guaranteed Ethernet Latency (ms) for ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e (Ethernet only) ....35
Tab.9 - Rx Alarm Priority .................................................................................................39
Tab.10 - Maximum outage due to the Tx switching .............................................................39
Tab.11 - Tx Alarm Priority ...............................................................................................39
Tab.12 - IMAX and consumption ........................................................................................40
Tab.13 - E1 priority ........................................................................................................52
Tab.14 ..........................................................................................................................89
Tab.15 - Characteristics of the cables.............................................................................. 123
Tab.16 - 10/100/1000BaseT, RJ45 ................................................................................. 129
Tab.17 - 8xE1, 50 pin SCSI female 75 Ohm .................................................................... 130
Tab.18 - 8xE1, 50 pin SCSI female 120 Ohm) .................................................................. 131
Tab.19 - RS232 SUB-D 9 pin male ................................................................................. 132
Tab.20 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT) ....................................................................... 133
Tab.21 - MNGT/1 and MNGT/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection
(RJ45) .........................................................................................................................133
Tab.22 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45) ....................... 133
Tab.23 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pin-out (RJ45).......................................................... 134
Tab.24 - Trib A, B connector .......................................................................................... 135
Tab.25 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT ....................................................................... 136
Tab.26 - Trib A, B connector .......................................................................................... 138
Tab.27 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT ....................................................................... 139
Tab.28 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 143
Tab.29 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 144
Tab.30 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 145
Tab.31 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 160
Tab.32 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 160
Tab.33 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 162
Tab.34 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 175
Tab.35 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 195
Tab.36 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 209

MN.00224.E - 011

389

Tab.37 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 222
Tab.38 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 226
Tab.39 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 236
Tab.40 - Common alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e .................................................. 342
Tab.41 - ETH LAN alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e ................................................... 343
Tab.42 - LIM alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e.......................................................... 343
Tab.43 - Node alarms - ALCplus2/ALCplus2e.................................................................... 344
Tab.44 - Radio alarms - ALplus/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e ......................................................... 345
Tab.45 - Radio alarms - ALplus/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e ......................................................... 345
Tab.46 - RT alarms - ALplus/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e ............................................................. 346
Tab.47 - SETS alarms - ALplus/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e ......................................................... 346
Tab.48 - SNTP alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e ....................................................... 346
Tab.49 - STM1 alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e ....................................................... 347
Tab.50 - IDU part number .............................................................................................. 354
Tab.51 - Part number and description ............................................................................. 361
Tab.52 - ODU ASN part number and description ............................................................... 377
Tab.53 - ODU ASN HP part number and description .......................................................... 380

390

MN.00224.E - 011

44

ASSISTANCE SERVICE

For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the company manufacturing the product.

SIAE helpdesk mail is: help@siaemic.it

MN.00224.E - 011

391

392

MN.00224.E - 011